THE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES IN MEMORY OF HELEN LOUISE LEGO - 5-- GYMNASTICS A TEXT-BOOK OF THE GERMAN-AMERICAN SYSTEM OF GYMNASTICS SPECIALLY ADAPTED TO THE USE OF TEACHERS AND PUPILS IN PUBLIC AND PRIVATE SCHOOLS AND GYMNASIUMS EDITED BY W. A. STECHER SECRETARY OF THE COMMITTEE ox PHYSICAL TRAINING OF THE NORTH AMERICAN GYMNASTIC UNION BOSTON LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO. COPYRIGHT, 1895, 1896, BY THE NOBMAL SCHOOL OF THE NORTH AMERICAN GYMNASTIC UNION. TYPOGRAPHY BY C. J. PETERS & SON, ROCKWELL AND CHURCHILL PRESS, BOSTON, U.S.A. Ed./ Psych. Library PREFACE THE lessons contained in this booK are the result of a resolution passed at a meeting of the teachers of the North American Gymnastic Union. Said resolution provided that teachers should contribute to a work on the System of German Gymnastics, as taught in the gymnasiums of the North American Gymnastic Union, and that the presiding officer should assign to sixteen of the teachers present each a part of the work. The series of lessons as arranged by these teachers on the different subjects is hereby offered to all teachers as a guide to work by, the name of the author being given with each series. Some of the contributors have divided their work into separate grades of difficulty, while others have merely kept a systematic progression in view. No paper has been changed by the compiler, as it was deemed best to give the original pro- duction of each contributor. This will enable the reader to become acquainted with the manner and order in which some of the foremost teachers of the German System of Gymnastics arrange their work, and to follow that plan which best suits the conditions under which he works. WM. A. STECHER. ST. Louis, Mo. CONTENTS 1 ?AGE William Fleck . . . New York . 1 NOTES FOR LEADERS William A. Stecher . St. Louis . . 18 MARCHES William A. Stecher . St. Louis . . 22 Henry Suder . . . . Chicago . . 26 WAND EXERCISES William Renter . . . Davenport . 46 EXERCISES WITH CLUBS F. W. Froehlich . . . St. Louis . . 98 Henry Suder . . . . Chicago . . 117 EXERCISES WITH RINGS Dr. Karl Zapp . . . Cleveland 130 FANCY STEPS , Christian Eberhard . Boston . . . 136 HORIZONTAL BAR F. W. Froehlich . . . St. Louis . . 148 PARALLEL BARS A. E. Kindervater . . St. Louis . . 166 SIDE AND LONG HORSE William A. Stecher. . St. Louis . . 186 VERTICAL, INCLINED, AND HORIZON- TAL LADDER Dr. Henry Hartung . Chicago . . 205 FOUR INCLINED LADDERS . . . ; Dr. Karl Zapp . . . Cleveland 239 RINGS Dr. Karl Ziegler . . . Cincinnati 242 VERTICAL POLES William Kopp . . . Chicago . . 250 SWINGING POLES Dr. Karl Zapp . . . Cleveland 254 BUCK William A. Stecher. . St. Louis . . 257 ROUND SWING Hans Ballin . . . . Carbondale . 261 WHIFFLE LADDER Hans Ballin . . . . Carbondale . 269 BALANCING BOARD Richard Pertuch . Philadelphia 272 HIGH AND FAR JUMPING, AND POLE VAULTING Herm. Hein . . . . Chicago . . 282 HOP, STEP AND JUMP, HIGHFAR JUMP, WEIGHTS, SPEAR THROW- ING D. M. Krogh . . . . Philadelphia 290 GYMNASTIC GAMES . KarlKroh .... . Chicago . . 299 ROUNDEL, MARCHING William A. Stecher . . St. Louis . . 322 ROUNDEL WITH HAND APPARATUS, RINGS, WANDS, AND HOOPS . . Dr. Karl Zapp . . . Cleveland 328 SYSTEM AND METHOD OF GERMAN- AMERICAN GYMNASTICS BY WILLIAM FLECK Formerly director of the Normal School of Gymnastics of the North American Gymnastic Union SYSTEM OUR materials for gymnastic exercises have, ever since their existence, more than a hundred years ago, been elabo- rated in every possible direction by persons called upon to do so, with varied results. From the beginning, experience alone has passed judg- ment on the merits or immerits of an exercise, each and every addition and improvement being immediately looked upon as common property ; a custom which prevails to the present day. Since no field of human experience may be regarded as closed so long as human beings are being born, we must of course look upon gymnastics as incomplete. The German System of Gymnastics is at all times ready to admit of im- provement, but not until it has been clearly and indisputably shown that the proposed improvements are really such, and not idle illusions, which, under a high-sounding name and an ap- parently scientific garb, are calculated to impress and mislead the inexperienced. 2 GERMAN-AMI-: nn .1 -V '. y.\i VA8 //' - To give those unacquainted with the German System of Gymnastics an insight into the extraordinary wealth and vari- ety of its materials for gymnastic exercises, a short, precise synopsis of our system as it is in general use to-day and is l>est adapted to practical purposes, is here submitted. It is the sys- tem arranged by Adolf Spies, the father of the new tendency of German school-gymnastics, and the founder of gymnastics for girls, in his work, "The Doctrine of Gymnastic Art." Basel, 1840, improved and amended up to the present time by his most prominent colleagues and pupils. In accordance with this system the materials for gymnastic exercises are divided as follows : Free Exercises ; Tactics ; Exercises with Apparatus ; Exercises on Apparatus ; Compan- ion Exercises (Gesellschafts Uebungen). I FREE EXERCISES These are divided into two classes, namely, Free Exercises of the first order, and Free Exercises of the second order. A FREE EXERCISES OF THE FIRST ORDER. 1. Exercises in the fundamental position. 2. Exercises in derived positions. 3. Exercises in common marching. 4. Exercises in derived steps. 5. Exercises in common hopping. 6. Exercises in derived hops. 1 EXEKCISES IN A FUNDAMENTAL POSITION. a. Head exercises. cf. Leg exercises. b. Arm exercises. e. Turning. C. Trunk exercises. /. Compound exercises. FREE EXERCISES 3 B FREE EXERCISES OF THE SECOND ORDER. 1. Exercises in a kneeling posture. 2. Exercises in a sitting posture. 3. Exercises in a lying posture. 4. Exercises in the leaning stand. 5. Exercises in the head stand. 6. Exercises in the hand stand. With the aid of this disposition it is an easy matter to find and classify all free exercises. To begin with, it is only neces- sary to find the possible, simple activities of the designated limbs in the fundamental position, and then to arrange suc- cessively the possible combined exercises, and lastly to find out which simple and which combined exercises may be brought out in the other positions. In this manner we get a complete, systematic compilation of an abundance of free exercises. Alfred Maul, Director of the Normal School of Gymnastics of the Grand Duchy of Baden at Karlsruhe, Speaker of the National Gymnastic Society of Germany, in speaking of this matter, says : " This process, however, is anything but inter- esting and practical, if we try to take into consideration, with- out distinction, all the exercises of the different members of the body, and all positions that can -possibly be taken. It is a different thing, however, if we limit ourselves to the practical exercises and positions of gymnastic value ; for then the great mass of exercises of uncertain value, which is too intricate to be overlooked, shrinks to a number of useful exercises, which, while still quite large, may easily be overlooked and regulated. To find these in accordance with the above method is a work 4 GEllMAN-A MERIC'AN G YM \ . 1 fl V7C',S less tiresome and . v \i \ .1 -TICS be a cure for sickness; for we take it for granted that the pupils of a class enjoy normal health so long as they are able to attend school. Should this not be the case with tins or that child, the physician's diagnosis must decide whether the child is to continue its attendance at school or not. Tin- school has no time to spend with the diseases of the single pupils, for it must never lose sight of its main object. Where gymnastics are used as a remedy for an ailment or a deformity, the exercises must be carefully selected in ac- cordance with the special requirements of the case in ques- tion. Every exercise must be carefully examined into, as to its suitability in this special case, and it must be performed only in accordance with certain sanitary rules. With such gymnastics the school cannot deal, for they belong to the field of orthopedy ; and to try to transplant them to the gymnasium would be just as wrong as it would be foolish for a physician to prescribe, for a perfectly healthy person the continued use of fever-allaying medicines." " Hinc illce lacrimce;" this is the sore point over which so much foolish debating and wrangling is being indulged in nowadays, almost leading one to believe that German gym- nastics are something entirely new, and have yet to prove their practicability and value as an educational means. ( )ne of the first demands of our school is that the teacher who instructs our youth in gymnastics must be a man and a pedagogue, and not a mere gymnast or physician. This qualification was made indispensable by Adolf Spiess, the founder of the present system of German school gymnastics, more than fifty years ago ; and so strictly has it been insisted upon, that teachers of gymnastics without a pedagogical edu- METHOD 13 cation are rarely met with. The physicians of Germany have at no time pushed themselves forward as teachers of gymnastics, although a great number of them have diligently taken regular gymnastic exercise and do so yet. Concerning this, Dr. F. Dittes makes the following appropriate remark: "Instruction in gymnastics must not be isolated, but must be closely linked with the whole school education, and form an essential part thereof. Mere gymnasts are not wanted; the school needs thorough pedagogues ; and it would be most desirable if the class-teacher could, at the same time, be the instructor in gymnastics ; hence gymnastic art ought to be theoretically and practically taught in our normal schools for public school teachers." The same author, in speaking of the future of gymnas- tics, says, " If once the conviction prevails that the youth of the present age sit entirely too long on the school-benches, deriving therefrom no mental nor moral benefit, but rather im- pairing their physical welfare, if once the people shall have become conscious of this fact, then sufficient time for gym- nastic exercises will be found, and a willingness for procuring the necessary place and apparatus will naturally follow." For a harmonious development of the whole body, the first thing to be learned is the free control of one's limbs, either while standing or walking on even ground, or while in unac- customed positions, and on extraordinary bases of support. This necessitates, besides calisthenics, exercises on the appara- tus. Generally speaking, there are two methods of conducting the gymnastic exercises of the German school ; but, strictly speaking, there are any number of them. The one followed formerly, but now almost entirely out of use, is the so-called 14 t ;/;/,-. v. L v-.i.u /:/;/'. i. v GYMHA8TH a "Jahn-Eiselen" method; the other, which is now in eral use, and is frequently combined with the former, is Spiess's method. It is but a short time since that thr advo- cates of these two methods were bitterly fighting each other ; but the controversy was decided in favor of Spiess's method. At the present time all gymnastic exercises, with the ex- ception of those on the apparatus, both in schools and in in gymnastic societies, are conducted after Spiess's method. In the lower classes of schools, the exercises on the apparatus, too, are conducted after Spiess's method ; while, as a rule, in the upper classes and in the gymnasium the Jahn-Kiselen method is followed. After the old Jahn-Eiselen method gymnastic exercises are conducted in divisions ; the class is divided into small divisions of ten to fifteen pupils, each division being under the supervision of an advanced pupil (a leader), who shows certain exercises, supervises them, and assists when necessary. When the pupils have practised one kind of exercise for a certain time, a general change of divisions to a different apparatus leads to another kind of exercises ; then comes a game, in which the whole class participates, or separate games and contests are in- dulged in ; while the teacher looks after good order, and sees that the leaders show correctly the exercises, which they have been taught in a special lesson for leaders. Occasionally the teacher takes all the pupils as one class, and conducts a few simple free exercises ; but the exercises on the apparatus^ and the games, are, of course, at all times of the greatest importance. The advantages of this method of gymnastic exercises are : - "A. rapid progress of talented young gymnasts, enabling METHOD ] 5 them to do difficult exercises, so-called master-exercises (Grip- feluebungeiiy ; and a lessening of expenses." Alfred Maul speaks of this as follows : " If gymnastic art has no other end in view than to give our youth an oppor- tunity for healthful exercise in the free air, or to give them a playground where they may gratify their pleasure in test- ing their physical strength and skill, then this method may suffice ; but the aim of German gymnastics is a regulated, general development of the body. German gymnastics must be looked upon as an essential branch of education ; and they must, therefore, be conducted in a rational pedagogical man- ner. Hence, the combining of a number of classes to one class is considered a serious defect in the above described method, especially where these classes are composed of per- sons in different stages of development. As the pupils of a school are graded in classes, so ought the pupils in gym- nastics to be graded in classes, according to age, sex, etc." Spiess's method is the method of general or class gym- nastics. According to it, the pupils are divided after the manner of our public schools, and receive gymnastic instruc- tions in such a manner as to keep them under the constant supervision of the teacher, who himself gives out the exer- cises, and, when necessary, shows how to do them, and superintends the execution thereof. All the exercises, with the exception of the exercises on the apparatus, are, as a rule, performed simultaneously by all the pupils of the class, either at the command of the teacher or at counting; while the exercises on the apparatus are generally performed simultaneously by one-sixth or one-eighth of the class, on command or at counting. 16 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS While part of the class is actively employed, the others may rest from the exercises, which are often very fatiguing, and may watch their fellow-pupils while they exercise. The advantages of this method of gymnastics are: (1) A clear insight on the part of the teacher into the work and capabilities of each and every pupil ; (2) an instruction according to plan, and a systematic gradation of exercises, which is sure to gain positive results ; (3) a confidence- inspiring encouragement of timid pupils, a continued incite- ment to lazy ones, and a healthy restriction of the over- zealous ; (4) an unavoidable accustomance to attention and resoluteness ; and, lastly, a refreshing, invigorating pleasure in general, regulated work. The different kinds of exercises generally observed in class gymnastics are classified as follows : - 1. Tactics in walking and running. 2. Calisthenics with or without apparatus. 3. Exercises on the apparatus, generally on an apparatus for hanging or supporting exercises, alternating with some kind of jumping. 4. Gymnastic games. According to the age and sex of the pupils this or that class of gymnastics should receive special attention. A de- toiled instruction for the solving of all questions connected with a systematic conduction of gymnastic exercises is out of place here ; this must be left to a treatise on special methods. However, to meet the wishes of such of our English-speaking colleagues as are earnestly desirous of obtaining a better knowledge of the German method of school gymnastics, a list of the papers read on this subject, METHOD 17 during the courses of the Normal School of Gymnastics of the German Gymnastic Union of North America, when the school was situated at Indianapolis, is here given: 1. The Necessity of Physical Training. 2. The Influence of Physical Exercise on our Health. 3. The Influence of Gymnastics on Strength and Agility. 4. The Influence of Gymnastics on the Mental Forces. 5. The Object of Gymnastic Instruction. 6. Gymnastic Exercises. 7. The Gymnasium. 8. Gymnastic Apparatus. 9. The Time for Gymnastics. 10. The Gymnastic School. 11. The Dress of Gymnasts. 12. The Teacher of Gymnastics. 13. The Ruling Principles in Gymnastic Instruction. 14. Auxiliaries in Gymnastic Instruction. 15. Duration of Exercises 16. Form of Exercises. 17. The Difference between Gymnastics for Boys and Gymnastics for Girls. 18. Tactics. 19. Free Exercises. (Calisthenics.) 20. Exercises with Apparatus. 21. Exercises on Apparatus. 22. Gymnastic Games. 23. Grading of Pupils according to Work. 24. The Course of Study in Gymnastic Instruction. The text-books used were M. Zettler's " Method," and A. Maul's "Gymnastic Instruction/' is GXRMAN-AMERICAS GYMNA8TH - NOTES FOR LEADERS BY WM. A. STECHER EVERY large undertaking, especially one lasting a number of months or years, must have a definite plan by which it is governed, so that its aims may be reached, and that the efforts spent in its behalf may not be lost, or drift into wrong directions. Every class-leader undertakes a responsible piece of work when taking charge of the gymnastic work of a class or divis- ion. He must endeavor to advance his class systematically. He must know how to awaken the interest of his scholars. He must bring them to look forward to their gymnastic lesson with ever-increasing enthusiasm. He must be a model to them in every respect. He must be a teacher in the noblest sense of the word. To be able to do this a few rules must always be kept in mind. They are : 1. Try to master every exercise that you intend to teach, Practise as much as you can. 2. Thoroughly prepare yourself for each lesson. 3. Keep a memorandum of all the exercises practised, and make notes concerning their execution so as to go forward intelligently. 4. Repeat all exercises ; then alternate and combine them with new movements, gradually going from easy to difficult, from simple to complex movements. NOTES FOR LEADERS 19 5. See that your teaching is interesting to your scholars, and give them enough to do. 6. Arrange your order of exercises so that your scholars leave the gymnasium with the feeling of having been benefited. Do not waste your time on movements having little gymnastic value. 7 . Gradually bring your scholars to do all exercises with the utmost precision and correctness. 8. Show the exercise you want done in its best form. A practical illustration is better than a long explanation. 9. When exercising on the apparatus, have your scholars go to and from the same in an orderly manner and in the same order. Have your scholars stand so that all can see the exercise. 10. Gradually increase the difficulty of your exercises. Build up, so to say, your exercises from a simple movement to a complex, but add no new exercises for which the pupils have not been prepared by the foregoing movements. 11. When exercising on the apparatus, stand so that you are always ready to give any needed help to your scholars. (Before beginning to exercise, see that your apparatus is in good order.) NOTES ON APPARATUS WO 1. For the sake of brevity, words that are not absolutely necessary to explain an exercise are generally omitted in the following groups of exercises. 2. Whenever possible, all exercises should be executed left as well as right. (See 6.) 20 (.HUMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 3. The terms front, rear, and flank vault are derived from the fact, that, while executing one of these move- ments, either the front, the rear, or one of the flanks of the gymnast is turned towards the appa- ratus. 4. During a side-stand (hang or rest) the width of the body is in a line with the length of the apparatus ; in a cross-stand (hang or rest) it is at right angles to the length of the apparatus. 5. A scholar stands either with his face, back, or side towards an apparatus; and from these positions the terms forwards, backwards, or sideways stand (hang or rest) are derived. 6. The word right (left) as commonly used in the description of an exercise, means either the right (left) arm, leg, or side of the body. 7. In speaking of the right (left) side of an apparatus, as for instance the long horse, the side that is to your right, when the horse stands ready for use (the highest part farthest from you) is called the right side. This same side is called the right when the horse stands crosswise as a side horse. The terms off and near side are sometimes used in the place of right and left side in exercises on the side horse. 8 When exercising on the side horse the neck (the high- est end) is to your left, the saddle in front of, and the croup to the right of you. The pommel to your left is called the first, the other the second, pommel. NOTES FOR LEADERS 21 ABBREVIATIONS. r. Stands for right. o. Stands for or. 1. Stands for left. inw. Stands for inward, fw. Stands for forward. outw. Stands for outward, bw. Stands for backward. pos. Stands for position, sw. Stands for sideways. opp. Stands for opposite. Other abbreviations are found under the head of Club- swinging and Exercises on the Horizontal Bar. '//.7M/.I.V-. IV /:/.'/'. I V i.) M\. |>yv> MARCHES BY WILLIAM A. STKniKi: THE following are simple marches for arranging a class in a position from which the ranks can easily be opened for free exercises. KNOWN AS LION'S MARCH In a single file the scholars march left around the hall, then through the middle, when, upon reaching the upper K H 1 4 \ / f V f 1- Fig. 1. Fig. 2. end of the hall, they face alternately, right and left, march to the comers, then along the sides to the lower end, then inward toward each other. Upon meeting, they form ranks MARCHES 23 of twos, and perform tlie above evolutions by twos, then by fours, eights, etc. Upon command the scholars mark time and halt (Fig. 1). The ranks are then opened outward sw. from the centre, by taking side steps and raising the arms sw. until at full distance. The re-forming into single file (a flank rank) can be accomplished by reversing the above movements, or by facing right and closing the ranks fw. The first rank then marches to the left, the others following. II This is similar to the above, only that the marching is not done at right angles, but by countermarches through the centre (Fig. 2). This march can also be varied by alternately marching at right angles and countermarching. Open the ranks sideways from the centre, by marching forward, the arms raised in line with the rank until the required distance is found. jj\ -r'ii.'un.- .' -:, 1 In a single file the scholars march left around the hall, then through the middle, and, upon reaching the upper end, face alternately right and left, march to the corners, then ahong the sides to the lower end. Here the first of each rank executes a three-eighths turn inw. and marches fw., (obliquely bw. to his. line of march at the side) diagonally through the hall, the rest following. In the centre the two ranks meet and cross through each other. This is done as follows : The first of the class passes on, the first of the opposite 24 GERM A N-A M ERIC A N G YMNA STICK side then crosses over behind him, the second of each side then follows in the same manner, and so on (Fig. 3). The leaders, upon reaching the corners, march along the sides, and, upon reaching the lower comers, again cross over obliquely through the hall, along the sides, and inward towards each other. They then form ranks of two, who repeat the foregoing move- ments, eventually forming fours, and eights, etc. Let the column march 1. around the hall, mark time, and halt. Open the ranks sw. to the left by taking side steps and raising the arms until the distance is estab- lished. IV This march is similar to the above, with the exception that each rank (or column), after crossing over and reaching the corner, counter marches outw., thereby immediately crossing over again (Fig. 4). After halting, open the ranks to the left by marching fw., the arms raised until the required distance is found. Fig. 4. MARCHES 25 The scholars march left around the hall in single file. Upon nearing a corner the command is given to form twos by executing a quarter turn 1. As they successively reach the corner the scholars face left by twos, and then march fw. in a front column composed of ranks of two (Fig. 5). JL Fig. 5. Later the command is given to form fours (eights, etc.). This is done by a quarter wheel left of two ranks, as they reach the corner. After halting, open the ranks half dis- tance (by raising one arm) sw. from the centre. Should more room be needed, let the odd files (the ones, threes, etc.) take one step fw. or bw. Front ranks can also be opened fw. (or bw.) by each succeeding file taking one more step fw. then the foregoing. The opening and closing can also be done at a run, or by hopping, skipping, etc. L>( I GERM A N-A M /:/,' H'A .V <; YM ^ . I .s TH '.s FREE EXEBCISES BY HKNKV SfOER FEEE exercises may be practised with or without appa- ratus. Among the different branches of physical training prac- tised in the gymnasium, free exercises are of the greatest importance. The teacher's programme in a gymnasium generally begins with marching and free gymnastics. In the latter all the muscles of the body ought to be brought into action, there- fore it is necessary to practise arm, trunk, and leg exercises during a lesson. Contrary to this rule, in this chapter some groups of exercises are indicated where arm and leg, or trunk and arm, or leg and trunk exercises only are given. The author does not presume to dictate every exercise, but leaves it to the discretion of the teacher to bring into each lesson he gives such exercises as he considers necessary in every given case. These exercises and groups of exercises are in- tended to show how different movements can be combined. The number of good exercises and combinations of exercises is inexhaustible. The teacher of gymnastics may take the best exercises from this work, and combine them into such groups as he thinks suitable for his class. A few groups of counter and dissimilar exercises are also given here. A brief explanation of these exercises may be necessary. Counter exercises are movements which are practised i:i FREE EXERCISES 27! opposite directions ; i.e., one division exercises to the right or with the right arm, leg, etc. ; while the other division practises the same exercise to the left, or with the left arm, leg, etc. Dissimilar exercises are different movements executed at the same time by two or more divisions ; i.e., one division bends the trunk forward, the other raises the arms side- ways. We distinguish between simple and compound exercises. Exercises executed by any one part of the body, or by both arms or both legs simultaneously, are called simple exercises ; while all movements executed by two or more different mem- bers of the body are called compound exercises. Simple as well as compound exercises may be practised in two or more counts. There are different methods of forming groups of exercises ; but all groups ought to be combined in such manner as to overtax no part of the body. Various methods may ba followed in teaching the exercises. One of these is : - The instructor gives the command to begin, and counts 12, or 12-34, and the command " Halt " finishes the exercise ; or he gives a number of exercises, which are exe- cuted in succession ; and also gives the number of counts for each exercise, as 18 or 116. The pupil then counts for himself, and practises the given number of exercises. This method is generally used in practising exercises with music, for exhibitions, etc. Another method is to practise exercises upon command. The pupil practises a given exercise until the teacher indi- cates another movement, for example i - 28 GERM A N-A M ERICA N G TMNA8TKS Raise the arms forward ; Begin ! Rise on the toes ; Begin ! Bend the trunk forward ; Begin ! etc. The pupils continue practising one exercise until the command to l>egin another movement is given. Every command is divided into two parts; between the command of explanation and of execution a pause must be made. The command of explanation is pronounced slowly and distinctly, that of execution decisively and sharply. PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. Fundamental position ; Stand ! (Fig. 6). The heels together, the toes turned outward to a right angle, the knees straight and together, the arms at the sides slightly curved, the hands a little backward, the thumbs forward, the shoulders backward, chest well for- ward, and the head erect. Resting position ; Stand ! Rest! Or, In place ; Fig. 7. Cross the arms forward, the hands grasping the biceps, and place the right foot forward. Or, grasp the hands back- ward, and place the right foot forward. POSITIONS OF THE ARMS. 1. Arms forward ; Raise ! The arms straight and level with the shoulders, the knuckles outward (Fig. 7). FREE EXERCISES 29 2. Arms side-ways ; Raise ! The arms straight and level with the shoulders, the knuckles upward. 3. Arms upward; Raise! The arms straight, and raised directly upward over the head, the knuckles outward. (See Fig. 13.) 4. Arms side-ways upward ; Raise ! The amis straight until level with the shoulders, the knuckles upward; when raising up- ward twist the arms, the knuckles outward. Reverse when lowering. 5. Arms to thrust ; Raise ! The forearms must be level with the elbows, the hands clenched, the knuckles downward, the elbows moved backward (Fig. 8). 6. Arms to strike forward; Raise! The hands clenched, the knuckles upward, the elbows pointing forward and level with the shoulders (Fig. 9). 7. Arms to strike sideways ; Raise ! As Exercise 6, elbows pointing sideways. 8. Arms to cut forward ; Raise ! The arms bent to an acute angle, the elbows point forward level with the shoulders, the fingers straight, the knuckles outward. (See Fig. 22.) Fig. 9. Fig. 8. 30 GKRMA N-A M ERIC A N G YM A . 1 > TI< > 9. Arms to cut sideways ; Raise ! As Exercise 8, elbows pointing sideways (Fig. JO). 10. Hands on hips; Place! Place the thumbs backward, fingers straight and forward (Fig. 11). 11. Hands on shoulders ; Place ! Fingers touch the shoulders, the elbows pointing sideways and level with the shoulder. (See Fig. 19.) Fig. 10. Fig. 11. 12. Arms backward ; Fold ! The arms placed on the small of the back. (See Fig. 14.) 13. Hands backward ; Grasp ! The hands clasped behind the back, the arms downward and slightly bent. (See Fig. 15.) POSITION OF THE FEET. 1. Step position, right (left) leg forward ; Place Move one leg about twelve inches in the given direction, standing firmly on both feet (Fig. 11). FREE EXERCISES 31 2. Step position, right (left) leg sideways ; Place . 3. Step position, right (left) leg back-ward ; Place ! 4. Side straddle position; Stand! The feet firmly on the floor, about eighteen inches apart. (See Fig. 21.) 5. Cross straddle position; Stand! The feet firmly on the floor, about eighteen inches apart, right or left leg forward. (See Fig. 22.) 6. Fencing position ; Stand ! Execute one-eighth of a turn left or right, and place the right or left leg about eighteen inches forward, and bend the knees to an obtuse angle, the feet firmly on the floor, the body erect, and resting more on the stationary leg. (See Fig. 20.) Another fencing pos. often practised is to keep the stepping leg straight. ARM EXERCISES FROM DIFFERENT POSITIONS. 1. Raise the arms forward; Begin! 12. 2. Raise the arms sideways ; Begin ! 12. 3. Raise the arms forward upward ; Begin ! 12. 4. Raise the arms sideways upward ; Begin ! 12. See the arm positions. 5. Thrust the arms forward ; Begin ! 12. 6. Thrust the arms sideways ; Begin ! 12. 7. Thrust the arms upward ; Begin ! 12. 8. Thrust the arms downward ; Begin ! 1-2. In thrusting forward or sideways, the knuckles are upward ; in thrusting upward, the knuckles are backward ; in thrusting downward, the knuckles are forward. 9. Strike the arms forward ; Begin ! 12. 32 GERM A N-A M ERICA N G YMNAST1CS 10. Strike the arms forward downward ; Begin ! 1-2. 11. Strike the arms sideways; Begin! 1-2. 12. Strike the arms sideways downward ; Begin ! 1-2. The knuckles downward. 13. Cut with the arms forward; Begin! 12. 14. Cut with the arms forward downward ; Begin ! 12. 15. Cut with the arms sideways ; Begin ! 12. 16. Cut with the arms sideways downward ; Begin ! 12. In cutting with the arms forward and downward, the knuckles are outward. In cutting sideways and downward, the knuckles are backward. IT. Straighten the - arms forward ob- liquely upward r Begin ! 12. 18. Straighten the arms forward ob- liquely downward ; Begin ! 12. 19. Straighten the arms sideways ob- liquely upward ; Begin ! 12. 20. Straighten the arms sideways ob- liquely downward ; Begin ! 1-2. Fig. 12. TRUNK EXERCISES. 1. Bend the trunk forward (Fig. 12) ; Begin ! 1-2. 2. Bend the trunk backward ; Begin ! 12. 3. Bend the trunk sideways right ; Begin ! 12. 4. Bend the trunk sideways left ; Begin ! 12. 5. Turn the trunk to the right (Fig. 13) ; Begin ! 1-2. G. Turn the trunk to the left; Begin! 12. The feet remaining linn, the upper part of the body executes a quarter turn. 7. Turn and bend the trunk forward to the right ; Begin ! 1-2. FREE EXERCISES 33 8. Turn and bend the trunk forward to the left ! Begin ! 1-2. 9. Turn and bend the trunk back-ward to the right; Begin ! 1-2. 10. Turn and bend the trunk backward to the left ; Begin ! 1-2. Execute the trunk exercises slowly. HEAD EXERCISES. 1. Bend the head forward; Begin! 12. 2. Bend the head backward ; Begin ! 12. 3. Turn the head to the right ; Begin ! 12. 4. Turn the head to the left ; Begin ! 1-2. Head exercises in slower time. FOOT AND LEG EXERCISES. 1. Close and open feet ; Begin ! 12. Move the feet closely together, the heels remain closed. 2. Rise on the toes. The heels and the knees together, the lat- ter straight. 3. Place the right or the left leg forward or obliquely for- ward ; Begin 12. 4. Place the right or left leg sideways ; Begin 12. 5. Place the right or left leg backward or obliquely back- ward ; Begin ! 12. 6. Cross the right or the left leg forward or backward ; Begin! 1-2. The toes point downward and touch the floor, the knees straight, the weight of the body resting on the standing foot. In crossing the legs forward, the toes of the right foot meet the toes of the left foot, the right knee slightly bent. In Fig. 73. 34 GBRMAN-AMERH . I \ i; Y M \ .\ST1CS crossing backward, the toes of the right foot meet the heel of the left foot. 7. Raise the right or the left leg forward; (Fig. 14); Begin ! 1-2. 8. Raise the right or the left leg sideways ; Begin ! 12. 9. Raise the right or the left leg backward ; Begin ! 1-2. 10. Raise the right or the left leg obliquely forward or backward ; Begin ! 12. The toes of the raised leg point downward, and the knee Fig. 14. Fig. 15. is straight. The weight of the body rests on the standing leg. 11. Raise the right or the left knee (Fig. 15) ; Begin ! 1-2. Raise the knee to a right angle with the trunk, the leg forming a right angle with the thigh, the toes pointing downward. 12. Bend the knees; Begin! 1-2. In bending the knees, rise on the toes, and bend the knees outward to form an obtuse or a right angle. (See Fig. 16.) FREE EXERCISES 35 13. Lunge forward right or left ; Begin ! 12. 14. Lunge side-ways right or left (Fig. 17) ; Begin ! 12. 15. Lunge back-ward right or left ; Begin ! 12. 16. Lunge obliquely forward or backward right or left; Begin! 1-2. Fig. 16. Fig. 17. In lunging in any direction, place the moving foot about three feet from the other, which remains in place. Both feet are placed firmly on the floor, the knee of the sta- tionary leg straight, the body erect. When practising the trunk, leg, or head exercise, place the arms in a suitable position. GROUP I. Simple Exercises in Two Counts. Arm, Trunk, and Leg Movements. PART 1. 1 Raise the arms forward, Begin! 1-2 4 Raise the arms upward, Begin! 1-2 2 Bend the trunk forward, 5 Bend the trunk backward, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 8 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately, Begin! 1^ Begin! 1-4 36 GERMAN-AMERICA .V t; YM \ . I > TH > 7 Raise the anns sideways, 10 liaise the arms sideways upward, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 8 Bend the trunk sideways to the 11 Bend the trunk sideways left, rii;ht, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately, 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately, Begin! 1-4 Begin! 1-4 PART 2. 1 Bend the trunk forward, 7 Bend the trunk sideways right, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 2 Place the right (left) leg backward, 8 Place the right leg sideways right, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, 9 Exercises 6 and 7 alternately, Begin! 1-4 Begin! 1-4 4 Bend the trunk backward, 10 Bend the trunk sideways to the Begin! 1-2 left, Begin! 1-2 5 Place the right (left) leg forward, 11 Place the left leg sideways left, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately, 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately, Begin! 1-4 Begin! 1-4 PART 3. 1 Raise the right (left) leg forward, 7 Raise the right leg sideways, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 2 Raise the arms forward, 8 Raise the arms sideways, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately, Begin! 1-4 Begin! 1-4 4 Raise the right (left) leg backward, 10 Raise the left leg sideways, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 5 Raise the arms upward, Begin! 1-2 11 Raise the arms sideways upward, 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately, Begin ! 1-2 Begin! 1-4 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately, Begin! 1-4 PART 4. 1 Raise the arms forward, 4 Raise the arms upward, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 2 Bend the trunk forward, 5 Bend the trunk backward, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 3 Raise the right and the left leg for- 6 Raise the right and the left leg ward alternately, Begin! 1^ backward alternately, Begin! 1-4 FREE EXERCISES 37. 7 Raise the arms sideways, 10 Raise the arms sideways upward, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 8 Bend the trunk sideways right, 11 Bend the trunk sideways left, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 9 Raise the right leg sideways, 12 Raise the left leg sideways, Begin! 1-2 Begin! 1-2 GROUP II. Simple and Compound Exercises in Two Counts. PART 1. Arm and Leg Exercises. The Hands on the Hips. 1 Straighten the right arm forward, 10 Straighten the right arm upward. Begin! 1-2 11 Raise the right knee. 2 Raise the right knee. 12 Straighten the right arm upward 3 Straighten the right arm forward and raise the right knee. and raise the right knee. 13 Straighten the left arm upward. 4 Straighten the left arm forward. 14 Raise the left knee. 5 Raise the left knee. 15 Straighten the left arm upward 6 Straighten the left arm forward and and raise the left knee. raise the left knee. 16 Straighten both arms upward. 7 Straighten both arms forward. 17 Bend the knees. "8 Bend the knees. 18 Straighten both arms upward and 9 Straighten both arms forward and bend both knees, bend both knees. PART 2. Leg and Trunk Exercises. Grasp the Hands or fold the Arms backward. CROSS STRADDLE POSITION" RIGHT (LEFT) LEG FORWARD. 1 Bend the right knee, Begin ! 1-2 6 Bend the left knee and the trunk 2 Bend the trunk forward. backward. 3 Bend the right knee and the trunk 7 Bend the right knee and the trunk forward. forward, and the left knee and 4 Bend the left knee. the trunk backward alternately, 5 Bend the trunk backward. Begin! 1-4 SIDE STRADDLE POSITION. 8 Bend the right knee, Begin ! 1-2 10 Bend the right knee and the trunk 9 Bend the trunk sideways to the sideways to the right. right. 11 Bend the left knee. 88 i ; }: i; M . i .V - . i M HI; i r . i .v < , } M \ . i .s TIC 8 12 Bend the tnmk sideways left. 13 Bend the left knee and trunk side- ways to the left. 14 Bend the right knee and the trunk and the left knee and the trunk sideways alternately, Begin! 1-4 PART 3. Trunk and Arm Exercises. The Hands on Shoulders. 1 Turn the trunk to the right, Begin! 1-2. 2 Straighten the arms sideways to the right (Fig. 18). I Fig. 18. 3 Turn the trunk to the right and straighten the arms sideways right. 4 Turn the trunk to the left. 5 Straighten the arms sideways left. 6 Turn the trunk to the left and straighten the arms sideways left. 7 Exercises 3 and 6 alternately, Begin! 1-4. 8 Turn the trunk to the right and bend forward. 9 Straighten the arms sideways. 10 Turn the trunk to the right, bend forward, and straighten the arms sideways. 11 Turn the trunk to the left and bend forward. 12 Straighten the arms sideways. 13 Turn the trunk to the left and bend forward and straighten the arms sideways. 14 Exercises 10 and 13 alternately. REMARKS. In raising the arms sideways to the r., the r. arm must be straight, the 1. arm bent to a r. angle, the knuckles upw. Instead of turning and bending forw., the pupils may turn and bend the trunk backw. Instead of straightening the arms sidew., they may straighten them forw. or upward. FHEE EXELiCltiES 39 GROUP III. Simple Exercises. PART 1. Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. Arms to Thrust. 1 Thrust the right arm forward ob- liquely downward, Begin! 1-2. 2 Thrust the left arm forward ob- liquely downward. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, Begin! 1-4. 4 Thrust both arms forward ob- liquely downward. 5 Bend the trunk forward. 6 Lunge forward right. 7 Lunge forward left. 8 Exercises 6 and 7 alternately. 9 Rise on the toes. 10 Thrust the right arm forward obliquely upward. 11 Thrust the left arm forward ob- liquely upward. 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 13 Thrust both arms forward ob- liquely upward. 14 Bend the trunk backward. 15 Lunge obliquely forward to the right. 16 Lunge obliquely forward to the left. 17 Exercises 15 and 16 alternately. 18 Bend the knees. PART 2. Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. Arms to Thrust. 1 Thrust the right arm sideways ob- liquely downward, Begin ! 1-2. 2 Thrust the left arm sideways ob- liquely downward. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 Thrust both arms sideways ob- liquely downward. 5 Bend the trunk right sideways. 6 Lunge sideways right. 7 Lunge sideways left. 8 Exercises 6 and 7 alternately. 9 Rise on the toes. 10 Thrust the right arm sideways ob- liquely upward. 11 Thrust the left arm sideways ob- liquely upward. 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 13 Thrust the arms sideways ob- liquely upward. 14 Bend the trunk sideways left. 15 Lunge obliquely backward right. 16 Lunge obliquely backward left. 17 Exercises 15 and 16 alternately. 18 Bend the knees. 40 GERM A N-AMERICA .V <, YM V . 1 > TK > GROUP IV. Simple and Compound Exercises. Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. PART 1. Arm and Leg Exercises. FENCING POSITION (Fio. 19). Arms to Thrust. (See Fig. 8.) 1 Thrust the right arm forward ob- 3 Combine exercises 1 and 2. liquely upward, the left arm back- 4 Thrust both arms forward obliquely ward obliquely downward, upward. Begin! 1-2. 5 Bend the knees. 2 Lunge forward right. 6 Combine exercises 4 and 5. CHANGE FENCING POSITION (LEFT LEG FORWARD). 7 Thrust the left arm forward ob- 10 Thrust both arms forward ob- liquely upward, the right arm liquely upward, backward obliquely downward. 11 Bend the knees. 8 Lunge forward left. 12 Combine exercises 10 and 11. 9 Combine exercises 7 and 8. PART 2. Arm and Leg Exercises. FENCING POSITION. Arms to Thrust. 1 Cover the head with the right arm 5 Bend the knees. and thrust the left arm backward 6 Combine exercises 4 and 5. obliquely downward (Fig. 20), 7 Thrust both arms backward ob- Begin! 1-2. liquely downward to the left. 2 Lunge forward right. 8 Lunge forward right. 3 Combine exercises 1 and 2. 9 Combine exercises 7 and 8. 4 Cover the head with both arms. CHANGE FENCING POSITION (LEFT LEG FORWARD). 10-18 As exercises 1-9, but left. PART 3. Arm and Trunk Exercises. SIDE STRADDLE POSITION (Fio. 21). Arms Upward in Position. (See Fig. 13.) 1 Swing the arms outward in a circle, 2 Swing the arms outward in a circle Begin! 1-2. and bend the trunk forward. FREE EXERCISES 41 3 Swing the arms inward in a circle. 4 Swing the arms inward in a circle and bend the trunk forward. 5 Swing the arms sideways to the right in a circle. 6 Swing the arms sideways to the right in a circle and bend the trunk sideways right. 7 Swing the arms sideways to the left in a circle. Fig. TO. Fiy. 20. Fig. 21. 8 Swing the arms sideways to the left in a circle and bend the trunk sideways left. 9 Swing the arms forward at the right side in a circle. 10 Swing the arms forward at the right side in a circle the Fig. 22. trunk to the and turn right. 11 Swing the arms sideways to the left in a circle. 12 Swing the arms sideways to the left in a circle and turn the trunk to the right. GROUP V. Compound Exercises in Two Counts. Arm, Leg, aud Trunk Exercises. PART 1. Arm and Leg Exercises. 1 liaise the arms forward and bend the knees, Begin! 1-2. '2 Raise the arms upward and rise on the toes, i} Raise the arms sideways and bend the knees. 4 Raise the arms sideways upward and rise on the toes. 5 Raise the arms sideways to the right and bend the knees. G Raise the arms sideways to the left and bend the knees. 7 Raise the arms sideways upward by the right and rise on the toes. 8 Raise the arms sideways upward by the left and rise on the toes. 42 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS PART 2. Leg and Trunk Exercises. 1 Raise the right leg forward, bend .") Raise the right leg sideways, bend the left knee, and bend the trunk the left knee, and bend the trunk backward, Begin! 1-2. sideways left. 2 Raise the left leg forward, bend the 6 Raise the left leg sideways, bend the right knee, and bend the trunk right knee, and bend the trunk backward. sideways right. 3 Raise the right leg backward, bend 7 Raise the right leg obliquely back- the left knee, and bend the trunk ward, bend the left knee, and turn forward. the trunk to the right. 4 Raise the left leg backward, bend 8 Raise the left leg obliquely back- the right knee, and bend the ward, bend the right knee, and trunk forward. turn the trunk to the left. GKOUP VI. Compound Exercises in Two Counts. Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. PART 1. The Hands on the Hips. 1 One step forward, March! 1-2. 5 One step backward. 2 Bend the trunk forward and 6 Bend the trunk sideways right and straighten the arms downward, straighten the arms sideways. Begin ! 1-2. 7 One step sideways left. 3 One step sideways to the right. 8 Bend the trunk sideways left and 4 Bend the trunk backward and straighten the arms sideways. straighten the arms upward. After executing one step, practise the trunk and arm exer- cises several times. PART 2. Arms to Cut. 1 One step forward and backward, 5 One step backward and forward. March! 1-4. 6 Cut the arms forward downward 2 Cut the arms forward and jump to and jump to the cross straddle the cross straddle position (Fig. position. 22). 7 One step sideways left and right. 3 One step sideways to the right and 8 Cut the arms sideways downward the left. and jump to the side straddle 4 Cut the arms sideways. position. In practising the cross straddle position, place the right and left leg forward alternately. FREE EXERCISES GKOUP VII. Combined Exercises in Two Counts. Counter Exercises. FOBM THE CLASS INTO Two DIVISIONS. Arm, Leg, and Trunk Exercises. PART 1. Arms to Thrust. 1 Thrust the outer arm forward and lunge forward with the outer leg, Begin! 1-2. 2 Thrust the inner arm forward and lunge forward with the inner leg. 3 Thrust the outer arm sideways and lunge sideways with the outer leg. 4 Thrust the inner arm sideways and lunge sideways with the inner leg. 5 Thrust the outer arm upward and lunge backward with the outer iw leg. Thrust the inner arm upward and lunge backward with the inner leg. 7 Thrust both arms forward and lunge forward obliquely out- ward. 8 Thrust both arms forward and lunge forward obliquely inward. 9 Thrust both arms sideways and lunge sideways obliquely out- ward. 10 Thrust both arms sideways and lunge sideways obliquely inward. 11 Thrust both arms upward and lunge backward obliquely out- ward. 12 Thrust both arms upw. and lunge backward obliquely inward. The outer arm or leg of the division to the right is the right arm or leg; of the division to the left, the left arm or leg. Inward means towards the centre. PART 2. Leg, Trunk, and Arm Exercises. 1 Lunge forward with the outer leg, bend the trunk forward, and fold the arms backward, Begin! 1-2. 2 Lunge forward with the inner leg, bend the trunk forward, and fold the arms backward. 3 Lunge sideways with the outer leg, bend the trunk sideways out- ward, and place the hands on the shoulders. 4 Lunge sideways with the inner leg, bend the trunk sideways inward, and place the hands on the shoulders. 5 Lunge backward with the outer leg, bend the trunk backward, and fold the arms forward. 6 Lunge backward with the inner leg, bend the trunk backward and fold the arms forward. 44 <;i.i; MAN-AMERICAN a YM \ASTICS 7 Lunge forward obliquely outward, bend the trunk forward, and raise the arms forward. 8 Lunge forward obliquely inward, bend the trunk forward, and raise the anus forward. 9 Lunge sideways outward, turn the trunk outward, and raise the arms upward. See Part 1. 10 Lunge sideways inward, turn the trunk inward, and raise the anus upward. 11 Lunge backward obliquely out- ward, bend the trunk backward, and raise the arms sideways. 12 Lunge backward obliquely inward, bend the trunk backward, and raise the arms sideways. GROUP VIII. Simple Exercises in Two Counts. Dissimilar Exercises. DIVIDE THE CLASS IN A FIRST AND SECOND DIVISION OR IN FIRST AND SECOND FILES. Arm, Trunk, and Leg Exercises. PART 1. Arm and Trunk Exercises. The Hands on the Hips or the Shoulders. 1 1st Division straighten the arms forward. 2d Division bend the trunk for- ward, Begin! 1-2 2 1st Division bend the trunk for- ward. 2d Division straighten the arms forward. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, 7 1st Division straighten the arms sideways to the right. 2d Division bend the trunk side- ways to the right. 8 1st Division bend the trunk side- ways to the right. 2d Division straighten the arms sideways to the right. 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. Begin! 1-4 10 1st Division straighten the arms 4 1st Division straighten the arms upward. 2d Division bend the trunk back- ward. 6 1st Division bend the trunk back- ward. 2d Division straighten the arms up- ward. 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. sideways to the left. 2d Division bend the trunk side- ways to the left. 11 1st Division bend the trunk side- ways to the left. 2d Division straighten the arms sideways to the left. 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. FREE EXERCISES 45 PART 2. Compound Exercises in Two Courts. Arms to Thrust. 1 1st Division thrust the arms for- ward and bend the knees. 2d Division thrust the arms up- ward and lunge forward right and left alternately, Begin! 1-4 2 1st Division thrust the arms up- ward and lunge forward right and left alternately. 2d Division thrust the arms for- ward and bend the knees. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, Begin! 1-4 4 1st Division thrust the arms upward and rise on the toes. 2d Division thrust the arms side- ways and lunge sideways right and left alternately. 5 1st Division thrust the arms side- ways and lunge sideways right and left alternately. 2J Division thrust the arms up- ward and rise on the toes. 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 7 1st Division thrust the arms side- ways and bend the knees. 2d Division thrust the arms for- ward and lunge backward right and left alternately. 8 1st Division thrust the arms for- ward and lunge backward right and left alternately. 2d Division thrust the arms side- ways and bend the knees. 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 10 1st Division thrust the arms down- ward and rise on the toes. 2d Division thrust the arms back- ward and lunge forward right and left alternately. 11 1st Division thrust the arms back- ward and lunge forward right and left alternately. 2d Division thrust the arms down- ward and rise on the toes. 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 46 GEltMA .V - . I M Kit 1C AN G Y M \ . I > IK 9 "WAND EXERCISES i:v WILLIAM REUTKIi THE lessons here presented are in form of series, and art- progressive, each one in itself being complete. In the arrange- ment thereof, great care has been observed to adapt them to the wants of good honest " class-work," as well as to make them pleasing to the eye, in the hope of awakening a sense for quick, accurate, and decided action, as well as for the beautiful in form and position. THE WAND. The wand is a round stick, generally of wood or iron. Thickness, length, and weight should be in proportion to the person using it; viz., always long enough to form the hypote- nuse of a right-angled triangle, when the hands have grasped it at the extreme ends, and the arms are extended at right angles. When of wood the thickness varies from three-quarters of an inch to one and a quarter inches ; when of iron, from five-eighths of an inch to one inch. The wand for the adult may weigh from five to eight pounds. POSITIONS. It is advisable to become familiar with the different positions of the wand, and the different ways in which it can be brought from one position to another, before attempting to combine the movements with steps, lunges, or other motions. In the fol- lowing lessons the positions will be treated only in the order in which they are used. WAND EXERCISES .PART I. FIRST COURSE. LESSON I. a Taking of wand and position in carrying, b Fundamental position. C Resting position. d First or most simple starting position. 6 Resting position from the starting position, f Lowering the wand to the floor (or to the foot), g Resting position; with the wand on the floor (or at the foot), h Other ways of lowering and raising the wand. A Carrying the Wand. The wand should stand on end ; when taken from its place, it should be carried like a gun, either at the right or the left side. The wand should rest on end on the first joint of the first finger, with the thumb brought around in front, pressing the wand firmly against the shoulder. B Fundamental Position. In position; stand! (Fig. 23.) C Resting Position with the Wand under the Arm. Taken from Position at Shoulder. 1 Resting position ; stand ! In place ; rest ! At 1 Grasp the wand with the left hand, the fingers be- hind, the thumb in front at the height of the chest, the forearm close to the body and nearly or quite in a hori- zontal position. At 2 Reverse the wand by bringing the left hand forward and the right upward, passing the shoul- der and returning to the chest. The wand is allowed to partly glide through the right hand. The hold of the left hand re- mains unchanged. 3 counts. Fig. 23. At 3 Press the wand under the shoul- der with the left hand, release the hold and bring the arm down; swing around to small of the back, lower the right hand (hold- ing the wand firmly) to the thigh, and then take the step position backward right or forward left. 48 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTK s In position ; stand ! 3 counts. Fundamental Position from Resting Position Under the Arm. 1 Raise the right hand (the wand to 2 Move the left hand forward and vertical position), and grasp the return while the right hand is wand with the left hand at the lowered and slides to the end of height of the chest with the lin- the wand. gers in front and the thumb be- 3 Release the hold of the left hand hind, the elbow the height of the and bring the foot into place with shoulders. a firm step. Down in front ; down ! or, now ! 2 counts. D Starting Position Horizontally Down in Front. 1 The left hand grasps the wand at to the front in full hold. This is the height of the chest, the thumb the upper hold, in which the in front and the fingers behind wrists must be well bent back- (the arm in position as described ward and the back of the hands under C). turned upward. Excepting the 2 Lower to horizontal position, the first count or motion, there is no left hand sliding nearly to the material difference between the end, and the right hand turning movements of this and those of around the other end and moving the resting position from the a little from the end; the fingers wand at the shoulder. Wand under shoulder; resting position; stand! Count 1, 2, 3! Of Wand under shoulder ; in place ; rest ! Count 1. 2, 3 ! E Resting Position from the Starting Position, and Return to Position at the Shoulder. 1 Bring the left hand to the chest, To return from the resting to the sliding along the wand, and the starting position is the same as right hand around the end, the to return to the fundamental po- first finger under, as described sition, with the exception that at under A. 3 the left hand does not release 2, 3 Same as described under C. its hold, but takes the wand down to the starting position. NOTE WELL. When this is intended, simply call for " Position ! " Let it be understood that " position," in all cases where so used, means or calls for the return to the position previous to the change to resting position. WAND EXERCISES 49 From the Starting Position to Position at Shoulder. To return the wand from the starting position to the shoulder is simply to go back in reverse order. or Raise to the right shoulder ; now ! Count 1, 2 ! To the right shoulder ; raise ! Count 1, 2 ! 1 Raise the left hand to the chest, letting the wand glide through the hand. 2 Release the hold of the left hand and bring the arm and hand down to the side. As the left hand is raised, the right hand is brought close to the side and turned around to the end of the wand. In position ; stand ! F From the Fundamental Position ; the Wand at the Shoulder. Lower the Wand to the Floor. The wand carried at the right shoul- der, not leaning backward nor in a vertical position, but slanting forward slightly same as the body. Let the wand point in line to the heel. In four counts, wand to the foot ! down ! or, now ! 1, 2, 3, 4 ! 1 Bring the left hand up and grasp the wand at the height of the chest, the fingers in front, the thumb behind, forearm close to the body, and nearly or quite in a horizontal position. 2 Release the right hand and grasp the wand at the height of the shoulder, or a little higher back of the hand in front, and elbow resting close to the wand and to the other hand. 3 Bring the left hand down to the side. 4 Lower the wand to the standing position on the floor at the foot near the small toe. Return to position at the shoulder in the reverse order. G Resting Position, with the Wand on the Floor or at the Foot. Another and more simple resting position from the start- ing position is : The wand on the floor, or To foot. Resting position ; Stand ! Count 1, 2, 3 ! or, The wand on the floor. In place ; Rest ! Count 1, 2, 3 ! 1 Raise the left hand and bring it to rest on the end near the small over to the right side, letting the toe; the left hand is brought to wand glide through the right hand rest on the other end of the wand. 50 GKKMA.V-AMKHH 'AN in forward left, slanting the wand last. H Other Ways of lowering and raising the Wand. The wand may be lowered to the foot in three and four counts, as well as when the pupil is a little further advanced, by combining the different movements. This will be readily understood, and needs no further explanation. Also to the starting position, horizontally down in front, it may be lowered in three and four counts as well as two. For example : 1 Raise the left arm sideways. 3 Down iii front as described be- 2 Grasp the wand with the left hand fore. (height of the chest or at the top). In four counts : 1 Raise the arm forward. 3 Grasp as above. 2 Swing the arm sideways. 4 Down in front. Or in four counts : 1 Raise the left arm sideways. 3 Glide to the top. 2 Grasp at the height of the chest or 4 Down in front. the shoulder. It matters not which way the wand is brought down ; but it must be returned in reversed order, and in as many counts as it was lowered in. For the elementary series it is advisable to take the posi- tion horizontally down in front as the starting position. Other positions are possible, but less available. For short, this position will be "down in front," or "start- ing position," until the other positions come into consideration. WAND EXERCISES 51 LESSON 2. Horizontal Position only. Arms in Similar Position. Starting position ; down in front ! One motion and return to the starting position in two counts. Simply raising and lowering the wand. 1 Raise with bent arms in front (the 4 Raise with straight arms overhead height of and close to the chest). (the arms extended at full 2 Raise with straight arms in front length). and forward (the arms extended 5 Raise with bent arms behind (the height of shoulders). wand lying across the shoul- 3 Raise with bent arms over head (the ders). wand almost touching the head). The arms are swung forward at full length, then bent, so as to bring the wand on both shoulders. 6 Raise with straight arms behind 7 Raise with straight arms behind backward (same as explained in and down. (Same as explained Exercise 5, but lower backward, in Exercise 5, but lower the arms with the arms extended height of at full length down. ) the shoulders). If the sixth exercise is found too difficult for beginners, it may be omitted. Suggestions regarding the Forming of Classes. Classes may be formed in regular or alternate lines of any numbers. The triangular form of placing is also very good and pleasing to the eye. Other forms, such as a circle, square, etc., are sometimes used. Positions or Poses. Pupils will remember a series of exercises better, and execute them with more exactness, when they are preceded or followed by rests or pauses. It promotes the value of the 52 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS exercise, tending to cultivate a sense for the beautiful in posture, when these rests consist partly or wholly of POM-.S in some relation to that which has been executed or is to follow. Begin to count 1, 2, 3, etc. At 3, take the first movement of the first exercise as a position, and remain in the same until 13. At 13 return to the starting position, then pause until 16. If desired to make the position of shorter duration, take it at 5, and return at 11, etc.. thereby giving more time to think of what is to follow. Then begin the first exercise and repeat once or twice. In this manner pro- ceed with the other exercises, taking poses and movements in their order. It is of pleasing effect to wind up with a grouping of the class in positions, showing as much as pos- sible a resume of the different positions (by different lines) contained in the whole series. Music. When accompanied by music, exercises may be executed either in fast or slow time as desired, and to almost any piece of music with well-marked time. Exercises, or series of exer- cises, may be arranged for a certain specified piece of music, or vice versd. Great care should be taken that the character of the music be in harmony with the exercises. LESSON 3. Horizontal Position only ; with the Anns in Dissimilar Positions. The Wand Parallel and Oblique and Diagonal to the Body. Starting Position; down in Front. NOTE. When both arms are bent the elbows are pointed downward. When only one arm is bent the elbow points as WAND EXERCISES 53 much as possible on a line with the wand in horizontal posi- tion, or at right angles to it, as in vertical positions. There are only few exceptions to this rule. By simply giving the directions or place to which the hands are brought, the posi- tions will in nearly all cases be more uniform and more readily understood. It is easier to describe the motion or course of each hand than the final position ; the latter being the ultimate result of the former, it is advisable to strictly adhere to these directions. Explanations of Terms "in Front," "in Front Forward," "Behind," "Behind Backward," and "Sideways." By the term "in front" is meant as near to the chest as possible with one or both hands : " in front forward," one or both arms extended height of the shoulders. The same holds good for the positions behind the body. " Behind " is at the height of the shoulders and resting near there, and "behind backward" is with the arms ex- tended backward at the height of the shoulders. " Sideways " means arms extended sideways at the height of the shoulders. In "side- ways " one arm is bent, the other extended. In Lessons 1 and 2 the hands retain their hold ; that is, do not glide along the wand except when so stated. A Wand parallel to the body. 2 counts. 1 Left sideways, right in front (Fig. 24.) 2 counts. 2 Right sideways, left in front. 2 counts. Fig. 24. 54 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 3 Left sideways, right behind (Fig. 25). 2 counts. 4 liight sideways, left behind. 2 counts. B The wand in an oblique position to the body; both arms ex- tended. 1 Left sideways, right in front for- ward. 2 counts. 2 Right sideways, left in front for- ward. 2 counts. 3 Left sideways, right behind back- ward. 2 counts. 4 Right sideways, left behind back- ward. 2 counts. Fig. 25. P.S. Exercises 3 and 4 are less used, and are more difficult. The wand in an oblique posi- tion to the body; one arm bent. Left under the shoulder, the right in front forward (Fig. 26). 2 counts. 2 Right under the shoulder, the left in front forward. 2 counts. 3 Left on the shoulder, the right in front forward (Fig. 27). 2 counts. 4 Right on shoulder, the left in front forward. 2 counts. Fig. 26. Fig. 27. The exercises in this lesson are not so well adapted to form series alone, but in combining with others they are WAND EXERCISES OO indispensable. They should be well practised. Great care should be taken to bring the elbow in a line with the wand, and to have the hand of the extended arm turned palm down in the exercises 1, 2, 3 and 4 A. In B both hands retain full hold. LESSON 4. Oblique or Diagonal Position, but not Horizontal. Arms in Dissimilar Positions. Starting Position : A Oblique with one arm bent. 1 Left in front, right (remains) down. See note below. 2 counts. 2 Right in front, left (remains) down. See note below. 2 counts. 3 Left in front, right upward. See note below. 2 counts. 4 Right in front, left upward. See note below. 2 counts. 5 Left behind (near shoulder), right remains down. 2 counts. 6 Right behind (near shoulder), left remains down. 2 counts. B Oblique with both arms ex- tended. 1 Left in front forward, right (re- mains) down (bring to the thigh). 2 counts. Both oblique and diagonal are considered, by many, correct terms. We are rather inclined to favor the oblique or obliquely, and give it the preference. NOTE. In the exercises of A the hand of the straight arm glides partly along the wand. In exercises 3 and 4 the straight arm may point forward upward or sideward upward obliquely. In exercises 3 and 4 the bent arm may be behind as well as in front. down in Front. 2 Right in front forward, left (re- mains) down (bring to the thigh). 2 counts. 3 Left in front forward, right up- ward. 2 counts. 4 Right in front forward, left up- ward. 2 counts. 5 Left sideways, right upward. 2 counts. 6 Right sideways, left upward. 2 counts. 7 Left sideways, right (remains) down (bring to the thigh). 2 counts. 8 Right sideways, left (remains) down (bring to the thigh). 2 counts. 66 GERM A N-A MElilC. 1 .V (; ) M .V . 1 s TICS LESSON 5. Horizontal and Parallel. Horizontal and Right Angular and Vertical Positions. The Arms in Similar and Dissimilar Positions. Movements in which one or both arms cross to the oppo- site side; either straight or bent. One or both hands glide along the wand. A Parallel ; both arms cross to the opposite sides (Fig. 28). 1 Left above to right, right below to left (cross the arms left over right). 2 counts. 2 Right above to left, left below to right (cross the arms right over left). 2 counts. B Right angular; one arm crosses to the opposite side. Fig. 28. Fig. 29. Fig. 30. 1 Left forward down, right back- ward down, the arms extended, or the wand resting on the hip (Fig. 29). 2 counts. 2 Right forward down, left back- ward down, the arms extended, or the wand resting on the hip. 2 counts. C Right angular; the extended arm crosses to the opposite side. 1 Left under shoulder, right in front, forward, over (Fig. 30). 2 counts. 2 Right under shoulder, left in front, forward, over. 2 counts. 3 Left on shoulder, right in front, forward, over. 2 counts. 4 Right on shoulder, left in front, forward, over. 2 counts. WAND EXERCISES 57 D Right angular. The bent arm crosses to the opposite side. 1 Left under right shoulder, right in front forward (Fig. 31). 2 counts. 2 Right under left shoulder, left in front forward. 2 counts. 3 Left on right shoulder, right in front forward. 2 counts. 4 Right on left shoulder, left in front forward. 2 counts. E Vertical; the wand in front on middle line of the body. 1 Left upward forward, right downward forward (the arms bent), (present). 2 counts. Fig. 31. Fig. 32. Fig. 33. 2 Right upward forward, left down forward (the arms bent), (pre- sent). 2 counts. 3 Left upward forward, right down forward (the arms straight), (present). (Fig. 32.) 2 counts. 4 Right upward forward, left down forward (the arms straight), (present). 2 counts. 5 Left in front, right upward and glide to left (the arms bent), changing underhold. 2 counts. This may be executed with the arms extended upward as well as bent. 6 Left in front, right down and glide to the left (the arms bent), may rest on the floor or not. 2 counts. P Vertical ; the wand at the side of the body; one arm crosses to the opposite side. 1 Left in front over (in front of the right shoulder), right down (Fig. 33). 2 counts. 2. Right in front over (in front of right shoulder), left downward. 2 counts. 3 Left in front over, the right down (on the floor). 2 counts. 58 < ; i-: n M A.N-A M /:/. ICA.N HYMN AS Tics J Fig. 34. 4 Right in front over, left down (on tin- noor). 2 counts. 5 Left in front over (in front of right shoulder , ri^ht upward (Fig. 34). 2 counts. 6 Right in front over (in front of the left shoulder), left upward. 2 counts. NOTE. In all vertical positions in one arm crosses over to the opposite side, the hand of the extended arm glides along tin- wand. When practising this lesson it will be readily seen in which other exercises one or both hands glide. There are a few more ver- tical positions behind the body; they will be explained in lessons farther on. Being very- difficult, they require much practice. In the five foregoing lessons all essential positions adapted to sim- ple exercises consisting of but one movement and return have been presented. Accuracy in position, vim and energy in execution, should be acquired before the exercises of the second course are attempted. SECOND COURSE 59 PART II. SECOND COURSE. FROM the starting position "Down in front," two suc- cessive motions and return in reverse order. In the fol- lowing lessons, the most simple forms are given ; i.e., those in which the changes from one position to the other are executed in the shortest way possible. P.S. The accent or force of execution is placed on the second and fourth counts more than on the others. Horizontal and Parallel Position only. 1 ( Bend arms. ) In front. 2 (Straighten arms.) Forward. 3 (Bend arms. ) In front. 4 (Straighten arms.) Down. 4 counts. II 1 (Bend arms. ) In front. 2 (Straighten arms.) Upward. 3 (Bend arms.) In front. 4 (Straighten arms.) Down. 4 counts. Ill 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 (Straighten arms.) Behind back- ward. 3 (Bend arms. ) In front. 4 (Straighten arms.) Down in front. 4 counts. Fig. 35. IV 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 (Straighten arms.) Behind downward (Fig. 35). 3 (Bend arms. ) In front. 4 (Straighten arms.) Down in front. 4 counts. 60 GERM AN- AMERICAN YMNA8T1CS 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 Left sideways, right in front. 3 (Bend arms.) In front. 4 Down. 4 counts. VI 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 Right sideways, left in front. 3 (Bend arms.) In front. 4 Down. 4 counts. VII 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 Left sideways, right behind. 3 (Bend arms.) In front. 4 Down. 4 counts. VIII 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 Right sideways, left behind. 3 (Bend arms.) 4 Down. In front. 4 counts. IX 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 (Bend arms.) Behind. 3 (Bend arms. ) In front. 4 Down. 4 counts. X 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 (Straighten arms.) Behind buck- ward. 3 (Bend arms.) In front. 4 Down in front. 4 counts. XI 1 (Bend the arms.) In front. 2 (Straighten the arms.) Behind down. 3 (Bend the arms). In front. 4 Down in front. 4 counts. LESSON 2. Starting position; down in front! NOTE. Two successive motions and return in reverse order. Horizontal position in the first count or movement, and vertical, angular, or horizontal position in the second count. The position (bent arms) in front need not neces- sarily always be the first of two motions and return. It may be second, or may be omitted entirely, as is done in the next lesson. Angular Position. II 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Left in front over (see note below). 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Right in front over. 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. SECOND COURSE 61 Vertical Position. Ill 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Left in front over, right downward. 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. IV 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Right in front over, left down. 3 (Straight arms. ) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. Angular Position. 1 (Straight arms. ) In front forward. 2 Left in front over, on right shoul- der. 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. VI 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Right in front over, on the left shoulder. 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 counts. 4 Down. 4 counts. Horizontal Position. VII 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Left in front over and right in front over (left arm crosses over the right arm, the hands glide). 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. VIII (Straight arms. ) In front forward. 2 Left in front over, right upward. 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. IX 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Right in front over, left upward. 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Left in front (middle of the chest) and right downward. 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. XI 1 (Straight arms.) In frtmt forward. 2 Right in front (middle of the chest) and left downward. Vertical Position. 3 (Straight arms.) In front for- ward. 4 Down. "4 counts. XII 1 (Straight arms.) In front for- ward. 2 Left in front (middle of the chest) right upward. 3 (Straight arms.) In front for- ward. 4 Down. 4 counts. XIII 1 (Straight arms.) In front for- ward. 2 Right in front (middle of the chest) left upward. 3 (Straight arms.) In front for- ward. 4 Down. 4 counts. 62 i : Kit M . I . V - . 1 M KR 1C A N G YMNA S TICS XIV 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Left upward, right downward (the arms remain extended). 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. XV 1 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 2 Kight upward, left downward (arms remain extended). 3 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. XVI AND XVII Same as XIV. and XV., with both arms bent in vertical position in front in the second count. NOTE. When one hand crosses to the opposite side at the height of the chest, the other end of the wand is brought under the shoulder or arm (armpit), and the wand glides through the hand of the extended arm, which remains in nearly the same position. Where the end of the wand is to be brought on the opposite or on the same shoulder, a special command must be given. LESSON 3. Starting position; down in front! Two successive motions and return. Vertical position in the first count and oblique position in the second count. I 1 Vertical in front forward (left hand up, right hand down). See the note below. 2 Left down, right sideways. 3 Eeturn to the first position. 4 Down. 4 counts. II 1 Vertical in front forward. 2 Right down, left sideways. 3 Vertical in front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. Ill 1 Vertical in front forward. 2 Left sideways, right upward (Fig. 36). 3 Vertical in front forward. 4 Down. 4 counts. Fig. 36. SECOND COURSE 63 I Y 3 Vertical in front forward. 1 Vertical in front forward. 4 Down - 4 counts. 2 Right sideways, left upward. 3 Vertical in front forward. VII 4 Down. 4 counts. i Vertical in front forward. "V 2 Left downward, sideways, right 1 Vertical in front forward. (overhead) behind. 2 Right upward (overhead), left in 3 Vertical in front forward. front forward. (Left hand re- 4 Down (in front). 4 counts, mains lowered just a little.) 3 Vertical in front forward. VIII 4 Down. 4 counts. , ^ ... , . , 1 Vertical m front forward. VI 2 Right downward, sideways, left 1 Vertical in front forward. (overhead) behind. 2 Left upward, right in front forward 3 Vertical in front forward. (same as in ExerciseS). 4 Down. 4 counts. NOTE. All the vertical positions in this lesson must be practised alternately; i.e., in the first exercise the left hand should be up and the right hand down, and vice versa. Care should be taken to have the vertical position in the 3d count or movement of each exercise the same as in the first count of the same exercise. LESSON 4. From the starting position, " Down in front." Three suc- cessive motions and return. The changes from one position to the other in the shortest way possible. REMARKS. Although not so much used in the compo- sition for exhibitions, it is well to swerve from the "it so seems " established rule of " two, four, eight." Movements can be taken with two counts of resting following each repetition; or with, a "facing" (one-quarter turn or about face) at 7 and 8 ; but they will tax the attention of a class in a greater degree than usual. 64 GERM AX- AMERICAN OTMNA8TK 3 For "motions in reverse," the simpler expression, "return motions," will be used in the following lessons. 1 ( Bend arms. ) In front. 2 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 3 (Straight arms.) Upward. 4 ) 5 > Return motions. 6) II 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 ( Straight arms. ) In front forward. 3 (Straight arms.) Behind back- ward. 4 > 5 > Return motions. 6J III 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 (Straight arms. ) In front forward. 3 (Straight arms.) Behind down- ward. 4 ) 5 > Return motions. j IV 1 (Bend arms. ) In front. 2 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 3 Left sideways, right in front. 4 ) 5 > Return motions. V 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 (Straight arms. ) In front forward. 3 Right sideways, left in front. Return motions. VI 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 3 (Bend arms. ) Behind. 5 > Return motions. VII 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 (Straight arms. ) In front forward. 3 Left (overhead) behind, right downward. 4 ) 5 > Return motions. 6) VIII 1 (Bend arms.) In front. 2 (Straight arms.) In front forward. 3 Right (overhead) behind, left down- ward. 4 5 Return motions. 6 IX REMARK. A very neat arrangement of this lesson for .exhibition is as follows : 24 counts of the 4th and 5th exercises alternated, then 8 counts rest. 24 counts of the 1st exercise, then 8 counts rest. 24 counts of the 2d exercise, then 8 counts rest. 24 counts of the 6th exercise, then 8 counts rest. 24 counts of the 7th and 8th exercises alternated, then 8 counts rest. 24 counts of the third exercise, then 8 counts rest. 144 counts of movements, and 48 counts rest. SECOND COURSE 65 LESSON 5. From the starting position, " Down in front," four succes- sive motions and return.. The change from one position to the other in the shortest way possible. REMARKS. The positions may all differ from 1 to 4, or the 4th may simply be the opposite of the 3d. Even this rule need not be strictly observed, as in some arrangements it may be better to make the 3d motion the opposite of the 2d. In this lesson but four successive changes of the simplest form will be given. In the following lessons, the command "bend arms" before the command "in front" will be omitted. Let it be understood that "in front" means at the height of the chest (near the shoulder). The "in front " will also be omitted before the " forward." Let it be understood that the " forward " means with the arms (or one arm) extended at the height of the shoulders, unless otherwise mentioned. It makes the command simpler and more concise, and will be understood fully as well when the pupils have practised all previous lessons thoroughly. The word " behind," when used with " backward," may be dropped; in fact, all commands of explanation should be limited to the fewest words possible, without cutting or alter- ing the meaning. Instead of giving the exercises in full in both directions, they will in the remaining lessons be given in one direction only; and when the same are to be exe- cuted in the opposite direction, the simple command, " The same contrarily ! " or, " Contrary, the same ! " will be given. 4 Right sideways, left in front. 1 In front. g) 2 Forward. [ Return motions. 3 Left sideways, right in front. 8 60 t. EUMAN-AMERICAN The same contrarily. Ill 1 In front. 2 Forward. 3 Left sideways, right in front. 4 Right sideways, left behind. 5 Return motions. ~ > > IV The same contrarily. V 1 In front. 2 Forward. 3 Upward. 4 Left behind, right downward. 5 - > Return motions. VI The same contrarily. VII 1 In front. 2 Forward. 3 Behind. 4 Behind downward, or down behind. 6, > Return motions. 8* VIII The same contrarily. IX 1 In front. 2 Forward. 3 Upward. Down behind. Return motions. The same contrarily. XI 1 In front. 2 Forward. 3 Upward. 4 Left (remains) upward, right in front over (in front of the left shoulder). Return motions. XII The same contrarily. XIII 1 In front. 2 Forward. 3 Upward. 4 Left forward, right in front over (the end in the right hand is brought under the left shoulder). \ n I > Return motions. 8* XIV The same contrarily. XV 1 In front. 2 Forward. 3 Upward. 4 Left downward, right in front over. 5, o j _ > Return motions. 8^ XVI The same contrarily. 1 In front. XVII 2 Forward. 3 Upward. 4 Left in front over, and right in front over (left arm crosses over right, and hands glide towards each other somewhat). > Return motions. XVIII The same contrarily. WAND EXERCISES 67 PAET III. THIRD COURSE. Series of wand exercises combined with steps, strides, lunge- reverses, lunges, turning and bending of the trunk and knees. In this course a number of series are given comprising motions or exercises learned in the first and second courses. No at- tempt is made at exhausting each and every lesson previously learned. The series here offered show simply how to com- bine and arrange for a composition, wand-drill, or Roundel. SERIES I. Starting position; down in front. Parallel and easy centra-combinations. PART 1. With Step Position Forward. 1 Forward with step position, forward left (on ball of the foot) (Fig. 37). 2 counts. 2 Forward with step position, forward right (on ball of the foot). 2 counts. 3 Forward with step position, forward left (on whole foot). 2 counts. 4 Forward with step position, forward right (on whole foot). 2 counts. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause 16 counts, with rest or pose at 3, and recover at 13. PART 2. With Step Position Sideways. 1 Sideways left, right in front, with step position sideways left (on ball of the foot). 2 counts. Fig. 37. 2 Sideways right, left in front with step position, sideways right (on ball of the foot). 2 counts. 68 G Eli MA N-A M ERIC A N G YMNA 8 TICS 3 Sideways left, right in front with step position, sideways left (on whole foot) (Fig. 38). 2 counts. 4 Sideways right, left in front, with step position, sideways right (on whole foot). "2 counts. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause with rest or pose, and re- cover as above. Fig. 38. PART 3. Fig. 39. With Step Position Backward. 1 Upward with step position, back- 3 Upward with step position, back- ward left, (on ball of the foot ward right (on whole foot). (Fig. 39). 2 counts. 2 counts. 2 Upward with step position, back- 4 Upward with step position, back- ward right (on ball of the foot). ward right (on whole foot). 2 counts. 2 counts. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, etc., as above. PART 4. With Trunk Bent Backward. 1 In front with trunk bent backward 4 In front with trunk bent backward (slightly). 2 counts. In front with trunk bent backward (low). 2 counts. In front with trunk bent backward (slightly). 2 counts. (low). 2 counts. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, etc., as above. WAND EXERCISES 69 PART 5. With Trunk Bent Sideways. 1 Left upward, right in front over (height of the stomach), with the trunk bent sideways right (slightly). 2 counts. 2 Right upward, left in front over (as in Exercise 1), with the trunk bent sideways left. 2 counts. 3 Left upward, right in front over (height of the chest, the wand glides through the left hand), with the trunk bent sideways right (low) (Fig. 40). 2 counts. 4 Right upward, left in front over (as in Exercise 3), with the trunk bent sideways left (low). 2 counts. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, etc., as above. PART 6. With the Trunk Bent Forward. 1 Behind (on the shoulders), with the trunk bent forward (slightly). 2 counts. 2 Behind (on the shoulders), with the trunk bent forward (low) (Fig. 41). 2 counts. Fig. 40. the trunk bent forward (slight- ly). 2 counts. 4 Behind (on the shoulders), with the trunk bent forward (low). 2 counts. Repeat four times. 32 counts. 3 Behind (on the shoulders), with Pause, etc., as above. Fig. 47. With Turn Trunk. 1 Left downward (hand glides), right in front over, with turn trunk PART 7. Fig. 42. right (the head turns still more) (Fig 42). 2 counts. 70 GEltMAN-AMElilCAN G Y21NA8T1C8 2 Right downward (hand glides), left in front over, with turn trunk left (the head turns still more). 2 counts. 3 Left downward (the hand glides), right in front over (height of the stomach), with turn trunk left. 2 counts. 4 Right downward (the hand glides), left in front over (height of the stomach), with turn trunk right. 2 counts. Repeat four times. 32 counts. 1'uuse, etc., as above. PART 8. With Bent Knees. Behind down with bent knees (slightly) (Fig. 43). 2 counts. 2 Behind down, with bent knees (low). 2 counts. 3 Behind down, with bent knees (slightly). 2 counts. 4 Behind down, with bent knees (low). 2 counts. Repeat four times, and finish with pose in sym- metrical grouping. NOTE. In Part 2, Exercise 3, side- ways left, right in front, may be taken sideways left, right behind, if preferred. Also contrarily, 4. Fig. 43. SERIES II. Starting position ; down in front . Two motions and return. By taking the foregoing Series I, with " bent arms " in front for the first motion, and for the second motion just as given there, we have the same in a more effective arrangement. Only the first and fourth parts of the series are given for example ; the fourth, because it undergoes more of a change in the new arrangement. PART i. 1 In front. 2 Forward with step position, for- ward left (on ball of the foot). 3 ) 4 > Return motions. WAND EXERCISES 71 II 2 In front. 2 Forward with step position, for- whole foot, ward right (on ball of the foot). Repeat four times. Ill, IV Same as I and II, but step on the 32 counts. > Return motions. Pause, and rest or pose. PART 2. II 1 Forward (instead of in front, as in 1 Forward (instead of in front as in Series I). 2 In front with trunk bent backward (slightly). 3 ) ' Return motions. Series I). 2 In front with trunk bent backward (low). 3 ) Return motions. 4 J Pause, and rest or pose. And so on with the remaining parts. SERIES III. Starting Position; down in front! Two combined motions and return. While in Series II. the first motion was a simple one and the second a combined one, both are combined motions in this series. PART i Step Position and Bend the Knee of the Stepping Leg. 1 In front with step position, forward left. 2 Forward with bent left knee (Fig. 44). q i 4 > Return motions. NOTE. Step as in Series I, through- out; when the knee is bent, the whole foot is down. II The same contrarily. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Rest or pose, and recover, as in the other series. Fig. 44. 72 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS PART 2. 1 In front with step position, side- ways left. 2 Sideways left, right in front, with bent left knee (Fig. 45). 3 ) . > Return motions. Fig 45. II The same contrarily. Repeat four times. Rest or pose, etc. PART 3. II 1 In front with step position, back- ward left. 2 Upward, with bent left knee. Return motions. PART 4. I 1 Forward with step position, back- ward left. 2 In front, with bent trunk backward and bent left knee. The same contrarily. Repeat four times. Rest or pose, etc. Return motions. II Contrarily. Repeat four times. 32 counts. 32 counts. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. PART 5. 1 In front with step position, sideways right. 2 Left upwards, right in front over (height of the chest), with trunk bent sideways right and right knee bent. Return motions. II The same contrarily. Repeat four times. Pause, rest or pose, etc. 32 counts. PART 6. II 3 1 1 In front with step position, for- 4 } Return motions. ward left. 2 Behind, with trunk bent forward and the left knee bent. The same contrarily. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. WAND EXERCISES 73 PART 7. 1 In front with step position, side- ways right. 2 Left downward, right in front over, with turn trunk left and bent right knee. 4 3 ) . Return motions. II The same contrarily. Ill 1 In front with step position, side- ways right. With Both Knees Bent. I 2 1 In front with raised heels. 2 Behind down, with bent knees 3 (slightly). Left downward, right in front over, with turn trunk right and bent right knee (the wand in front of the left leg). > Return motions. IV Contrarily. Repeat two times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. PART 8. Behind down, with bent knees (low). > Return motions. O I . > Return motions. II 1 In front with raised heels. Repeat four times. Finish with grouping. 32 counts. SERIES IV. Starting position ; down in front ! PART 1. With Oblique Step Positions and Knee Bent of the Stepping Leg. I II 1 In front with step position, ob- liquely forward left. 2. Left oblique forward, right in front over, with bent left knee. o -v v Return motions. Contrarily the same. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, as in the other series. PART 2. 1 In front with step position, side- ways left. 2 Left sideways, obliquely upward, right in front over, with the left knee bent (Fig. 46). q j > Return motions. II Contrarily the same. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. 74 GERMAN-AMERICAN MM/AM .s / /< - PART 3. 1 In front with step position, ob- liquely backward left. 2 Left upward, right in front over, with left knee bent. QI > Return motions. 1 1 Contrarily the same. Repeat four times. :',-j> counU. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. PART 4. In front with step position, ob- liquely forward left. Down with bent trunk forward, over left knee (the wand almost touching in front of the left foot) (Fig. 47). ? ? Return motions. Contrarily the same. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. PART 5. 1 In front with step position, ob- liquely backward left. 2 Upward, with trunk bent backward and left knee bent (the trunk turns one-eighth to the right) (Fig. 48). 31 . > Return motions. Contrarily the same. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. PART 6. Upward with cross step position, forward left. Left in front over, right upward (the right hand remains nearly where it is, but the wand glides through the hand), with lunge sideways left (Fig. 49). ! Return motions. Contrarily the same. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. PART 7. 1 Upward with step position, side- wavs left. 2 Left sideways down (on the floor), with the trunk bent sideways left and the left knee bent. The right hand may be brought in front over (in front of the left shoulder), or the arm may be bent over head ; the wand must stand in a vertical position (Fig. ; I Return motions. WAND EXERCISES 75 Fig. 46. Fig. 47. Fig. 43. Fig. 49. Fig. 50. 76 < ; l-ll MAN-AM ERIC AN G YMNASTICS II Contrarily the same. Repeat four tinn>. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. PART 8. 1 Upward with lunge sideways left. 2 Left in front over, right upward with straightened left knee and bent right knee. 3 ) '. > Return motions. II Contrarily the same. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. PART 9. 1 Upward with stride (both feet step sideways with a jump). 2 Left down (on the floor) (see part 7), with the trunk bent sideways left and the left knee bent. Return motions. II Contrarily the same. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. PART 1O. 1 Upward with stride. 2 Left in front over and right in front over (left arm crosses over right), with bent trunk sideways right and bent right knee (Fig. 51). ^ > Return motions. II Contrarily the same. Repeat four times. 32 counts. Pause, and rest or pose, etc. Fig. 51. P A E T IV. FOURTH COURSE. In this course the more complicated motions, termed "winding," are spoken of exclusively. The term "winding" may have originated from the cir- WAND EXERCISES 77 cular motion of the hand, resembling somewhat the process of winding a cord around something. It may be done toward the body, and away from it. The former, which is executed with the under hold, occurs more frequently ; the latter, which is often combined with a circular swing or sweep of the wand, and in combination with the former, permits of fewer changes. These movements are best explained and will be more readily understood if taken from the starting position " down in front." When once learned, they may be executed from different positions, as will be seen in the following series. EXPLANATION FOR WINDING WITH THE UNDER HOLD. Raise the left hand in front of the chest, and the right Fig. 52. Fig. 53. sideways (the arm extended) (or let the wand glide through the right hand in raising). The thumb of the left hand should now point downward, and the back of the hand towards the chest, with the elbow a little higher than the shoulder (Fig. 52). From this position straighten the left GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA STIC'S arm sideways, down or upward, retaining the hold of ill-- left hand as much as possible, and bringing the right hand to position in front, or in front over, as the position of tin- left hand and arm or wand may demand (Fig. 53). It is possible to wind upward, downward, sideways, forward, and backward, in front of, and behind, the body. In the follow- ing exercises these movements will be simply termed "wind sideways, wind upward," etc. When the position at the end of an exercise is other than horizontal or vertical, it will so be stated. LESSON i. Starting position ; down in front (under hold) ! A "Wind to a horizontal position. To make the command shorter, let the second or return motion always be understood. 1 Wind sideways left, right in front. 2 Wind sideways right, left in front. 3 Wind sideways left, right behind. 4 Wind sideways right, left behind. 5 Wind forward left, right in front over (the wand glides through the winding hand). 6 Wind forward right, left in front over (the wand glides through the winding hand). ' 7 Wind forward left, right in front over (on shoulder). 8 Wind forward right, left in front over (on shoulder). 9 Wind forward left, right behind over (on shoulder). 10 Wind forward right, left behind over (on shoulder). 11 Wind backward left, right in front over (height of the shoulders). 12 Wind backward right, left in front over (height of the shoulders). 13 Wind backward left, right in front over (height of the hips). 14 Wind backward right, left in front over (height of the hips). 15 Wind upward left, right upward (both arms extended upward). 16 Wind upward right, left upward (both arms extended upward). 17 Wind sideways left over to right, right over in front (cross the arms height of the chest). 18 Wind sideways right over to left, left over in front (cross the arms height of the chest). WAND EXERCISES 79 LESSON 2. B Wind to the vertical positions. The wand may glide through the winding hand, or through the other hand, or through both hands. 1 Wind downward left, right in front over (Fig. 54). 2 Wind downward right, left in front over. 3 Wind downward left, right behind over (middle of the back). 4 Wind downward right, left behind over (middle of the back). 5 Wind downward left, right upward (both arms ex- tended). 6 Wind downward right, left upward (both arms ex- tended). 7 Wind upward left, right in front over. 8 Wind upward right, left in front over. 9 Wind upward left, right behind over. 10 Wind upward right, left behind over. Fig. 54. NOTE. The position in 9 and 10, taken alone, will be somewhat slanting, but when taken with bending, will be found to come under the head of the vertical positions. The winding upward and downward, both in front and behind the body, may lead to a slanting position as well, and when properly combined will make a fine exercise. LESSON 3. The contra, or wind reverse. Two motions and return. Although very difficult, this is nothing more than changing from one position after winding to the opposite. The extreme difficulty arises through the quickness of the change, as the returning movement from the first position and the entire movement to the second position must be done in one count; 80 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS the movements from the second position to the third must also be effected at one count. A Wind in directly opposite directions. As the position of the right hand naturally suggests itself when the left winds, it is not given in the following lessons unless necessary. Sideways. 1 Wind sideways left. 2 Return and wind sideways right. 3 Return and wind sideways left. 4 Return and down in front. II Contrarily the same. Ill Downward. 1 Wind downward left. 2 Return and wind downward right. 3 Return and wind downward left. 4 Return and down in front. IV Contrarily the same. Upward. 1 Wind upward left. 2 Return and wind upward right. 3 Return and wind upward left. 4 Return and down in front. VI Contrarily the same. VII Forward. 1 Wind forward left, right in front (on or under shoulder). 2 Return and wind forward right to the opposite position. 3 Return and wind forward left to the opposite position. 4 Down in front. VIII Contrarily the same. IX. Backward. 1 Wind backward left (height of the shoulders or the hips). 2 Return and wind backward right to the opposite position. 3 Return and wind backward left to the opposite position. 4 Return and down in front. X. Contrarily the same. B In different, but non-opposite directions. XI Sideways and downward. 1 Wind sideways left. 2 Return and wind downward right, left behind in slanting position. 3 4 Return motions. WAND EXERCISES 81 XII left in front over (on or under Contrarily the same. the shoulder). ' [ Return motions. XIII Sideways and upward. XVI 1 Wind sideways left. Contrarily the same. 2 Return and wind upward right, X V T T left in front over. 3 ) _ Sideways and backward. . > Return motions. 1 Wind sideways left. XIV 2 Return and wind backward right, Contrarily the same. left in front over ( at the height of the shoulders or the hips). XV 3 ) , > Return motions. Sideways and forward. 1 Wind sideways left. XVIII 2 Return and wind forward right, Contrarily the same. As will be seen by the foregoing lessons, the contra, or wind reverse, may be extended ad infinitum. LESSON 4. The -wind with the upper hold. The wind in combination with circle, or sweep simple, and followed again by a wind. Starting position ; down in front (upper hold) NOTE. When followed by a wind as last motion, the winding hand slips around the end of the wand to the under hold. EXPLANATION OF THE DIFFERENT MOVEMENTS OF THE WIND WITH THE UPPER HOLD. Raise the left hand with the hold unchanged in front, and bring the right downward, letting the wand glide through the hand. The wand is now in a vertical position in front, on the middle line of the body; the left hand at the height of 82 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS the chest. Now turn the wand with the left hand firmly (as if driving a screw), until it has completed a whole turn ; then, pressing the elbow close to the bod}-, turn the hand a little more, and straighten the left arm sideways, bringing the right hand in front or front over. (Fig. 55.) This (the wind sideways left) should be practised first in two motions and return, then in one motion and return. When ex- ecuted in the latter way, the right arm swings down over, so as to allow the left hand to make the turn as ex- plained above. The right hand must not remain in this downward position any length of time, but must come immediately up to the position in front. The wind with the upper hold is more limited than that with the under hold. Fig. 55. Sideways. 1 Wind sideways left, right in front (see explanation). 2 Wind sideways right, left in front (see explanation). 3 Wind sideways left, right down- ward sweep and under left shoul- der (end of the wand behind, on back, the wand in slightly slant- ing position). 4 Wind sideways right, left down- ward sweep and behind as in 3. Forward. 5 Wind forward left, right downward sweep and under the left shoul- der. 6 Wind forward right, left down- ward sweep and under the left shoulder. 7 Wind forward left, right down- ward sweep and in front, the right end of the wand under the right shoulder (oblique posi- tion). 8 Wind forward right, left down- ward sweep and in front, as in Exercise 7. Upward 9 Wind upward left, right down- ward sweep and in front over. 10 Wind upward right, left down- ward sweep and in front over. WAND EXERCISES 83 LESSON 5. Miscellaneous winds, such as one-half wind followed by long sweep or circle of the wand, and finish the wind after the circle, etc. The few examples here offered will give the teacher a good idea of how manifold these exercises may be made. Both the under and the upper hold permit of good combina- tions in this line. In some exercises the hold must be changed (the hand slips around the end of the wand while in motion). Sideways. 2 Circle to the left (swing the wand With underhold. Two motions and in a circle to the left ) ri ht side " return. ways, left in front (right arm is T extended sideways). 3 ) i TTT. j -j i tt 4 t Return motions. 1 Wind sideways left. 4 J EXPLANATION. After the plain wind sideways left, the left hand (firm hold) is drawn towards the body, and the right hand is raised in front of the body, permitting the hand to glide along the wand almost to the left hand; the wand continues the circular swing or sweep, and when it rises to the right the right hand glides along the wand until the arm is extended sideways at the height of the shoulders, the left hand in front with under hold. II. III. Contrarily the same. 1 One-half wind left in front (middle With the upper-hold, the one-half of the chest), circle to the right wind, circle, and wind. Two mo- and sideways right to position. tions and return. 2 Wind sideways left, right in front. 3 \ Return motions, but circle in the 4 / same direction. EXPLANATION. The left hand is raised and turned as explained in Lesson 4. The wand is now in a vertical posi- tion. Instead of winding out sideways, as commanded in that 84 CKHMA \-A MI-:i:K A.\ (, }'M. \ASTIVti lesson, the wand is swung by the right hand, which glides along it, in a circle to the right and to position sideways right, left hand in front. As the wand is raised to the latter position, the left hand slips around the end to the under hold. Wind sideways left and return, change the hold, and circle to down in front. IV. Contrarily the same. With the under hold. Wind, circle, and wind. V. 1 Wind sideways left. 2 Circle to the left and as the right hand (gliding) is raised sideways right, wind forward left, the right hand over in front, on the left shoulder. 3 ) . > Eeturn motions. VI. Contrarily the same. With the upper hold. VII. Forward. 1 Wind forward left (right over in front). 2 Return, and as the left hand slips around the end to under hold, wind backward left. Return motions. VIII. Contrarily the same. With under hold. IX. Downward. 1 Wind downward left. 2 Wind downward right (both arms extended downward). X. Contrarily the same. XI. 1 Wind upward left. 2 Wind upward right (both arms ex- tended). XII. Contrarily the same. An almost endless variety of combinations in winds, with and without circles, may be arranged from the above. PAKT V. FIFTH COURSE. In all preceding lessons the motions from one position to the other have been treated in the shortest way possible. The starting position has been down in front in all cases. The WAND EXERCISES 85 following lessons contain all the different ways of changing from one position to another, as well as the starting position, carry at the shoulder (fundamental position). To illustrate the different modes of executing changes, the following lesson is prepared without any respect to arrangement for series, simply containing the positions mostly used, with their pos- sible changes. LESSON i. Starting position ; down in front ! 1 From the position sideways left, right in front, the following changes are possible. 2 Sideways right, left in front. First: The nearest or shortest way over. EXPLANATION. Draw or pull with the right hand and extend the arm sideways ; as the right arm is straightened, the left arm must be bent in front. ^ > Return motions. Second : With the forward sweep or curve around. 1 EXPLANATION. From the posi- tion sideways left, right in front. 2 Extend both arms forward, and bring the left hand in front, while the right hand goes on until the arm is extended sideways. \ [ Return motions. Third : With the upward sweep or curve around. 1 EXPLANATION. Sideways left, right in front (same as in the first and second). Extend both arms upward, and bring the left Hand in front, while the right hand goes on until the arm is extended sideways. Return motions. Fourth : With the downward sweep or curve around. 1 EXPLANATION. Same as above. 2 Extend both arms downward, and bring the left hand in front, while the right goes on until the arm is extended sideways. 3 ) '. > Return motions. Fifth : In the shortest way behind over. 1 EXPLANATION. Same as above. 2 Raise the right hand overhead and draw or pull until the arm is ex- tended at the height of the shoul- der ; the left hand may remain behind or may be brought in front. Return motions. Sixth : With the backward sweep or curve around. 1 EXPLANATION. Same as above. 86 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNAST!' 8 2 Raise the right hand overhead and Seventh : With the downward extend both arms backward, sweep or curve around, right goes on to the right until 1 EXPLANATION. Same as above, the arm is extended at the height 2 Same as in the sixth> but extend of the shoulder; the left hand the arms downward and swing to may be left behind or brought in position; right hand may be left * ron t' behind or may be brought in 4 | Return motions. front. In commanding the above changes, the author has found the following to be concise and definite : - " Over in front," " around forward," " around above," "around below," " over behind," "around backward," " around below behind." If the terms "forward sweep, or curve," "up- ward sweep," "downward sweep," etc., suit better, make use of them. The position sideways (horizontal), as given in these examples, permits of more changes to the reverse position than any other. There is another change, but it is used chiefly in combinations of series and combined with lunges, etc. It is the circle swing, in which the one hand glides along the wand to the other hand, as the desired position is attained in the winding lessons. PART VI. SIXTH COURSE. Series of exercises of all courses in more difficult arrangements. Starting position ; fundamental position. The -wand at the right shoulder (carry). SERIES I. NOTE. The second movement may be upward as well as down in front; it is even more effective. In this series the down in front in the second count is adhered to until the eleventh part, hi which and in the twelfth it is changed to the upward. WAND EXERCISES 87 PART 1. Starting position ; carry at the right shoulder ! Down in front and in front. 1 Left hand grasps with the fingers 6 Down in front. behind at the upper end. 7 To the left shoulder (right hand 2 Down in front. raises the wand); carry position. 3 In front. 8 Bring the right arm and the hand 4 Down in front. to the position at the right side. 5 In front. 9-16 Contrarily the same. PART 2. Down in front and forward. 1 As above. 7 To the left shoulder as above. 2 As above. 8 Right arm to position at the right 3 Forward. side. 4 Down in front. 9-16 Contrarily the same 5 ) . > Same as 3 and 4. PART 3. Down in front and upward. 1 As above. 5 > Same as 3 and 4. 2 As above. 6 3 Upward (swing up forward with 7 To the left shoulder. straight arms). 8 Right arm to position at the side. 4 Down in front. 9-16 Contrarily the same. PART 4. Down in front and behind. 1 As above. 5 -> 2 As above. 6 } Same as 3 and 4. 3 Behind (bent arms), with the for- 7 To the left shoulder. ward and upward sweep or curve 8 Right arm to position at the side, to position on the shoulders. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 4 Down in front. PART 5. Down in front and down behind. 1 Asabove - jj) Same as 3 and 4. 2 As above. 3 Down behind (full swing). 7 To the left shoulder. 4 Down in front. 8 Ri 8 ht arm to position. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 88 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS PART 6. The same as Part 1, but with step position backward right in the third count, and return the foot to place in the fourth count, so at 5 and 6. At 11, 12, 13, and 14 the left foot steps. PART 7. The same as Part 2, with step position forward right and left as indicated in Part 6. PART 8. The same as Part 3, with step position sideways right and left. PART 9. The same as Part 4, with lunge forward right and left. PART 1O. The same as Part 5, with lunge sideways right and left. PART 11. Upward and behind (slanting). 1 Left hand grasps with the fingers behind at the upper end. 2 Upward. 3 Behind and left downward (slant- ing) with lunge sideways right (Fig. 56). 4 Upward with recover (return to the fundamental position). 5 Same as 3 and 4 7 To the left shoulder. 8 Right arm to position at the side. 9-16 Contrarily the same. ^^~ Fig. 56. PART 12. Upward and down sideways (vertically). 1 As above. 3 Left down sideways, and right over 2 As above. in front, with lunge obliquely for- ward right. WAND EXERCISES 89 4 Upward with recover. 7 To the left shoulder. I I Same as 3 and 4. 8 Hi S ht arm to P osition at the side - 9-16 Contrarily the same. SERIES II. PART 1. In front and forward with step position, forward and bend the forward knee (knee of the supporting leg). 1 Left hand grasps behind at the 5) Retum to 3 and 2 upper end. 2 Down in front. 7 f T the left shoulder ( carr y)' an(i 3 In front with step position forward 8 ] ret u right arm to position at right (on ths whole foot). the side - 4 Forward with bent right knee. 9 ~ 16 Contrarily the same. PART 2. In front and sideways with step position, sideways and bend the knee sideways. ^ | As above. g j Return to 3 and 2. 3 In front with step position, side- 7 "> To the left shoulder, and return ways right (on the whole foot). 8 j right arm to position at the side. 4 Sideways right with bent right 9-16 Contrarily the same. knee. PART 3. In front and upward with step position, backward and bend the rear knee. 1 ) 5 ) , > As above. > Return to 3 and 2. * ) o j 3 In front with step position back- ward right (on the whole foot). 4 Upward with bent right knee. 9-16 Contrarily the same. ward right (on the whole foot). 8j PART 4. In front and downward with step position, forward, turn trunk and bend trunk forward, -with bent front knee. * \ As above. an d bent trunk forward (straight back). 3 In front with step position, ob- 5 > liquely forward right and turn 6/ Return tc trunk right (one-eighth turn ) . 7 ) Ag above 4 Downward with bent right knee 8 J 9-16 Contrarily the same. 90 <; /:/.' MAN-AMERICAN G TMNAST1C8 PART 5. In front and upward with step position, obliquely backward ; turn trunk, and bent trunk backward with bent rear knee. 4 Upward with bent trunk backward As above. and bent right knee. 1 2 . 3 In front with step position, ob- - , liquely backward right, with turn o / Return to 3 and 2 - trunk, one-eighth left. u > As above. 9-16 Contrarily the same. PART 6. Upward and to vertical position, up- ward with cross step position, for- ward and lunge sideways. 2 1 As above. 3 Upward (horizontal position) with cross step position, forward right. 4 Right in front over (in front of the left shoulder), left remains up (vertical), with lunge sideways right (Fig. 57). Return to 3 and 2. Fig. 57. g > As above. 9-16 Contrarily the same. PART 7. Upward and downward to vertical position, -with step position sideways, and bent knee with bent trunk sideways. 5 6 1} Return to 3 and 2. As above. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 2 > As above. 3 Upward with step position side- ways right. 4 Downward right (end on the floor) w r ith bent trunk sideways right and right knee bent. PART 8. Upward, and upward to vertical position, and reverse with lunge sideways and lunge reverse. 1 \ A s aho 'p ^ Right in front over (in front of the J 3 Upward with lunge sideways right. left shoulder), vertical position with lunge reverse (straighten WAND EXERCISES 91 the bent knee and bend the 6 Down in front with recover (fun- other), damental position). 5 Around below (downward curve ^ \Asabove. or sweep and left upward), right .,, f 9-16 Contrarily the same. m front over with lunge reverse (original lunge position). PART 9. In front and upward. Down sideways with stride sideways, and bend knee and trunk sideways. 1 As above. 5 Around above (upward sweep or 2 In front with jump or hop to curve), with lunge reverse and stride position sideways (both bend reverse, and downward side- feet sideways about 36 inches ways left (on the floor), apart). 6 Upward (horizontally) with 3 Upward. straightened trunk and knee. 4 Down sideways right (on the floor), 7 To the left shoulder with a jump with bent right knee and bent to the fundamental position, trunk sideways right. 8 Eight arm to position at the side. PART 1O. 1 As above. on the feet (one-quarter turn). 2 Down in front. See note below. 3 Right in front over and left in 5 Eeturn wind and cross the arms front over (cross the right arm again, but right under left with over left), with a lunge sideways lunge reverse. right. 6 Down in front with recover. 4 Wind right (upper hold) over to 7 \ To the left shoulder and return the left side with lunge reverse, 8 f right arm to position at the side, and turn trunk left and turn left 9-16 Contrarily the same. NOTE. The wind here is actually a wind forward right, as the one-quarter turn on the feet makes it so. The posi- tion attained with 4 is right forward, left under right shoul- der, facing left and left knee bent. SERIES III. Starting position ; carry at the right shoulder. Preliminary 1. A 3 Raise with the right hand to the 1 Grasp with the left hand at the left shoulder. upper end (the fingers behind). 4 Right hand and arm to posi- 2 Down in front (upper hold). tion. 92 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS B 11 Raise the right hand to the left 5-8 Return motions. shoulder. 12 Right hand and arm to position C at the side. 9 Grasp with the left hand at the upper end (the fingers in front). 10 Down in front (under hold). 13-16. Retuni motions. Preliminary 2. Same as A, B, C, and D, in Pre- seventh count ; one-quarter turn liminary 1, with one-quarter turn right in the tenth count, and one- (face) left in the second count, quarter turn left in the fifteenth and one-quarter turn right on the count. PART 1. In front and behind, with bent trunk forward and backward. A 6 Down in front with straightened 1 Grasp with the left hand at the trunk. , x., , ,. , N 7 | To the left shoulder and return the upper end (the fingers behind). g } rf ht arm to position at the si(le _ 2 Down in front. Q _ 1Q Contrarily the same . 3 In front with bent trunk back- ward. 4 Behind (upward curve) with bent The same as A, with one-quarter trunk forward. turns (facing) as explained in 5 As 3. Preliminary 2. PART 2. Forward and on the hips with step backward ; bent knees. A 6 Upward (horizontally) with bent 1 As in Part 1. knee (low). 2 Left forward, right on the hip 7 To the left shoulder with straight- (right), with step backward right. ened knees. 3 Right forward, left on the left hip, 8 Right arm to position at the side. with step backward left. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 4 Forward (both extended), with step forward left. 5 Down in front with step up right Same as A, with facing as in the (right foot to place). first part. PART 3. Forward and upward, with raise the *eg and step backward. A 3 Forward with raise right leg for- 1 As above. ward. 2 In front. 4 In front with step backward right. WAND EXERCISES 93 5 Upward with raise right leg back- ward. 6 In front and right foot to place. To the left shoulder and right arm to position at the side. l\ 9-16 Contrarily the same. B Same as A, with facings. PART 4. Obliquely upward, with trunk bent forward, with raised leg back- ward, trunk bent backward, and swing the leg forward. A 5 Same as 3. 6 Down in front and right foot to place. 7 ) o > As in the first part. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 1 As in the first part. 2 As in the first part. 3 Obliquely upward (forward), with raise right leg backward, with trunk bent forward (Fig. 58). 4 Down in front with trunk bent backward and swing right leg forward. B The same as A, with facings. Fig. 58. PART 5. Upward (vertically) and downward and sideways, with bent knees, with step position sideways (other foot) ; raise the leg side- ways, straighten the bent knee and lunge, and lunge reverse. A 3 Around below (down curve), and 1 As in the first part. 2 Right upward, left in front over with step position, sideways left, with the right knee bent. the left upward, right in front over, with straightened right knee and raise the left leg sideways. 94 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 4 Around forward (forward sweep or curve) and sideways right, left in front with lunge sideways left. 5 Around forward and sideways left, with lunge reverse. 6 Around upward (upward sweep) and downward right, left in front over with the left foot to place. c / Right arm to position at the side. 9-16 Contrarily the same. B The same as A, with facings. PART 6. Sideways in front and behind, with step position sideways; cross step position and lunge, and cross lunge. 5 Same as 3, with cross lunge back- ward right. 6 Down in front with recover from the lunge. To the left shoulder, and right arm to position at the side. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 1 As in the first part. 2 Sideways right, left in front over, with step position sideways right. 3 Left over behind and sideways left, with cross step position forward right. 4 Right over in front and sideways right, left in front over with lunge sideways right. l\ 6 The same as A, with facings. PART 7. Downward and upward with lunge sideways, lunge reverse, and turn trunk. 1 As in the first part. 2 Left downward, right in front over. 3 Right upward, left in front over with lunge sideways left. 4 Right behind over (the hand slips around to under hold, and the wand is brought behind the left shoulder), the left upward with lunge reverse, and turn trunk right. See note. 5 Left upward (remains), right in front over (right circles around the head, and is brought in front of the left shoulder, hand slips around with lunge reverse and turn trunk left). 6 Around below (down sweep) and right upward, left in front over with recover. 7 i To the left shoulder, and right 8 \ arm to position at the side. 9-16 Contrarily the same. B Same as A, with facings. NOTE. The end of the wand is behind the shoulder ; the hand is on the shoulder, the arm behind. It is easier to change the hold in the foregoing count, that is, at 3. In returning, the hand slips back again to the under hold. WAND EXERCISES 95. PART 8. In front over with both (crossed arms, the hands glide), with bent knees (low). [ As in the first part. 3 In front over with both (cross arms, right over the left), with bent knees (low) (Fig. 59). 4 Reverse 3 with straightened knees. 5 Reverse with bent knees very low. 6 Reverse 5 with straightened knees. 7 ) To the left shoulder and right 8 ) arm to position at the side. 9-16 Contrarily the same. B Same as A, with facings. Fig. 59. Fig. 60. PART 9. On the hip, circle and downward with bent knees, with step posi- tion, cross backward and obliquely lunge, and cross lunge forward. 1 As in the first part. 2 On the right hip, left forward, right backward with cross step position, backward right with left knee bent (Fig. 60). 3 Circle forward to right obliquely downward, left in front over (un- der right shoulder), with lunge obliquely forward right. 4 Circle backward to position as 2, with cross step backward right, with the left knee bent. 5 Same as 3, but cross lunge forward right. 6 Same as 4. 7 To the left shoulder with recover. 8 Right arm to position at the side. 9-16 Contrarily the same. B Same as A, with facings. 96 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA 8TICS PART 1O. Wind forward and upward, after winding with bent knees and bent trunk backward. 1 Grasp with the left hand at the upper end (fingers in front). 2 Down in front (under hold). 3 Wind forward right with bent knees (low). 4 Wind forward left (right remains) with straightened knees. 5 Bent trunk backward and raise wand upward. 6 Forward with return wind left and straightened trunk. 7 Downward left to shoulder, with return wind right. 8 Right arm to position at the side. 9-16 Contrarily the same. B The same as A, with facings. PART 11. Wind and wind reverse with stride, bent knee, and bent knee reverse. . 5 Same as 3. 6 Wind reverse sideways to the right, and recover to fundamental posi- tion. 7 Return wind right to the left shoul- der, left downward. 8 Right arm to position at the side. 9-16 Contrarily the same. 1 Same as 1 in Part 10. 2 Wind sideways right, left in front with stride sideways. 3 Wind reverse sideways to the left with bent left knee. 4 Wind reverse sideways to the right with bent knee reverse. B The same as A, with facings. PART 12. Wind and wind reverse to different direc- tions with lunge reverse and bent trunk. A 1 Same as 1 in Part 11. 2 Upward (horizontally, under hold). 3 Wind sideways right, left in front with lunge sideways right. 4 Wind reverse downward left, right behind (slanting position) with lunge reverse. 5 Wind reverse upward right, left in front over with lunge reverse and bent trunk sideways left (Fig. 61). WAND EXEECISES 97 6 Return wind and upward (both) 9-16 Contrarily the same. (horizontal position) with re- cover. B 7 | To the left shoulder and right arm Same as A, with facings. 8 / to position at the side. By taking the second position upward instead of " down in front," the exercises of the several series here given will increase in value. GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTIC'S EXERCISES WITH CLUBS BY FEUD. W. FROEHLICH Arranged in three grades of four lessons each. Weight of clubs : 1 to 2 pounds. Armcircle, a; forearmcircle, b; haiidcircle, c (Fig. 62). Armcircle sideways right (left;, or outward (a) (Fig. 63); also inward (b). Armcircle forward right (left), also backward (Fig. 64). ABBREVIATIONS. AC. Armcircle. DEC. Double handcircle. FAC. Forearmcircle. A double circle means that both HC. Handcircle. arms execute an AC, FAC, or an HC DAC. Double armcircle. simultaneously. DFAC. Double forearmcircle. G E A D E I. LESSON 1. Raise the clubs to position (the arms bent to an acute angle, the hands width of shoulders apart) (Fig. 65) ; Raise ! 1 AC right sideways (or outward), 4 The same left, and return to the starting posi- o AC right forward, tion in two counts. Begin ! 1-2, 6 The same left. 1- Halt ! 7 AC right backward. 8 The same left. EXPLANATION. Extend the arm . , 9 AC right sideways right three upward, describe one complete times and retum to the 8tapt , circle without twisting the trunk, jn four countg before bending the arm to the " Ha]t , starting position. 10 Execute Exercise 2 as in Exer- 2 The same left. cise 9. 3 AC right sideways left (or in- 11 Execute Exercise 3 as in Exer- ward) in 2 counts. cise 9. EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 99 \ \ \ Fig. 62 a. Fig. 62 b. Fig. 62 C. 100 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS Fig. 63a. Fig. 83 b. EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 101 12 Execute Exercise 4 as in Exer- 14 Execute Exercise 6 as in Exer- cise 9. cise 9. 13 Execute Exercise 5 as in Exer- 15 Execute Exercise 7 as in Exer- cise 9. cise 9. 16 Execute Exercise 8 as in Exer- cise 9. Fig. 84. Fig. 65. LESSON 2. Clubs to position ; Raise ! Exercises 1 and 2 of Lesson 1 al- ternately in 4 counts. Exercises 3 and 4 of Lesson 1 al- ternately in 4 counts. Exercises 5 and 6 of Lesson 1 al- ternately in 4 counts. Exercises 7 and 8 of Lesson 1 al- ternately in 4 counts. Exercises 1 and 4, 2 and 3, 5 and 8, and 6 and 7 of Lesson 1 alternately in 4 counts. Exercises 9 to 16 of Lesson 1 al- ternately in 8 counts. 7 DAC sideways right in 2 counts. 8 The same left. 9 DAC right sideways right and left sideways left (or outward) in 2 counts. 10 DAC right sideways left and left sideways right (or inward) in 2 counts. 11 AC right forward and left back- ward simultaneously in 2 counts. 12 AC left forward and right back- ward simultaneously in 2 counts. 102 GERMAN-AMERICA .V t; YM V . I STKJS LESSON 3. Clubs to position ; Raise ! 1 DAC sideways right three times and return to position in 4 counts. 2 The same left. 3 DAC outward three times and re- turn to position in four counts. 4 DAC inward three times and return to position in four counts. 5 AC right forward and left back- ward three times and return to position in 4 counts. 6 AC left forward and right back- ward three times and return to position in 4 counts. 7 DAC sideways right and left alter- nately in 4 counts. 8 DAC outward and inward alter- nately in 4 counts. 9 AC right forward and left back- ward ; left forward and right backward; alternately in 4 counts. 10 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately in 8 counts. 11 Exercises 3 and 4 alternately in 8 counts. 12 Exercises 5 and alternately in 8 counts. 13 DFAC sideways right in 2 counts. EXPLANATION. The centre of the circle lies at the elbows; keep the upper arms close to the body. 14 Same sideways left. 15 Same sideways outward. 16 Same sideways inward. 17 Exercises 13, 14, 15, and 16, three times and return to position, as in the above exercises ; also al- ternately in 8 counts, or alter- nating with DAC. LESSON 4. Clubs to position ; Raise ! 1 AC right sideways right, or out- ward and step position right sideways, in 2 counts. EXPLANATION. Place the foot side- ways at 1, close the heels at 2. 2 The same left. 3 AC right sideways left, or inward and step position backward right, in 2 counts. 4 The same left. 5 AC right forward and step position right forward in 2 counts. 6 The same left. 7 AC right backward and step posi- tion right backward in 2 counts. 8 The same left. 9 Exercises 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8, but AC three times and return to position; the step position at 1, and close heels at 3 in 4 counts. 10 DAC right and step position side- ways right, bending the left knee, in 2 counts (Fig. 66). 11 The same left. 12 DAC outward and step position right backward, bending the left knee, in 2 counts. 13 DAC inward and step position left backward, bending the right knee, in 2 counts. 14 Exercises 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 7 and 8, 10 and 11, 12 and 13, alter- nately in 4 counts. EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 103 \ \ Fig. 66. GRADE II. Clubs to position; Raise! LESSON 1. 1 DAC sideways right three times, and step position sideways right, bending the left knee, in 4 counts. EXPLANATION. Step position at 1, close the heels at 3. 2 The same left. 3 DAC outward three times, and step position right backward, bending the left knee, in 4 counts. 4 DAC inward three times, and step position left backward, bending the right knee, in 4 counts. 5 Three-quarter DAC forward, re- verse to starting position, in 3 counts. EXPLANATION. Extend the arms upward, and swing them for- ward, downward, and backward, keeping the hands width of shoulders apart, the arms on a level, or nearly so, with the shoulders at 1 ; reverse to up- ward position at 2 ; bend the arms to the starting position at 3. 6 Exercise 5, with bending the trunk forward to a right angle at 1, straighten the trunk at 2 (Fig. 67). 7 Three-quarters DAC sideways right, twist the trunk to the left, re- verse to starting position, in 3 104 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS \ Fig. 67. Fig. 68. EXERCISES WIT II CLUBS 105 counts. Also, without twisting the trunk, right arm bent to a right angle. EXPLANATION. Start off to the right at 1 ; after the clubs have passed body in front, twist the trunk to the left, the arms in the forward position (the clubs and arms in one line) at 2, swing downward, twist the trunk forward, and return to the start- ing position. 8 The same left. 9 Three-quarters DAC inward, re- verse to the starting position, in 3 counts (Fig. 68). Fig. 69. 10 Three-quarters DAC outward, re- verse to the starting position in 3 counts (Fig. 69). EXPLANATION. The arms bent at the elbows to a right angle, on a level with the shoulders, the right hand over the left elbow, the left hand under the right elbow, the clubs and forearms in one line. 11 Exercises 7 and 8, and while the arms are in the forward position at the left side at 2, execute a half DHC upward, lowering the clubs on the forearms (strik- ing them), reverse to the start- ing position, in 4 counts (Fig. 70). 12 The same left. 13 Exercise 9, and while the arms are in a sideways position at 2, execute a half DHC upward, as in Exercise 11; reverse to posi- tion ; in four counts. H Execute Exercise 10 similarly. 15 Three-quarters DAC forward; re- verse to the forward position and one-half DHC upward, as 106 GEllMAN-AMElilCAN G YMNASTICS in Exercise 11; at 4 bend the arms to the starting position; in 4 counts. The same with bend- ing the trunk forward, as in Ex- ercise 6. 16 Three-quarters DAC forward; re- verse three-quarters and bend the arms, dropping the clubs in the rear of shoulders, holding the elbows sideways high; at 4 (Fig. 71) return to the starting position ; in 4 counts. The same with bending the trunk forward, as in Exercise 6. 17 Exercise 16, but at 3 bend the trunk backward or bend the knees. 18 Execute Exercises 15, 16, and 17 several times before returning to the starting position. Fig. 70. Fig. 71. LESSON 2. 1 Three-quarters DAC right ; twist the trunk left; outer DHC for- ward, and three-quarters DAC left, back to the starting posi- tion, in 4 counts. EXPLANATION. While the arms are in the forward position, and the trunk twisted left, the clubs describe a DHC downward for- ward in a vertical plane on the outer side of the hands (which should be width of shoulders, apart). 2 The same opposite. 3 Three-quarters DAC inward ; DHC outward in the rear; three-quar- ters DAC outward to the start- ing position. EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 107 EXPLANATION. The arms ex- tended sideways, the clubs de- scribe DEC outward in the rear of the arms (Fig. 72). 4 Exercise 1, but inner DHC for- ward. The same opposite; also right outer and left inner HC. 5 Exercise 3, but DHC outward in front. 6 Exercise 1, but DHC backward. The same opposite. 7 Exercise 3, but DHC inward in the rear. The same DHC in- ward in front. 8 Exercise 4, but DHC backward. Same opposite. 9 Three-quarters DAC forward, re- verse to forward position ; outer DHC forward at three, then only one-half DAC forward, and pro- ceed as before, in 3 counts. Fig. 72. EXPLANATION. This exercise should be done several times, that is, continued before returning to position. 10 Exercise 9, but DHC backward. 11 Exercise 9, but inner DHC for- ward. 12 Exercise 9, but inner DHC back- ward. 13 Three-quarters DAC forward at 1; reverse to forward position at 2, one-half DHC backward, lower- ing the clubs on the forearms at 3; outer one and one-half DHC forward downward at 4; then repeat several times before re- turning to position, in 4 counts. 14 Exercise 13, but inner one and one-half DHC forward. 15 Exercises 13 and 14, but bend the trunk forward at 1, straighten at 2. 16 Exercise 16 of Lesson 1 of this grade; but instead of returning to position at 4, execute an outer DHC, forward arms bent; repeat in 4 counts. 17 Exercise 1(5 of this Lesson, but at 3 bend the trunk backward, or bend the knees at 3. 108 G Eli MA N-A NEK 1C A N G YMNA S TICS LESSON 0. 1 Exercise 1 of Lesson 2 of this Grade, but at 1 lunge left sideways; at 3 close the heels. 2 Same opposite. 3 Exercise 3 of Lesson 2; but at 1 lunge left backward. 4 Exercises 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of Lesson 2 can be done similarly to Exer- cises 1, 2, and 3 of this lesson. 5 Exercise 13 of Lesson 2; but at 1 lunge left forward, at 3 close the heels. Same right. 6 Exercise 15; but at 1 lunge left forward, at 3 close the heels. Same right. 7 Exercise 1 of this Lesson; at 2 kneel right, at the same time turn Fig. 73. feet left, so that the body ha- ecuted a quarter turn left. At 3 straighten the right knee; at 4 close the heels and face front (Fig. 73). 8 The same opposite. 9 Exercise 3 of this Lesson ; but at 1 step left forward, at 2 kneel right; at 3 straighten the right knee ; at 4 close the heels. Same right. 10 Exercises 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 can be done similarly to Exercises 7. 8, and 9 of this Lesson. 11 Three-quarters DAC right, one and three-quarters DAC left to the starting position, in 4 counts. 12 Same opposite. 13 Three-quarters DAC outward, one and three-quarters DAC inward to starting position, in 4 counts. 14 Three-quarters DAC inward, one and three-quarters DAC outward to starting position, in 4 counts. 15 Exercise 11, with a lunge left side- ways at 1 ; close the heels at 3. Same opposite. 16 Exercise 13, with lunge left back- ward or right. 17 Exercise 14, with a lunge left backward or right. LESSON 4. AC right sideways right (or out- ward); HC sideways right (or outward) in rear of the right shoulder, alternately (Fig. 74) in 2 counts continued, the arm bent during HC. The same left. AC right forward ; outer HC for- ward alternately in 2 counts, the arm bent during HC. 4 The same left. 5 AC right sideways left (or inward ) ; HC sideways left or inward in rear of right shoulder alternately, the arm bent during HC. 6 The same left. Exercises 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, as continued movements, or return to starting position at 3. 7 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately in 6 counts. EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 109 X" "-x Fij. 74. EXPLANATION. Return to position after each HC. 8 Exercises 3 and 4 alternately in 4 counts. 9 Exercises 5 and 6 alternately in 6 counts. 10 Exercises 1 and 6 alternately in 6 counts. Same opposite. 11 AC right outward; HC right out- ward in the rear of the right shoulder; AC right outward and return to position, in 4 counts. 12 Same as 11 with left outward; right inward; left inward, right forward ; left forward. 13 Combine the Exercises 11 and 12 alternately in 8 counts. 14 Five-quarters DAC sideways right ; twist the trunk right, outer DEC forward alternately, in 2 counts. EXPLANATION. Twist the trunk during the fifth quarter of the DAC. Repeat several times before returning to position. After the first DEC, the DAC is only four quarters. 15 The same left. 16 Exercise 14, but inner DEC for- ward. 17 The same left. 18 Three quarters DAC sideways right, twist the trunk left; outer DEC upward (or backward); twist the trunk forward; alter- nately in 2 counts. Repeat. EXPLANATION. After the DEC the DAC is four quarters. 19 The same opposite. 110 GERMAN-AMERICAN YMNAST1CS GRADE III. LESSON 1. 1 DAC sideways right; DHC side- ways right in rear of the shoul- ders ; alternately in 4 counts. Continued (without returning to position each time). 2 The same left. 3 DAC outward; DHC outward in rear of the shoulders; alternately in 4 counts. 4 DAC inward ; DHC inward in rear of the shoulders; alternately in 4 counts. 5 DAC sideways right; DHC side- ways right in the rear of the shoulders ; DAC sideways right and return to position ; same left ; alternately in 8 counts. DAC outward; DHC outward in the rear of the shoulders ; DAC outward and return to position; same inward ; alternately in 8 counts. 7 One-half DAC sideways right, DHC sideways right in front the arms extended downward ; one half DAC sideways right ; con- tinued alternately in 2 counts, the arms extended (Fig. 75). 8 The same opposite. 9 The same outward. 10 The same inward. 1 1 AC right outward ; HC right out- ward in the rear, the arm ex- tended downward ; continued alternately in 2 counts. EXPLANATION. While executing the HC, bend the wrist and el- bow slightly, allowing the hand to touch the body, and move it forward over the hip (Fig. 76). 12 The same left. Also with the anus upward. 13 Exercise 11 inward. EXPLANATION. While doing the HC, the back of the hand against the body, moving it backward. 14 The same left. 15 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- ways right in rear, the arms downward. Continued alter- nately in 2 counts. 16 The same left. 17 The same outward. 18 The same inward. 19 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- ways right in front of the shoul- ders, the arms bent. Continued alternately in 2 counts. EXPLANATION. While doing the HC, the knob of the club should be between the first and second fingers and thumb. LESSON 2. DAC sideways right ; DHC side- ways right in rear, leftover (the left arm bent, the hand over the right shoulder, the arm in front of the face) (Fig. 77). Contin- ued alternately in 2 counts. The same left. DAC sideways right ; DHC side- ways right in the rear, the left under (the right in the rear of the right shoulder, the left hand under the right arm). Continue alternately in 2 counts. The same left. EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 111 Fig. 76. 112 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNAST1CS Fig. 77. 5 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- ways right in the rear of the shoulders at 2; DHC sideways right as in Exercise 1 at 3. Continue in 3 counts. 6 The same left. 7 Exercise 5, but at 2 swing the third movement, and at 3 the DHC of the third Exercise. Con- tinue in 3 counts. 8 The same left. 9 Exercise 5, and at 4 DHC of Exercise 3. Continue in 4 counts. 10 The same left. 11 DAC sideways right at 1 ; DHC sideways right in rear of the shoulders at 2 ; twist the trunk right and outer DHC forward at 3. Continue in 3 counts. 12 The same left. 13 Exercise 11, at 4 add the inner DHC forward. 14 The same left. 15 DAC outward at 1 ; DHC outward in the rear of the shoulders at 2 ; extend the arms side- ways, and DHC outward in front at 3 ; bend arms and DHC out- ward in the rear of the shoulder at 4. 16 The same inward, without extend- ing the arms for the second DHC. 17 Most of the DHC of Exercises 1- 14 can also be done backward at the opposite side, then twist the trunk forward and DHC in the rear of the shoulders. The overswings in this lesson can be learned easily by exercising with one arm at a time. EXEECISES WITH CLUBS 113 Fig. 78. LESSON 3. 1 HC right outward in the rear of the right shoulder at 1 ; AC outward at 2. AC left outward at 1 ; HC left outward in the rear of the shoulder at 2, both movements simultaneously continued (Fig. 78). 2 HC right inward in the rear of the right shoulder at 1 ; AC in- ward at 2. AC left inward at 1 ; IIC left inward in the rear of the left shoulder at 2, simultaneously continued. 3 HC right outward in the rear of the right shoulder at 1 ; AC outward at 2. AC left inward, or to the right at 1 ; HC left inward in the rear at 2 simultaneously. 4 The same as 3 left. 5 HC right forward at 1 ; AC for- ward at 2. AC left forward at 1 ; HC left forward at 2 simultaneously (Fig. 79). Same backward. 6 DAC sideways right ; DHC side- ways right in the rear of the shoulders ; three-quarters DAC sideways right and double hori- zontal HC sideways right. Con- tinue in 4 counts. EXPLANATION. Both arms raised sideways left (the left arm ex- tended, the right arm bent to a 114 GERM AN- AMERICAN G YMNAST1CS Fig. 79. right angle), both clubs describe a HC to the right in a horizontal plane over the hands, at the same time both arms move side- ways right, the elbows bent slightly. 7 The same opposite. 8 The same outward. 9 The same inward. Exercises 6, 7, 8, and 9 should be taken with one arm at a time, until the exercise has been thor- oughly learned. 10 Three-quarters DAC sideways right ; then reverse one and three-quarters DAC left ; DEC sideways left in the rear of the shoulders, then the same to the opposite side. Continued alter- nately in 8 counts. 11 Three-quarters DAC outward; then reverse one and three-quar- ters DAC inward ; DHC inward in the rear of the shoulders, then the same inward. Con- tinued alternately in 8 counts. 12 Three - quarters DAC outward ; then reverse one and three-quar- ters DAC inward ; DHC inward in the rear of the shoulders ; three-quarters DAC inward ; one and three-quarters DAC out- ward ; DHC outward in the rear of the shoulders. Continued al- ternately in 8 counts. 13 Exercises 10 and 11 can also be done with a double horizontal HC instead of DHC in the rear of the shoulders, as in the Ex- ercises 6, 7, 8, and 9. EXERCISES WITH CLUBS 115 14 Exercise 6, with a lunge right sideways at 1, close the heels at 3. Same opposite. 15 Exercise 8 and 9 with a lunge left or right backward. 16 Exercise 10, with a lunge left side- ways at 1, close the heels at 3, lunge right sideways .at 5, close the heels at 7. 17 Exercise 11, with a lunge right backward at 1, close the heels at 3, lunge left backward at 5, close the heel sat 7. 18 Lunge sideways right, straighten the right arm sideways obliquely upward, AC left inward and HC inward in the rear of the left shoulder at 1 and 2, at 3 close the heels and DAC sideways right to starting position or con- tinue in 2 counts. 19 The same left. 20 DAC sideways right, DHC side- w r ays right in the rear of the shoulders and one step sideways right at 1 and 2 ; DAC sideways right, and return to position and one step sideways right at 3 and 4. 21 Same left. Many other exercises can be done while marching forward, side- ways, and backward. LESSON 4. 1 AC left inward ; follow immedi- ately with AC right outward ; HC left inward in the rear of the left shoulder, followed by a HC right outward in the rear of the right shoulder. Continue in 2 counts ; AC and HC wheel right sideways. EXPLANATION. Count 1 for AC and 2 for HC. 2 The same left. 3 Exercise 1, but HC left in the rear of the right shoulder, the arm in front of the face, wheel right with the left over. 4 The same left. 5 AC right forward ; follow immedi- ately with the left forward ; outer HC right forward, followed with outer HC left forward in 2 counts. 6 DAC sideways right at 1, twist the trunk right and outer DHC for- ward at 2 ; inner DHC forward at 3, outer DHC at 4. Continue in 4 counts. 7 The same left. 8 Exercise 1, after HC in the rear, twist the trunk right and exe- cute an outer following HC right and left forward twice at 3 and 4, HC wheel. Continue in 4 counts. 9 The same left. 10 Exercise 3, and add the last part of the eighth Exercise in 4 counts. 11 The same left. 12 Exercise 1, after HC in the rear execute the same in front of the shoulders at 3, and rear of the shoulders again at 4, in 4 counts. 13 The same left. 14 Wheel right sideways as in Exer- cise 1 at 1 and 2 ; twist the trunk right and outer following HC right and left forward at 3, in- ner following HC right and left at 4. Continue. 15 The same left. 16 The same outward. 11G GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 17 Exercise 1 at 1 and 2 ; following 19 All the following HC given in three quarters AC left and right this lesson at the right side, the sideways right at 3, following trunk twisted right, can also be horizontal HC right and left done backward at the left side, sideways right at 4. Continue. the trunk twisted left. 18 The same left. Many other and more difficult exercises may be developed from the foregoing, also combinations of movements having 4, 6, 8, 12, and 16 counts. DUMB-BELL EXERCISES 117 DUMB-BELL EXERCISES BY HENRY SUDER THE dumb-bell is an apparatus consisting of a short handle with two balls. It is turned of wood, about eleven inches long, the bell three inches in diameter, the handle four inches long, five-eighths inches thick, and its average weight is from one to two pounds. All that has been said about calisthenics must be repeated here, as nearly all free gymnastic exercises can be practised with the dumb-bells. In order not to repeat many exercises given under the title Free Gymnastics, the following dumb- bell exercises will consist of groups of movements in 2, 4, or more counts. GROUP I. PART 1. 1 Raise the arms forward. 9 Raise the arms sideways, and Begin! 1-2 bend the knees. 2 Bend the knees. Begin! 1-2 10 Raise the arms sideways upward. 3 Raise the arms forward, and bend 11 Rise on the toes. the knees. Begin! 1-2 12 Raise the arms sideways upward, 4 Raise the arms upward. and rise on the toes. 5 Rise on the toes. REMARKS. In raising forward and 6 Raise the arms upward, and rise upward, keep the knuckles out- on the toes. ward ; in raising sideways, the 7 Raise the arms sideways. knuckles upward. 8 Bend the knees. PART 2. The hands on the shoulders. 1 Bend the trunk forward, and 2 Bend the trunk backward, and straighten the arms downward. straighten the arms upward. Begin! 1-2 Begin 1 1-2 us GEBMAN-AMEltlCAN GYMNASTICS 3 Turn the trunk to the right, and straighten the arms forward (Fig. 80). 4 Turn the trunk to the left, and straighten the arms forward. Begin! 1-2 5 Bend the trunk sideways to the right, and straighten the arms sideways. Begin! 1-2 6 Bend the trunk sideways to the left, and straighten the arms sideways. Begin! 1-2 7 Turn the trunk to the right, bend forward, and straighten tin- aims backward. 8 Turn the trunk to the left, bend forward, and straighten the anus backward. 9 Turn the trunk to the right, bend backward, and straighten the arms sideways (Fig. 81). 10 Turn the trunk to the left, bend backward, and straighten the arms sideways. Fig. 80. Fig. 81. G R U P II. PART 1. 1 a. Raise the right arm forward and place the right leg forward. 6. Twist the right arm (knuckles upward) and raise and lower the right leg forward. c. Twist the right arm (knuckles outward) and raise and lower the right leg forward. d. Lower the arm and place the leg backward into position. Begin ! 1-4 The same exercise left. Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. With both arms and rise on the toes. As Exercise 1, but raise the arms sideways and place the leg sideways. ~\ As Exercises 1-4, but raise the > arms upward and place the leg ) backward. DUMB-BELL EXERCISES 119 PART 2. 1 a. Raise the right arm forward and place the right leg for- ward. 6. Move the right arm sideways and place the right leg side- ways. c. Move the right arm forward and place the right leg forward. d. Lower the arm and place the leg back into position. 2 The same exercise left. Begin! 1-4 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 With both arms and bent knees. 5 fAs Exercises 1-4, but raise the 6 J arms forward and upward and ' 1 place the leg forward and back- v ward. 9 fAs Exercises 1-4, but raise the 10 J arms sideways and upward and 11 1 place the leg sideways and I cross forward. GROUP III. PART 1. 1 Swing the right arm forward and place the right leg forward. 1-8 At the eighth count, bend both arms to thrust, and thrust the arms forward and rise on the toes. 9-16 At the sixteenth count lower the arms, and return the leg into po- sition. 1-16 2 As Exercise 1, but begin with the left arm. PART 2. As Exercise 1-2, but swing and thrust the arm or arms upward. As Exercise 1-2, but swing and thrust the arm or the arms side- ways. r As Exercise 1-2, but swing the arm or arms side- ways upward, and thrust up- ward. 1 Swing both arms forward. 1-8 At the eighth count place the hands on the shoulders, straighten the arms downward, and bend the trunk forward. 9-16 At the sixteenth count straighten the trunk. 1-16 2 As Exercise 1, but swing and straighten the arms upward, and bend the trunk backward (Fig. 82). 3 As Exercise 1, but swing and straighten the arms side- ways, and bend the trunk sideways right. 4 As Exercise 3, but bend the trunk to the left. 5 As Exercise 1, but swing the arms sideways upward, and straighten the arms upward, and turn the trunk to the right. 6 As Exercise 5, but turn the trunk to the left. Fig. 82. 120 < ; HUM . i .v-- 1 MKIIICA A r a y.\i \ . i > TH s GROUP IV PART 1. 1 o. Bend the knees, and place the dumb-bells on the floor inside of the knees. 6. Straighten the right leg back- ward (Fig. 83). c. Place the leg back into position. d. Straighten the knees. Begin! 1-4 2 As Exercise 1, but straighten the left leg. 3 As Exercise 1, but straighten both legs backward (front leaning rest). (Fig. 84.) Fig. 83. 4 As Exercise 1, but straighten the right leg backward, and raise the left arm forward. 5 As Exercise 4, but the left leg backward and the right arm for- ward. 6 As Exercise 3, but straddle the legs. Fig. 84. 7 As Exercise 1, but straighten the right leg forward. 8 As Exercise 1, but straighten the left leg forward. 9 As Exercise 3, but place the dumbbells outside of knees and straighten both legs forward (rear leaning rest). PART 2. 1 Fig. 85. a. Bend the knees, and place the dumb-bells on the floor inside of the knees. b. Straighten the left leg sideways (Fig. 85). c. Place the leg back into position. d. Straighten knees. Begin ! 1-4 2 As Exercise 1, but straighten the right leg. 3 As Exercise 1, but straighten the left leg and raise the left arm sideways. DUMB-BELL EXERCISES 121 4 As Exercise 1, but straighten the right leg and raise the right arm sideways. 5 As Exercise 1, but straighten the left leg sideways and raise the left arm upward. 6 As Exercise 1, but straighten the right leg sideways and raise the right arm upward. 7 As Exercise 1, but place the dumb- bells outside of the knees, and straighten the left leg forward, and raise the left arm forward. 8 As Exercise 7, but straighten the right leg forward and raise the right arm forward. 9 As Exercise 7, but straighten both legs forward (rear leaning-rest). Fig. 86. Fig. 87. GROUP V. PART 1. Arms to thrust. Cross straddle position (right leg forward). 1 Thrust the arms forward and bend the right knee. Begin ! 1-2 2 Thrust the arms forward and bend the left knee. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 9 4 Thrust the arms sideways and 10 bend the right knee. 5 Thrust the arms sideways and 11 bend the left knee. 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 12 7 Thrust the arms upward and bend the right knee (Fig. 86). 8 Thrust the arms upward and bend the left knee. Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. Thrust the arms backward and bend the right knee. Thrust the arms backward and bend the left knee. Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. 1-2-2 C Eli MA N-. 1 M /;/;/ r . 1 .V M ' .W .V . I > / / ' S PART 2. Sidestraddle position. 1 Thrust the arms downward, bend the trunk forward, and bend the right knee. Begin ! 1-2 2 Thrust the arms downward, bend the trunk forward, and bend the left knee. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 Thrust the arms sideways, bend the trunk to the right, and bend the right knee (Fig. 87). 5 Thrust the arms sideways, bend the trunk to the left, and bend the left knee. G Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 7 Thrust the arms backward, turn to the right, and bend the knee. 8 Thrust the arms backward, tiim to the left, and bend the left knee. 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 10 Thrust the arms upward, turn left and bend the trunk backward to the right, and bond the right knee. 11 Thrust the arms upward, turn right and bend the trunk back- ward to the left, and bend the left knee. 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. GKOUP VI. PART 1. Counter exercises. See Calisthenics. 1 Lunge forward obliquely outward and raise the outer arm forward obliquely upward, inner hand at the outer shoulder (elbow level with the shoulder). Begin ! 1-2 2 The same exercise inward. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 Lunge forward obliquely, outward and inward alternately, and bend the trunk forward in the same direction, and place the hands on the hips. 5 As Exercise 1, but sideways out- ward. 6 The same exercise inward. 7 Exercises 5 and (5 alternately. 8 As Exercise 4, but lunge sideways, outward ami inward alternately, and bend the trunk sideways. 9 As Exercise 1, but backward out- ward and raise the outer arm backward obliquely upward. 10 The same exercise inward. 11 Exercises 9 and 10 alternately. 12 As Exercise 4, but lunge backward obliquely, outward and inward alternately, and bend the trunk backward. PART 2. 1 Lunge forward obliquely outward and raise the arms forward obliquely upward. Begin ! 1-2 2 The same exercise inward. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 Lunge forward obliquely, outward and inward alternately, and bend the trunk sideways, outward and inward alternately, and place the hands on the shoulders. D UMB-BELL EXEB CISES As Exercise 1, but sideways out- ward and raise both arms up- ward obliquely outward. The same exercise inward. Exercises 5 and 6 alternately. As Exercise 4, but lunge sideways, outward and inward alternately, and bend the trunk forward. 9 As Exercise 1, but lunge backward obliquely, the arms backward obliquely. 10 The same exercise inward. 11 Exercises 9 and 10 alternately. 12 As Exercise 4, but lunge backward and bend the trunk backward. G K U P VII. PART 1. 1 a. Raise the arms to thrust and place the right leg forward. b. Thrust the arms forward, bend the right knee, and raise the left leg backward (Fig. 88). c. Bend the arms to thrust, straighten the knee and place the left leg back into position. d. Lower the arms and place the right leg back into position. Begin ! 1-4 2 The same exercise left. 3 As Exercise 1, but thrust sideways. 4 The same as 3, but left leg for- ward. 5 As Exercise 1, but the right leg backward, thrust upward, and raise the left leg forward. 6 As Exercise 5, but left leg back- ward. As Exercise 1, but thrust the arms sideways left and cross the left leg backward. As Exercise 7, but thrust the arms sideways right and cross the right leg backward. PART 2. 1 a. Raise the arms to thrust and place the right leg forward. 6. Thrust the arms downward, bend the right knee, bend the trunk forward, and raise the left leg backward. c. Bend the arms to thrust, straighten the knee and trunk, and lower the left leer. d. Lower the arms and place the leg back into position. 2 The same exercise left. 3 As Exercise 1, but place, thrust, and bend sideways right. 4 As Exercise 3, but place, thrust, and bend sideways left. 6 As Exercise 1, but place the right leg backward, thrust the arms up- 124 <;r.ll.M.\ .\-AMKIlH 'A \ <; VM. \AST1C8 ward, bend backward, and raise the left leg forward. 6 As Exercise 5, but place the left leg backward. 7 As Exercise 1, but thrust the arms sideways left, cross the left leg backward, and turn the trunk to the left. As Exercise 7, but thrust, cross, and turn the trunk to the right. GROUP VIII. PART 1. a. Raise the arms to thrust and bend the knees. b. Straighten the knees, and place the right leg forward, and raise the arms to cut. c. Lunge forward right and cut with the arms forward. d. Lower the arms and place the leg back into position. Berrin! 1-4 2 The same exercise left. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 As Exercise 1, but place, and lunge, sideways right and cut sideways. 5 As Exercise 4, but left. 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 7 As Exercise 1, but place, lunge right and cut backward. 8 As Exercise 7, but left. 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. PART 2. 1 a. Raise the arms to thrust and bend the knees. b. Lunge forward right and raise the arms to cut. c. Bend the trunk forward and cut the arms downward. d. Return to position. Begin! 1-4 2 The same exercise left. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 As Exercise 1, but sideways right and cut sideways. 5 As Exercise 4, but left. 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 7 As Exercise 1, but backward right,. and bend the trunk, and cut the arms backward. 8 As Exercises 7, but left. 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. GROUP IX. PART 1. 1 a. Lunge forward right and place the hands on the hips. b. One quarter turn left (on the heels), bend the left knee, and place the hands on the shoulders. c. One quarter turn right (on the heels), bend the right knee, and place the hands on the hips. d. Lower the arms and place the leg back into position. Begin! 1-4 2 As Exercise 1, but lunge left and one quarter turn right. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 As Exercise 1, but straighten the arms forward. 5 As Exercise 2, but straighten the arms forward. DUMB-BELL EXERCISES 125 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 7 As Exercise 1, but straighten the arms sideways. 8 As Exercise 2, but straighten the arms sideways. 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 10 As Exercise 1, but straighten the arms upward. 11 As Exercise 2, but straighten the arms upward. 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately. PART 2. 1 a. Lunge forward right, and raise the right arm forward obliquely upward, the left arm backward obliquely downward (Fig. 89). 6. One half turn left, and change the position of the arms (left obliquely upward, right obliquely downward). c. One half turn right, and change the position of the arms (right obliquely upward, left obliquely downward). d. Lower the arms, and place the leg back into position. 2 The same exercise left and one half turn right. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 As Exercise 1, but bend the right arm to a right angle to cover the head. 5 As Exercise 2, but bend the left arm to a right angle to cover the head. 6 Exercises 4 and 5 alternately. 7 As Exercise 1, but lunge sideways right and turn the trunk right. 8 As Exercise 2, but lunge sideways left and turn the trunk left. 9 Exercises 7 and 8 alternately. 10 As Exercise 4, but lunge sideways and turn the trunk right. Fig. 89. 11 As Exercise 2, but lunge sideways and turn the trunk left. 12 Exercises 10 and 11 alternately, GKOUP X. PART 1. 1 a. Raise the arms to thrust and lunge forward right, remain in position 2 counts. 6. One quarter turn left and thrust the arms forward, remain in position 2 counts. c. One quarter turn right and bend the arms to thrust, re- main in position 2 counts. d. Lower the arms and place the leg back into position, remain 2 counts. Begin ! 1-8 counts. 126 GERMAN-AMERICAN OTMNA8TK s 2 The same as Exercise 1, but lunge left and one quarter turn right. 3 As Exercise 1, but one count for each movement. 4 As Exercise 2, but one count for each movement. 5 As Exercise 1, but thrust the arms sideways. 6 As Exercise 2, but thrust the arms sideways. 7 As Exercise 3, but thrust the arms sideways. PART 8 As Exercise 4, but thrust the arms tideways. 9 As Exercise 1, but thrust the arms upward. 10 As Exercise 2, but thrust the arms upward. 11 As Exercise 3, but thru&t the arms upward. 12 As Exercise 4, but thrust the arms upward. 2. 1 a. Lunge forward right, and raise arms to thrust, remain in posi- tion 2 counts. b. One quarter turn left, bend trunk forward and thrust arms down- ward, remain in position 2 counts. c. Straighten the trunk, one quar- ter turn right, and raise arms to thrust, remain in position 2 counts. d. Lower arms and place the leg back, remain in position 2 counts. 1-8 counts. 2 The same exercise, but lunge for- ward left and one quarter turn right. 3 As Exercise 1, but one count for each movement. 4 As Exercise 2, but one count for each movement. 5 As Exercise 1, but lunge, rai-c arms to thrust, one quarter turn left and bend trunk sideways right and thrust the arms side- ways. 6 The same exercise, but lunge for- ward left, one quarter turn right. 7 As Exercise 5, but one ccunt for each movement. 8 As Exercise 6, but one count for each movement. 9 As Exercise 1, but one half turn left, and bend trunk backward and thrust the arms upward. 10 The same exercise, but lunge for- ward left and one half turn right. 11 As Exercise 9, but one count for each movement. 12 As Exercise 10, but one count for each movement. GROUP XI. PART 1. 1 a. Lunge forward right and raise the arms forward, remain in position 4 counts. b. Lunge sideways right and move the arms sideways right, re- main in position 4 counts. c. Lunge backward right and raise the arms upward, re- main in position 4 counts. d. Return to position, remain 4 counts. Begin ! 1-16 counts. 2 The same exercise left. DUMB I>ELL EXERCISES 127 3 As Exercise 1, but two counts for each movement. 4 As Exercise 2, but two counts for each movement. 5 a. As Exercise 1, but lunge for- ward, and raise the arms sideways right. 6. Lunge sideways right, and raise the arms upward. c. Lunge backward right, and lower the arms forward. d. Return to position. 6 The same exercise left. 7 As Exercise 5, but two counts for each movement. 8 As Exercise G, but two counts for each movement. 9 a. As Exercise 1, but lunge for- ward right, and raise the arms upward. b. Lunge sideways right, and lower the arms forward. c. Lunge backward, and move the arms sideways right. d. Return to position. 10 The same exercise left. 11 As Exercise 9, but two counts for each movement. 12 As Exercise 10, but two counts for each movement. GROUP XII. PART 1. Dissimilar Exercises. Divide the class into the first and second division. See Calisthenics. Arms to thrust. 1 First division lunge forward right, and thrust the arms forward. Begin ! 1-2 Second division lunge forward right, and thrust the arms sideways. 2 The same exercise, but lunge left. 3 As Exercise 1, but the first divis- ion executes the exercise of the second division, and vice versa. 4 The same exercise, but lunge left. 5 First division lunge forward right, and thrust the arms upward. Second division lunge forward right, and thrust the arms back- ward. 6 The same exercise, but lunge left. 7 As Exercise 5, but the first divis- ion executes the exercise of the second division, and vice versa. 8 The same exercise, but lunge left. 1 First division lunge forward right, bend trunk forward, and thrust the arms downward. Begin ! 1-2 Seconl division lunge backward right, bend the trunk backward, and thrust the arms upward. 2 The same exercise, but lunge left. PART 2. 3 As Exercise 1, but the first division executes the exercises of the sec- ond division, and vice versa. 4 The same exercise, but lunge left. 5 First division lunge sideways right, bend the trunk sideways right, and thrust the arms sideways. ll'S GERM A N-. 1 M Kit 1C AN G YMNAST1CS Second division lunge sideways, bright end the trunk forward, and thrust the arms sideways. The same exercise, but lunge left. 7 First division executes the exercises of the second division, and vice verm i. 8 The same exercise, but lunge left. PART 3. DIVIDE THE CLASS INTO CENTRE AND OUTEU DIVISIONS. 1 a. Centre division lunge forward right, and raise the arms for- ward, remain in position 4 counts. 6. Move the arms sideways and remain 4 counts. c. Move the arms forward and remain 4 counts. d. Return to position, 4 counts. 1-16 counts. Outer division lunge forward and raise the arms forward. b. Move the arms sideways. c. Move the arms forward. d. Return to position. Begin ! 1-4 2 The same exercise, but lunge for- ward left. 3 The centre division executes the exercises of the outer divisions, and vice versa. 4 The same exercise left. 5 The centre division as Exercise 1, but a. Lunge backward, and raise the arms sideways. b. Raise the arms upward. c. Lower the arms sideways. d. Return to position. 6 The same exercise, but lunge back- ward left. 7 The outer divisions execute the exercises of the centre division, and vice versa. 8 The same exercise, but lunge left. PART 4. DIVIDE THE CLASS INTO CENTRE AND OUTER DIVISIONS. 1 a. Centre division lunge forward right, and raise the arms for- ward, and remain in position four counts. 6. Centre division bend the trunk forward, remain in position four counts. c. Centre division straighten the trunk, and remain in position four counts. d. Return to fundamental position, remain four counts. 1-16 counts. 1 a. Outer divisions lunge sideways outward and raise the arms sideways. 6. Outer divisions bend the trunk sideways outward. c. Outer divisions straighten the trunk. d. Return to fundamental position. 1-16 counts. 2 The same exercise, but the centre division lunge forward left, and the outer divisions lunge sideways inward. 3 The centre division executes the exercises of the outer divisions to the right, and vice versa. 4 The same exercise, but the centre division to the left, and the outer divisions lunge forward left. D U MB -BELL EXERCISES 129 As Exercise 1. a. Centre division lunge backward right and raise the arms upward. 6. Bend the trunk backward and lower the arms sideways. c. Straighten the trunk and raise the arms upward. d. Return to position. 1-16 counts. As Exercise 1. a. Outer divisions lunge sideways outward and raise the arms sideways. b. Outer divisions turn the trunk outward and raise the arms upward. c. Outer divisions turn the trunk forward and lower the arms sideways. d. Return to position. 6 The same exercise, but the centre division lunge backward left, and the outer divisions lunge inward. 7 The centre division executes the exercise of the outer divisions to the right, and vice versa. 8 The same exercise, but the centre division to the left. 130 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTKJti EXERCISES WITH RINGS By DR. KARL ZAPP THESE exercises belong to light gymnastics, and permit of a great number of variations after the manner of free gym- nastics, dumb-bell and wand exercises, etc. The exercises with the rings offer combinations which are characteristic of these exercises. These are the combinations which result from the position of the participants, who are generally coupled together in pairs, either side by side, face to face, or back to back (Fig. 90). The class may also be arranged in groups of three (triangle), four (square or- ring), and . in a half-circle, circle, or lines composed of as many members as the room permits. With tactics and fancy steps beautiful and interesting combina- tions and Roundels (Reigeri) may be arranged. A combination of ring exercises, as well as any other combination of light gymnastics, should contain in proper alternation one or more groups of exercises for the most im- portant groups of muscles and the principal parts of the body. The following four groups may illustrate the principle : - Fig. 90. EXERCISES WITH RINGS 131 GROUP I. Leg Exercises. GROUP II. Step and Lunging Exercises. GROUP III. Trunk Exercises. GROUP IV. Balancing Exercises. GROUP I. contains the more strenuous exercises of the legs, such as the bending of knees, kneeling, etc. GROUP II., the different step-positions and their combina- tions. GROUP III. contains the bending and twisting of the trunk in all directions. GROUP IV. contains exercises in which the weight of the body is balanced on one foot, while the other leg is held in a certain position, or moved from one position into another. All four groups should be accompanied by suitable arm movements, making a special group of arm movements super- fluous. No strict line of demarcation need be kept between the different groups; the exercise of one group may be com- bined with a suitable exercise of any other group. The rings afford excellent opportunity for the so-called resting exercises. The rings are not necessarily indispensable, but afford a pleasant variation in the routine free gymnastics, and are especially appropriate for higher grades of misses' and ladies' classes. A. EXERCISES IN POSITION FACE TO FACE. GBOUP I. Leg and Arm Movements. 1 Kaising the heels in 2 counts, com- arms sideways upwards, or bend- bined with or alternating with ing of arms, or straightening of such arm exercises as raising of arms from a flexed position. 132 GEliMAN-AMEHICAN G YMNASTICS 2 Bending the knees (on the ball of the foot), half way (right angle), or as far as possible, quickly or slowly, combined with similar arm exercises ; care must be taken that the body is kept in an erect position. 3 The alternate raising of the heels and the bending of the knee with arm movements ; i. e., raise heels with arms in position sideways, 1 ; lower, 2 ; bend knees with arms upward, 3 ; position, 4. 4 Raising the heels and bending the knees interchained ; i. e., raise the heels and bend the arms, 1 ; bend the knees and straighten the arms sideways or upwards, 2 ; reverse, 3-4. 5 Each of the two partners performs a different exercise at the same time ; i. e., No. 1, raise the heels and bend the arms, and No. 2, bend the knees and straight- en the arms upward, 1 ; both re- turn to position, 2 ; Nos. 1 and 2 exchange exercises, 3-4. GROUP II. Step and Lunging Exercises. All the step and lunging exercises can be executed in this position except those directly forward. EXAMPLES : Also, step or lunge sideways extension of arms in the same direction or upward ; or step backward with the arms upward or cross steps forward or back- ward ; or lunge backward with extension of the arms forward. 2 In a step position raising of the heels (rising on the toes), or bend- ing of the knees ; i.e., step posi- tion left, obliquely forward, with bending of the arms, 1 ; rise on the toes with extension of arms upward, 2 ; reverse, 3-4 ; the same exercise right, 5-8. The rising on the toes may also be done several times in the same position before changing. 3 Step position backward left, arms sideways, 1 ; bend both knees, the arms upward, 2 ; reverse, 3-4 ; Fig. 91. From position arms bent : 1 Step position or lunge obliquely forward, with extending the same arm in the same direction, the other arm in the opposite direc- tion (Fig. 91). EXERCISES WITH RINGS 133 the same with step position of the right foot, 5-8. 3 Each of the two partners may per- form a different exercise at the same time. 4 Lunging (or charging) in the same or in the opposite direction, rock- ing of the knees, or kneeling. Example : a. Lunge obliquely forward left ex- tending the arms, 1 ; rock the knees (change extension of the legs) and bend the arms, 2 ; reverse, 3-4 ; the same right, 5-8. b. Lunge obliquely backward, the arms forward, 1 ; rock knees, the arms outward, 2 ; reverse, 3-4 ; the same right, 5-8. c. Lunge sideways left, the arms extended, 1 ; rock, and bend arms, etc., 2-8. d. Both lunge in one direction (one left, the other right). GROUP III. Trunk Movements. 1 Bending backward. This can be performed com- bined with raising of the arms outward or upward, also with step or lunging positions, i.e., Bend the trunk backward with step position obliquely forward left, and the arms sideways, 1 ; raise the arms upward, 2 ; re- verse, 3-4. 2 Bending forward and downward. These two movements can only be executed in an oblique direc- tion. They may be accompanied by arm and leg movements. Step position backward, 1 ; bend forward (hollow back), 2 ; reverse, 3^4. 3 Turning or twisting of the trunk. Performed in one direction, one turning left, the other right (forward or backward). Turning of the trunk may be combined with the various trunk and leg exercises, as : - Turn the trunk to the front with forward arm overhead and forward leg in cross step position backward. Turning of the trunk may also be combined with lunging. GROUP IV Balancing Exercises (Standing on One Foot). These exercises may be executed in a similar manner as the step position, i.e., 134 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS a. Raise the left leg and the arms d. Raise the left leg obliquely for- sideways, 1; lower, 2. ward, with the amis outward, 1 ; b. Raise the left knee and both arms move the left leg backward, the upward, 1 ; lower, 2. arm upward, 2; reverse, 3-4. c. Flex the left leg backward and the arms outward, 1 ; lower, 2. B. EXERCISES IN FRONT POSITION. The class may be arranged so that the members stand singh' holding ring in one hand ; or two are coupled together holding one ring between them ; or the entire rank may be joined together each holding with one hand the neighbor's ring. GROUP I. Leg Exercises. Rising on the toes and bending of the knees with all possi- ble variations are available, also the performance of different exercises by different individuals at the same time. GROUP II. Step and Lunging Exercises All movements except lunging directly sideways may be executed. If the members are standing alone, the ring may be moved from one hand to the other during an exercise ; i.e., Step or lunge obliquely sideways left ring overhead, 2 ; lunge or step with the arms and the ring ex- obliquely sideways right and the tended to the right, the ring in arms to the left, the ring in the the right hand, 1; close the heels, left hand, 3 ; position, 4. with the arms upward and the GROUP III. Trunk Movements. All the different movements backward, forward, downward, and sideways may be performed. EXERCISES WITH RINGS 135 GROUP IV. Balancing Exercises. See exercises in position Face to Face. C. EXERCISES IN POSITION BACK TO BACK. GROUP I. Leg Exercises. In this position, bending of the knees is not very practica- ble, as partners are usually in too close proximity. Rising on the toes, combined with the arm movements, is available. GROUP II. Step and Lunging Exercises. These exercises may be practised as in the position face to face, and with all possible variations. GROUP III. Trunk Exercises. Trunk exercises are also limited in this position, being restricted principally to bending sideways, twisting, and a slight bending backward in an oblique direction. GROUP IV. Balancing Exercises. These allow of about as much variety as in the position face to face. 136 GERMAN- AMERICAN GYMNASTICS FANCY STEPS Bv CHRISTIAN EBERHABD THESE exercises, while mainly intended for misses or ladies, may also be practised to advantage by young boys. The exer- cises have a tendency toward the development of grace, a good and erect bearing or carriage, and will be found admirable for the development of the respiratory organs. Children usually delight in work of this kind, and these movements will prove valuable to enliven and cheer up an otherwise indifferent or dull class. LESSON i. The pupils are ranged in single file, and march around the hall. It is advisable to change the direction in which the pupils are marching several times during each lesson. The hands are placed on the hips, or the arms crossed backward. 1 Follow (or lock) step left forward. (The left foot advances a moder- ate pace, the right foot follows, and the fundamental position is resumed ; i.e., the heels are locked.) 2 Follow step right forward. (The right foot advances and the left foot follows. ) 3 Follow step left and right alter- nately. (Let it here be under- stood that, if no command to the contrary is given, the al- ternate movement is always meant. ) Follow step with raising the knees forward. (The knee of the strid- ing leg is raised forward at a right angle, the toes extended downward.) Follow step with swinging (quickly raising and lowering) the legs forward. Follow step with raising the heels backward. Follow step with raising the heels in front. (In front of the op- posite leg.) (Fig. 92.) Follow step obliquely forward. (Instead of striding straight for- FANCY STEPS 137 10 ward, stride in an oblique diag- onal direction.) Follow step forward and sideways alternately. (After executing one step forward left and right, execute one follow step sideways left and right.) Skip left forward. Galop. (In- stead of locking the heels, in this exercise, the toes of the right foot are placed against the heels of the left foot.) 11 Skip right forward. 12 Skip left and right forward alter- nately. 13 Skip left sideways (after the class has faced to the right). 14 Skip right sideways (after the class has faced to the left). Fig. 92. M* V ><* V Fig. 93. Fig. 93 b. LESSON 2. 1 Change step (Fig. 93). (The left foot advances, the right foot fol- lows in such a manner that the toes of the right foot are placed in about a right angle against the heel of the left foot ; then the left foot advances again. After this, the right foot advances, the left foot follows against the heel of the right foot, etc. 2 \ Change step, with the leg rnove- * \ ments as in Exercises 4, 5, 6, and 5' 7 of Lesson 1. 6 Change step left and right ob- liquely forward. 7 Change step with turning (facing) right and left. 8 Change step with turning (facing) left and right. 9 Double change step (schottische step). (The left foot advances twice in succession and the right foot follows twice, after which the left foot advances a third time. Then the right foot advances as the left did.) 10 Double change step with turning right and left. (The movement is now sideways. The turn is ex- ecuted on the ball of the foot.) 1QQ OO i; /;/,- .u AN-A M r.i;i< '. I .v <: YMNA N TI< '8 Polka step. (Same as the change step, only executed with three light hops, the most vigorous of which is done ou the first count.) Polka step with leg movements and variations, as in Exercises 2, 3, 4, 5, (>, 7, and 8 in Lesson 2. Li: S3 ON 3. 9 Galop step forward four steps (hops) with each foot. 10 Galop step left and right side- ways. (The first turn is to the right, four hops each way. ) LESSON 4. 1 Touch step. (The toes of the strid- ing leg touch the floor gently at a distance somewhat less than one half of an ordinary pace ; after the touch, the stride is com- pleted. ) 2 Touch step with hending the oppo- site knee. (When the left foot touches, the right knee bends.) 3 Touch step with crossing the feet in front. (The feet are crossed during the touch only.) 4 Touch step with crossing the feet in front and bending the opposite knee. 5 Double touch step. (The toes touch twice, after which the stride is finished.) 6 Double touch step, with crossing the feet at the second touch. 7 Double touch step, with crossing the feet as in Exercise 6, and bending the opposite knee dur- ing the second touch. 8 Double touch step, front and rear. (The first touch in front, the second after moving the striding leg slightly backward.) 9 The same as Exercise 8, with bend- ing the opposite knee during the touch in front. 10 The same as Exercise 8, with bending the opposite knee dur- ing the touch in the rear LESSON 5. 1 Double touch and change step. (Two touches and then change step as in Lesson 2.) 2-\ 3 Double touch and change step with 4 v variations, as in Exercises 6, 7, 5 8, 9, and 10 of Lesson 4. 6J 7 Double touch and polka step. (The same variations can also be used here again. ) 8 Heel and toe polka. (Double touch and polka, but instead of touch- ing both times w r ith the toes, the heel is touched on the floor in the first count, and the toe in the second count, with the feet crossed in front, while simul- taneously with each touch there is a slight hop on the other foot. ) 9 The same as 8, with touching the heel in front and the toe in the rear. 10 Double polka. Similar to Exer- cise 8, but instead of touchin- FANCY STEPS 139 the heel and the toe, the striding leg is swung obliquely forward during the first hop, and crossed in front of the other with heel raised backward during the sec- ond hop, after which the polka step follows. LESSON 6. For this lesson the pupils are ranged in a column of twos (in couples or pairs). The inner hands are joined and raised to shoulder height, the outer hands are placed on the hips. The pupils to the left begin with the left, those to the right with the right, foot. 1 Change step. 2 The same as in 1, but obliquely for- ward (with opening and closing the ranks). 3 Polka step obliquely forward, etc. 4 Polka step obliquely forward, with facing toward and away from each other. 5 Polka step forward and obliquely forward alternately. 6 Polka step forward and sideways alternately (without and with facing (turning) toward and away from each other). 7 Galop step, four steps each way obliquely forward (with opening and closing the ranks). 8 Galop step sideways (with facing toward and turning away from each other). 9 Schottische step, obliquely for- ward. 10 Schottische step, with turning as in Exercise 8. LESSON 7. Follow step with rising on the toes (with balancing). Rocking step. (Step forward left and throw the weight of the body onto the left leg, slightly raising the right foot off the floor ; at 2, rock back onto the right foot, slightly raising the left foot off the floor ; at 3, the left foot is placed on the floor as in an ordi- nary step or stride. Then the right foot is placed forward for the forward rock, etc.) Rocking step, with rocking the trunk forward and backM-ard, the free leg is kept in a line with the trunk. For this exercise the arms should be locked (arms crossed and the hands grasped). (Fig. 94. ) 4 Cross balance step. The left leg takes a moderate pace obliquely forward to the left, then the right foot is crossed in front of the left, at the same time balancing (rising on the toes and very slightly raising the left foot off the floor) ; in the third measure the feet (body) settle down again. Then the right leg strides oblique- ly forward to the right, etc. 140 a /;/,' MAN-AMERICAN G FMNASTICS This is best practised first in single file, with the hands upon the hips. 5 Cross balance step, with swinging left and right arm in a half circle overhead. 6 Cross balance step, with bending the trunk sideways right and left. 7 Cross balance step, with bending the trunk sideways right and left, and swinging the left and right arm in a half circle over- head (Fig. 95) 8 The same as Exercise 7, but with swinging both arms sideways to a circle overhead (Fig. 90). The same as Exercise 7, but swing both arms sideways to the left and right. (As the trunk is bent sideways, the arms should point obliquely upward in a line with the shoulders.) 10 Cross balance hop. Like Exer- cise 4, with a light hop on tin- first count. (Spring from the right onto the left foot.) Fig. 94 a. Fig. 94 b. LESSON 8. 1 Waltz hop. Two hops on each foot, the free (unoccupied) leg extended backward. 2 Waltz hop, the free leg extended sideways. 3 Waltz hop, the free leg extended forward. 4 Waltz hop, with swinging the free leg obliquely forward in front of the other leg (crossing legs for- ward). 5 The same as Exercise 4, with slid- ing the swinging leg over the floor during the first part of the swing. The same as Exercise 4, with rais- ing the heel in front and extend- ing the leg downward. Kocking hop. While hopping for- ward twice on the left foot, swing the right leg backward and bend the trunk forward, then the right foot comes up to where the left foot had been, the right foot ap- parently striking the left away ; and while hopping forward twice FANCY STEPS 141 on the right foot, the left leg is swung forward and the trunk bent backward. 8 The same as Exercise 7, but ad- vancing with the right leg. /"The same as Exercise 7 or 8, 9 I but backward instead of for- 10 | ward (retreating instead of ad- \. vancing). Exercises 7, 8, and 9 are best ex- ecuted in a column of twos, or fours, etc. They will also make an excellent impression if exe- cuted in a front line, the whole class advancing or retreating in one line, the arms locked for- ward or backward. Fig. 95. Fig. 96. LESSON 0. MAZURKA STEP. The pupils are ranged in twos. 1 The pupils face each other, the hands on each other's shoul- ders. Mazurka step sideways (around the hall). In the first measure the left (or right) foot steps sideways, in the second measure the right (or left) foot hops up and appar- ently strikes away the left (or right) foot, and this left (or right) foot swings sideways ; in the third measure another hop follows on the right (or left) foot and the free left (or right) leg swings sideways, slightly bent, in front of the hopping leg. (The exercise is thus : step, hop, hop. ) The same foot advances all the time. 2 The same as Exercise 1, but around the hall the other way. After changing places, those formerly on the inside are now on the outside. 3 Mazurka step sideways across the hall (best done in single file). 142 GERMAN-AMERICA* QTM \ A8TH 8 4 Mazurka step forward, the left foot advancing. 5 Mazurka step forward, the right foot advancing. ' M;i/urka step forward, left and right alternately. In order to be able to alternate, the exercise must be executed in four meas- ures (if the left foot began, this same foot is placed down on the floor in the fourth measure), and the exercise is now : Step, hop, hop, step. 7 Polka mazurka step (mazurka step as in 4, followed by tin- polka step). 8 Polka mazurka step, with one half turn of the couples (or twos). The turn to be contin- uously in the same direction. 9 The same as 8, with the tuni in the opposite direction. 10 The same as Exercise 8, with turning alternately left and right. LESSON 10. Exercises 19 in single file. Exercises 1-6 Inclusive mav also be done in a front line. 1 Cross step twirl with one half turn in 5 measures. Two ordinary steps (or paces) forward ; in the third measure cross the left foot in front of the right ; in fourth measure turn right about on the balls of the feet ; in fifth meas- ure turn back again in the same manner. 2 The same as 1 , beginning with the right foot. 3 Cross step twirl with one half turn in 4 measures. Similar to Exer- cise 1, taking but one step for- ward, crossing the feet in the sec- ond measure, etc. The turn is now alternately left and right about. 4 Cross step twirl in 6 measures. The same as 3, with three steps forward instead of one. 5 Cross step twirl with full (four quarter) turn in 5 measures. Ex- ecuted as follows : Three steps forward, cross the right foot in front of the left in the fourth measure, and turn completely around on the balls of the feet in the fifth measure. (The turn is to the left. ) 6 The same as 5, beginning with the right foot. (The turn is now to the right. ) 7 Stride twirl in four measures. Three steps forward, in fourth measure execute a full turn to the right (four quarter turn) on the ball of the left foot, swinging right leg in a half circle to the right (around the left leg). 8 The same as Exercise 7, but begin- ning with the right foot. ( The turn is now to the left. ) 9 Stride twirl in 3 measures. Take two steps forward instead of three ; the turn is now alter- nately left and right. 10 In couples, or column of twos with the arms locked. The same as Exercise 1 ; those on the in- side (to the left) beginning with the left foot, those on the outside (to the right) beginning with tin 1 right foot. (The arms remain locked. ) FANCY STEPS LESSON 11. IN A COLUMN OF Twos. The inner hands are joined and raised to shoulder height, the outer hands are placed on the ht2)s. \ March and polka alternately, 8 measures for each movement. (Eight paces forward and 4 polka steps forward.) 2 March and galop forward alter- nately, 8 measures each. 3 Polka and galop forward alter- nately, 8 measures each. 4 Galop and heel and toe polka for- ward alternately, 8 measures each. 5 Beginning with the feet on the outer side (those to the left with the left foot, those to the right with the right foot), march for- ward and galop sideways. Dur- ing the first 4 galop steps, facing toward each other, the hands joined and raised shoulder height, during the next 4 galop steps facing away from each other. 6 Beginning with the feet on the outer side as in 5, polka for- ward and galop sideways. 7 Beginning with the feet on the outer side, as in Exercise 5, heel and toe polka forward and galop sideways. S Beginning with the feet on the outer side, as in Exercise 5, double polka with opening and closing the ranks, and galop side- ways. 9 Beginning with the feet on the outer side, inarch forward 8 paces, and polka, holding the partner, and turning a half turn to each polka step as in dancing 8 measures. 10 Holding the partner as in dan- cing ; heel and toe polka with half turns 8 measures, and 8 galop steps, with a half turn after the fourth step. LESSON 12. 1 Cross step hop in 4 measures, as follows : two ordinary steps for- ward (beginning with the left foot) ; in the third measure cross the left foot in front of the right foot ; and in the fourth measure hop once on both feet. 2 The same as Exercise 1, but begin- ning with the right foot. 3 Cross step hop in 3 measures. One step forward, cross the feet in the second, and hop in the third measure. (An odd number of counts or measures alternates the exercise left and right. ) 4 Cross balance hop. (Similar to cross balance step of Lesson 7. ) Instead of a step left obliquely forward in the first measure, spring from the right foot, at the same time swinging the left leg obliquely forward, and then land- ing on the left foot. The second and third measures are the same as in the cross balance step, only livelier. 5 A combination of change step and cross balance step. 6 Change step and cross step hop (see Exercise 1). After the 144 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNA8T1CS change step, cross the right foot in front of the left in the fourth, and hop on both feet in the fifth measure. 7 Cross balance step and cross step hop. 6 measures. (The cross balance step is to the left, the cross step hop to the right.) 8 Mazurka step and cross balance step. 6 measures. (During the first 6 measures left forward, during the next 6 measures right forward. ) Mazurka step and cross step hop. 6 measures. (As in Exercise 8, the first 6 measures left forward, the next 6 measures right forward. ) 10 Cross balance step and a full turn cross twirl. 6 measures. (The first balance step to the left, the cross twirl to the right ; the next balance step to the right, and the cross twirl to the left, etc.) Many of the exercises of these twelve lessons may be varied (as partly exemplified in Lesson 6) by opening and closing the ranks of two, by changing places with each other, by having one pupil circle around the other, while this one marks time, etc. Appropriate arm, trunk, head, and leg exercises or combina- tions of these may be executed with many of the steps. FOUR LESSONS FOR PUPILS ARRANGED IN OPEN ORDER. (AS FOR I"REE EXERCISES.) LE SSON 1. The hands upon the hips. 1 Follow step sideways left and right with balancing on the toes. 2 The same as Exercise 1, with swinging the arms sideways in a circle overhead (Fig. 97). 3 Two hops alternately on each foot, raising the free leg backward (waltz hopping). See Lesson 8. 4 The same as Exercise 3, raising or swinging the free leg sideways. 5 The same as Exercise 3, swinging the free leg forward. G The same as Exercise 3, swinging the free leg obliquely inward (crossing in front of the other leg, also with sliding the foot over the floor). 7 The same as Exercise 6, with bend- ing the trunk sideways and swing- ing one arm in a half circle over- FANCY STEPS 145 head (if bending to the right swing the left arm, and reverse). 8 Cross step twirl with a half turn in 4 measures side- ways left and right alternately. (Sidestep left, cross the right foot in front of the left, turn left about on the balls of the feet.) See Exercises 1 and 3, Lesson 10. 9 The same as 8, with arm exercises : (for example, place the hands on the shoulders, while crossing the feet; raise the arms in a circle overhead, while turn- ing about; the hands again on the shoulders, while turning back ; and, finally, the hands on the hips) (Fig. 97). 10 The same as Exercise 8, adding a hop on both feet after turning to the front in the fourth measure and while the feet are still crossed, thus executing the whole exercise in 5 measures. LESSON 2. Fig. 97. 1 Cross balance step sideways left and right (see Lesson 7). 2 Cross balance step with swinging one arm in a half circle over- head. 3 Cross balance step sideways with bending the trunk sideways. 4 Cross balance step, with bending the trunk sideways and swinging one arm in a half circle overhead. 5 The same as in Exercise 3, and swinging both arms in a circle overhead. 6 Exercises 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 toward each other and away from one another (inward and outward). 7 Change step and cross balance step sideways left and right. (Execute one change step to the left in three measures, cross the feet in the fourth, and balance in the fifth measure.) 8 The same as Exercise 7, with arm exercises as follows : During the change step sideways to the left, raise both arms sideways to the left ; and during the re- mainder of the exercise continue the movement with the arms in the same direction upward, and curve them to a circle overhead. 9 Polka step and cross balance step sideways left and right. 10 The same as Exercise 9, toward each other, etc. Also with arm exercises, as in Exercise 8, add- ing a bending of the trunk side- ways, etc. LESSON 3. Mazurka step sideways left. (Any 2 The same as Exercise 1, sideways stated number of steps. For three to the right, mazurka steps the counting will 3 One mazurka step sideways left be: 1,2,3; 1,2,3; 1,2,3,4.) with waltz turn. (The class has 140 (', I: /,'.)/. I .Y-. I M A./.'/' . I .V y.\l .V . I S 77' > now moved about two paces to the left and is facing the other way. After a second mazurka step and waltz turn to the left the class is back in place, and facing as at first.) 4 Tho same as Exercise 3, to the right. 5 Mazurka step and cross balance step sideways left and right. 6 The same as Exercise 5, obliquely inward (toward each other), and outward in such a manner, that, during the balance, files one and two form one file, and files three and four another file, etc. (Fig. 98). 7 Stride twirl sideways left and right with two consecutive half turns in the same direction. The ex- ercise is executed as follows : In the first measure the left foot is placed sideways to the left ; in the second measure a half turn 10 left is executed on the ball of the left foot, while the right leg describes a half circle forward around the left leg ; in tin- third measure a half turn is executed on the ball of the right foot, while the left describes a half circle backward around tin; right ; in the fourth measure the heels are locked (Fig. 99). The same as Exercise 7, to the right. The same as Exercise 7, inward and outward (either the odd or the even files should now be one pace farther forward than the others), with crossing over or changing places of the files. (File two crosses over to where file one has been, and file one to where file two has been, and back to places again.) The same as Exercise 9, but be- ginning in the opposite direction. / \ Fig. 99. \ LESSON 4. Stride twirl and cross balance step sideways left and right. (The stride twirl, as before, but in the fourth measure the right foot crosses in front of the left foot, and in the fifth measure the bal- ance follows.) The same as Exercise 1, inward and outward (with crossing over and changing places as in Exer- cise 9 of the third lesson). 3 The same as Exercise 2, beginning in the opposite direction. 4 The same as Exercise 1, with a hopping movement. (Hop twirl and balance hop.) 5 The same as Exercise 2, with a hopping movement. (Hop twirl and balance hop.) 6 Cross balance step and cross twirl with a full turn. (After execut- ing the cross balance step to the FANCY STEPS 147 left, place the right foot side- ways to the right, cross the left in front of the right, and execute a complete circle to the right on the balls of both feet. Next the right foot begins the cross bal- ance, etc.) 7 Cross twirl and cross balance step. (The same as Exercise 6, only beginning with a full turn.) 8 Mazurka, stride twirl (two half turns), and cross balance step sideways left and right. 9 The same as Exercise 8, inward and outward (crossing over in the files). 10 The same as Exercise 9, but be- ginning in the opposite direc- tion. 148 GERM A N- AM ERIC AN G YMNA S TICS HORIZONTAL BAR BY F. W. FKOEHLICH THE exercises are arranged in three grades of four lessons each. ABBREVIATIONS OF TERMS USED. Sidestand . . SS Frontsidestand . FSS Rearsidestand . RSS Crossstand . . CS Leftcrossstand . LCS Rightcrossstand, RCS Handhang . . HH Elbowhang . . EH Shoulderhang . ShH Bentarmhang . BAH Overbold ... OH Underhold . . UH Twistunderhold, TUB Stand directly under the bar, the bar and a line drawn through the shoulders run parallel. Facing the bar, a distance of one, two, or more feet between the body and a vertical line drawn through the bar. Facing from the bar, at a distance same as FSS. Stand directly under the bar, a line drawn through the shoulders runs at right angles to the bar. A CS with the left flank toward the bar at a distance varying as in FSS. A CS with the right flank toward the bar at a distance varying as in FSS. The body hanging suspended from the bar by means of the hands ; the legs together, the toes downward. The bent arm over the bar forward, the hand down- ward, clinched. The bent arms over the bar forward, the hands close together. The arms bent to an acute angle, the shoulders close to the bar. Handhanj, the hands width of shoulders apart, the back of the hands toward the rear, thumbs inward and under the bar. The back of the hands toward the front, the thumbs outward and under the bar. Raise the arms sideways, thumbs downward, palms toward the rear; Raise the arms up toward the bar ; in this position take hold, the back of the hand toward the front, little fingers inward. HORIZONTAL BAB 149 Frontrest . . FR The body is supported by means of the arms, the bar in front, the hands OH or UH, and width of the shoulders apart. The body rests against the bar at the thighs, the legs together, the toes downward, the chest forward, and the back arched. Rearrest . . . RR Similar to the FR, with the bar in the rear of the body. Sidehang . . SH See sidestand. Crosshang . . CH See crossstand. Bentarmrest . BAR See FR and RR, but the arms bent. Jumpoff ... JO After finishing an exercise, jump off, landing on the feet, bend the knees to an angle and raise the arms forward, then change to the fundamental position. GRADE I. LESSON I. HIGH BAR. The bar should be at such a height from the floor, that the person exercis- ing can do a HH and have his toes from three to six inches from the floor. SS. Jump into 1 The HH; OH ; JO ; repeat several times. 2 As Exercise 1, with UH ; also 1 and 2 alternately. 3 As Exercise 1, with TUH. 4 SS at the left end of the bar, jump to HH ; OH ; travel sideways right by moving the right hand four or five inches sideways, following with the left ; JO. 5 The same opposite. 6 As Exercises 4 and 5 with UH ; also with TUH. 7 As Exercises 4 and 5 in a BAH with UH ; also with OH. 8 As Exercise 4, moving both hands simultaneously, bending the arms slightly immediately before the change. 9 As Exercise 8, with UH ; also in a BAH. 10 A HH ; OH ; change the right hand to UH ; also left hand ; change right hand back to UH ; also the left hand ; repeat several times ; JO. 11 As Exercise 10, changing both hands simultaneously to UH, bending the arms just before the change. 12 A HH ; OH ; raise the right knee forward and lower in 2 counts ; the same left (Fig. 100). Fig. 100. GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNAST1C8 18 As Exercise 12, alternately in 4 counts. 14 As Exercise 12, raising both knees forward and lower. Fig. 101. 15 As Exercises 12, 13, and 14 in a BAH, with OH or UH, raising the straight legs forward (Fig. 101). 10 Bend and straighten the anus as often as possible, first with UH, then with OH. 17 At the right end of the bar HH ; OH ; travel left sideways with a half turn left and right alter- nately. EXPLANATION. The right shoulder moves forward ; the right hand takes OH on the opposite side of the bar, the left hand retains UH ; then the same left for- ward. 18 At the right end of the bar, UH ; travel left sideways with a half turn backward. Continue changing from UH to OH alter- nately. LESSON 2. HIGH BAR. 1 Crosshang, right and left hand in OH ; on the opposite sides of the bar ; bend the arms ; raise the right leg forward, throwing it over the bar from the right side into a crosskneehang ; the arms extended ; the left leg and body parallel with the bar, change to CH, and JO. 2 The same left. 3 As Exercise 1, changing to EH right and place the left hand on the hip (Fig. 102); back to knee- hang and CH, and JO. 4 The same left ; execute the change from the kneehang to CH several times. 5 As Exercises 3 and 4 alternately. 6 HH and OH shortswing forward and backward from four to eight times; JO. EXPLANATION. The body remains under the bar ; swing the legs forward and backward alternate- ly ; with the backward swing arch the back well, throwing the chest forward, and bending the arms slightly ; jump off with the backwardswing. 7 HH ; OH ; shortswing forward, back- ward and forward, and then turn over backward into a squatdrop- hang, the soles of the feet against the bar, the knees and hips flexed between the hands ; turn forward into HH ; JO. 8 As Exercise 7, and turn over back- ward into the rearhang ; JO. EXPLANATION. The knees ex- tended, the hips flexed. 9 As Exercise 7, and inner side- kneehang right ; change to squat- HORIZONTAL BAR 151 drophang ; to HH ; and JO. See Exercise 1. EXPLANATION. Squat through right, throwing the leg over the bar forward ; extend the left leg forward in a line with the trunk, the arms straight (Fig. 103). 10 The same left. 11 The same as Exercise 9, with the outer-kneehang right. 12 The same left. 13 As Exercise 9, and swing the left leg upward and downward, flexing the left hip ; stop the Fig. 102. swing, turn backward, squat- ting through left backward into the rearhang ; JO. The same left. As Exercise 13, and innerknee- backward into kneehang ; squat forward into the HH, and JO. 16 The same left. 17 As Exercises 15 and 16, with out- erkneeswingup forward. swingup right forward ; drop 18 As Exercise 15, and kneewheel Fig. 103. right backward ; and drop into the kneehang right ; turn back- ward into the rearhang ; JO. EXPLANATION. One and one-quar- ter circle backward. 19 The same left. 20 As Exercises 18 and 19, with outer- kneewheel backward. 21 As Exercises IS, 19, and 20, with- out dropping backward into the kneehang (in one swing) ; change both hands to UH ; turn over or drop forward into the kneehang ; to HH, and JO. P. S. If necessary, all the kneehangs and kneeupswings can be taken through more thoroughly on the low bar. 152 < ; KKMA N- AM ERIC A .v >.y MVAS TICS LESSON 3. Low BAK. Ueiyht of the shoulders. I FSS ; OH ; jump into FR ; half circle with the right leg for- ward, inward (Fig. 104) ; half circle backward, outward ; JO. EXPLANATION. The right leg de- scribes one half circle forward over the bar, passing under the right hand, which should be re- placed, the body supported by means of the hands ; the right leg extended downward. 2 The same left. 3 As Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. Fig. 104. 4 As Exercise 1, but half circle with the right leg backward inward into the FR. EXPLANATION. The right leg passes backward under the left hand. 5 The same left. G FSS ; OH ; jump into the FR; a half circle with the right leg for- ward; outward and a half circle backward inward ; JO- EXPLANATION. In the half circle forward the right leg passes un- der the left hand. Fig. 105. 7 The same left. 8 FSS; OH ; jump into the FR; half circle with the right leg forward inward ; crotchwheel backward several times, half circle with the right leg backward, and JO- 9 The same left. 10 As Exercise 8, but from a FSS jump and at the same time half circle with the right leg forward, outward ; change to UH, and crotchwheel forward. HORIZONTAL BAR 153 11 As Exercise 8 ; after half circle forward a quarter turn left, both Fig. 106. hands in front of the body in outerhold ; crotchwheel side- ways left or right. EXPLANATION. For the crotch- wheel right sideways the left hand should be in front of the right, and vice versa. 12 Innerkneehang left ; throw the right arm forward over the bar ; into the SH; right ; and wheel backward. 13 The same opposite also with hands close together. 14 RSS. Throw the arms over the bar, the forearms under and for- ward ; the hands pressed against the chest, and swing forward and backward in the rear upperarm- hang (Fig. 105). 15 As Exercise 14, with upperarin- . wheel forward. 16 FSS; OH ; frontswingup back- ward into the FR; JO backward (Fig. 106). EXPLANATION. The legs swing over the bar, at the same time bring the hips against the bar, flexed ; then, by means of the arms and a straightening of the hips, raise the body into FR. 17 Frontswingup backward ; swing the legs forward under the bar, bending the arms slightly ; then swing backward ; the body free from the bar into the free FR; JO. As Exercise 17, and a fronthip- wheel backward ; JO. EXPLANATION. With the forward swing execute a complete turn backward around the bar at the moment when the hips touch the bar. 19 Frontswingup backward ; half circle with the right leg forward ; inward ; the same left into the RR, OH. Sittingwheel backward (see kneewheel backward). 18 Fig. 107. 20 As Exercise 19, but with one leg or both legs outside of the hands. 154 GERMAN-AMERICAN <. VMNASTH 8 Jil. Turn over backward into the nesthang several times. Also with extending one leg back- ward (Fig. 107). KXI-I.AN ;.\ ; ION. The toes a-uin-t the bar, the knees and the body pressed through backward.-. tl><- back well arched, the head up. P. S. After learning the exercises of this lesson thoroughly, take them on. the bur raised a few feet higher. LESSON 4. HK.II BAR. 1 Side HH ; OH ; longswing forward and backward ; JO. EXPLANATION. Bend the arms, raise the legs forward, the feet above the bar ; then extend the hips and anus, throw the chest forward; arch the back well, at the same time pushing the body as far as possible. Then swing backward, renewing the hold by slightly moving the hands over the bar at the beginning of the forward swing. Repeat several times, and jump off with the backwardswing. 2 Longswing, and raise the left hand at the end of each back- wardswing, replacing it immedi- ately. The same right and alter- nately ; JO. 3 As Exercise 2, raising both hands simultaneously. 4 At the left end of the bar, long- swing and travel sideways right. Move the right hand first, follow- ing with the left at the end of the backwardswing. 5 The same opposite. 6 As Exercise 4, moving both hands simultaneously. 7 The same opposite. 8 Longswing, and raise the knees in forwardswing; also spread the legs in forward and backwardswing. HH; UH ; longswing, change right and left hand to OH ; at the end of the backwardswing ; also both hands simultaneously. 10 HH; OH ; longswing, at the end of the forwardswing change to an outerkneehang right ; to HH; JO- 11 The same left. 12 As Exercise 10, changing to a squatdrophang ; turn backward into a rearhang ; JO. 13 As Exercise 10, changing to an innerkneehang right ; to a HH, and JO. 14 The same left. 15 HH ; OH ; longswing, with the backwardswing change to EH right ; to HH, and JO. 16 The same left. 17 As Exercise 15, but from EH to SH ; then HH and JO. 18 The same left. 19 As Exercise 17, with both arms EH, then to upperarmhang, fore- arms crossed, the hands OH ; back to HH; JO. 20 Shortswing and half turn back- ward into a squatdrophang ; ex- tend the legs upward in front of the bar to a frontdrophang : bend the arms and pullup back- ward into the FR ; lower back- ward slowly to HH, and JO. HORIZONTAL BAR 155 21 UH frontpullup backward into the FR; OH ; lower backward to HH, and JO. EXPLANATION. Similar to Exercise 20, but without the swing and squatdrophang, the knees ex- tended. 22 As Exercise 20, turning forward into a squatdrophang ; to HH, and JO. 23 HH, OH ; shortswing forward, backward and forward with a jerkup forward to a BAR right (Fig. 108); lower to HH, and JO. 24 The same left. 25 As Exercise 23, pushing left into the FR ; turn forward, the hips flexed, until the toes touch the bar ; lower with extended legs to HH, and JO, 26 The same left. 27 As Exercise 25, to FR ; men f ront- Fig. 108. hipwheel backward, and finish as in Exercise 25. GRADE II. LESSON 1. Low BAB. Shoulder height. 1 At the left end of the bar FR ; OH ; travel sideways right moving both hands simultaneously (hopping). The same left. 2 FR as in Exercise 1 ; a half circle with the right leg forward out- ward; the legs in the crossstrad- dle position between the hands ; travel as in Exercise 1. The same left. 3 As Exercise 2 ; stop in the middle of the bar ; crotchwheel back- ward ; one half circle left forward, and with one quarter turn right JO- 4 The same left ; also forward right and left. 5 FR; OH; one half circle right for- ward inward ; left forward in- ward into the RR; UH; lower to a rear BAR ; swing the body for- ward and backward ; stop and lower the body to rearhang (RH) JO- 6. RSS ; throw both arms over the bar backward, forearms under the bar, and the hands pressed against the chest ; the body hang- ing on the upper arms (rear upperarmhang) ; swing and rear upperarmwheel forward : JO. 7 As Exercise 5, lowering into a rear upperarmhang and wheel as in Exercise 6. 150 GERMAN-AMEHK . I A <.Y M A . 1 STIC 8 8 As Exercise 7, with a rear BAR wheel UH backward ; JO. Fig. 1C9. 9 FSS; OH; turn over backward into a reardrophang, the hips ex- tended, rearpullup forward into RR (Fig. 109); change to UH; Fig. 110. and sittingwheel forward ; JO. The same backward with OH ; JO- 10 FSS; OH; jump and mount by ;i half circle with the right !,' forward inward, change the right hand to UH, then dismount by a half circle left forward in- ward and one quarter turn ri.^ht into the LCS. Turn dismount forward left (Fig. 110). 11 The same left. Execute Exer- cises 10 and 11 without a stop. 12 As Exercise 10, with a half circle right forward outward. The same left. 13 FR right hand UH, left hand OH, and frontvault right into the RCS (Fig. 111). EXPLANATION. Swing the legs for- ward and backward, and then with a quarter turn right the body passes in a horizontal posi- tion over the bar, facing it. 14 The same opposite. 15 RR ; OH. Flankvault left into RSS. EXPLANATION. Similar to Exercise 13, but without the quarter turn right. 16 The same left. 17 FR ; OH. Rearvault right into LCS (Fig. 112). HORIZONTAL BAR 157 EXPLANATION. With a quarter turn left, raise the legs forward to a right angle, clear the bar facing from it ; replace the left hand, raising the right arm sideways, when landing ; change to the fundamental position. 18 The same left. 19 As Exercises 10, 11, and 12 from aFSS. LESSON 2. HIGH BAR. Fig. 112. HH, OH. 1 Longswing, during the backswing change to EH; right swing; for- ward and change to HH ; JO. 2 As Exercise 1, left; also with both arms. 3 As Exercise 1 from EH; change to SH; back to HH, and JO. 4 The same left ; also with both arms. 5 As Exercise 1, but to SH, then swingover backward into the FR. Underswing (US) JO into the RSS. EXPLANATION. US JO is similar to the beginning of taking a long- swing. See Exercise 1, Lesson 4, Grade I. 6 The same left ; also with botharms. 7 OH LS; turn backward into the squatdrophang ; to a RH JO. 8 As Exercise 7, but from the squat- drophang change to an inner- kneehang right ; kneeupswing forward; kneewheel backward; change to UH and kneewheel forward ; lower forward into the kneehang ; change to RH; JO. 9 The same left. 10 LS; turn as in Exercise 8, and outer kneeupswing right for- ward ; one half circle right back- ward outward into the FR; US JO- 11 The same left. As Exercise 10 and 11 without a stop. 12 As Exercise 10, with inner knee- swingup right forward ; change the right hand to UH ; raise the left leg sideways and hook it under the bar and wheel for- ward ; half circle left forward inward into the RR ; JO. 13 As Exercise 12, with crotch wheel backward, OH ; (Fig. 113), change the right hand to UH, turn, dismount forward left into the RCS. 14 The same left. 15 LS ; OH and crotchupswing for- ward right; dismount as in Ex- ercise 13. EXPLANATION. Similar to the in- ner kneeswingup, but with both knees extended. 16 As Exercise 15 ; then a half circle left forward, inward into the RR; change to UH; lower for- ward into the RH ; then forward into the HH; JO. 158 (i HUM A \-A MKllK '. I -V <, ) U \ . I .s il< > 17 The same loft. 18 As Exercise Ki, but lowerbackwaril into the RH. The same left. 19 LS and frontswingup backward into the FR; fronthipwheel backward US; JO. EXPLANATION. With the forward swing bend the arms and hips slightly, throw the hips against the bar, at the same time raising upward to a FR. 20 LS and crotchswingup forward right ; a half circle left forward inward into the RR; change to UH; raise the legs forward and drop into the rear BAR; straighten the hips and wheel forward (Fig. 114) ; lower to the RH, and JO. 21 The same left. 22 Shortswing forward backward ; forward and jerkup forward into the FR; lower backward into theHH; JO. EXPLANATION. First come to BAR right, follow immediately with the left, and straighten the arms. . Fig. 773. LESSON 3. Fig. 114. HIGH HH OH. 1 Raise the legs forward ; raise them upward ; instep touching the bar to a half drophang ; squat back- ward and extend the hips to a reardrophang ; lower backward to a RH (the hips flexed or ex- tended while lowering) ; turn forward into the HH; JO. 2 As Exercise 1, but while in RH re- BAB. lease the hold with the right hand ; execute one complete turn around the left arm ; both hands OH; JO. 3 The same opposite. 4 As Exercise 1, to a reardrophang; then a rearpullup forward into the RR; JO forward. 5 As Exercise 4, with a rearswingoff backward into the SS. HORIZONTAL BAR 159 EXPLANATION. Before swinging off, lower the body forward so that the back rests against the bar (Fig. 115) ; then with ex- tended hips turn over backward and release the hold. 6 UH; LS and inner kneeswingup right forward ; with a half circle left forward inward, dismount, or JO into the RSS. 7 The same opposite ; also with a quarter turn right into the RCS and LCS. 8 Swingup as in Exercise 6, then a half circle left forward into the RR; UH and sittingwheel for- ward and JO forward in a con- tinued swing. 9 HH right hand OH; left hand UH; and LS inner kneeswingup right forward with half turn left, changing the right hand to OH extend the right leg, bend the left, the body resting on the left thigh, outer kneewheel left back- ward three times ; half a circle left backward outward; hip- wheel backward and US; JO in a continued swing. 10 "The same left. 11 HH; LS; with the forward swing half turn left, the same with the next forward swing ; repeat sev- eral times (Fig. 116). EXPLANATION. With the half turn release the hold of both hands and take OH on the opposite side of the bar. Fig. 7i 12 The same right. 13 As Exercise 11 ; after the half turn, crotchswingup right for- ward; half turn left crotch- wheel backward ; US JO. EXPLANATION. The left leg squats forward with the US and JO. 14 The same opposite. Fig. 116. 15 HH OH; LS and turn backward into the reardrophang; rearpull- up forward ; half turn left into the FR; hipwheel backward with a JO backward into the FSS. 160 <; HUM. I -V-.l MKIiH '-1 -V C, YMNA8TICS 16 The same opposite. 17 As Exercise 15, but in a continued swing, that is to a RR. 18 The same opposite. Ill HH; LS and change to SH right ; to FR ; with a backward swing freehipwheel backward two times and US JO. LESSON 4. HIGH BAR. 1 HH; OH ; and LS; turn backward to an inncrkneehang right and left ; release the hold of both hands ; straightening the hips and with a forward swing exe- cute a dropkneehang ; swingoff into the RSS (Fig. 117). Fig. 777. EXPLANATION. Dropkneehang : body hangs in the kneejoints, the hips extended, the head down- ward. 2 As Exercise 1, to an innerkneehang right and left, swing backward and forward several times and execute a sitting upswing back- ward into the RR. Half circle right and left backward, inward into the FR; right hand UH ; frontvault left into the RCS. 3 The same opposite. 4 HH ; OH ; LS ; and frontswingup backward into the FR ; half turn left backward into the RR UH ; and a backwheel forward ; lower forward into the RH ; JO. 5 The same opposite. G LS several times, then during the forward swing keep the hips ex- tended so that the body swings into a horizontal position ; break the swing by suddenly bonding the hips and throwing the feet against the bar and quickly dropping the legs to HH and JO. 7 As Exercise 6 ; but instead of dropping the legs, throw them forcibly forward from the bar, at the same time pull the body up- ward ; forward to a BAR right ; with the next backwardswing straighten both arms to a FR ; US; JO. 8 The same left. Exercises 7 and 8 can also be done to SH right. 9 UH ; frontpullup backward into the FR; change to OH and lower backward slowly into the HH, holding the legs forward in position; lower the legs; JO. 10 OH ; frontpullup backward ; lower brckward into a half drophang, turn backward into the RH ; turn forward into the HH ; JO. 11 HH ; shortswing jerkup forward right and follow quickly with the left into the FR ; US into the HH; HORIZONTAL BAR 161 LS swing backward forward and frontswingup backward into the FR; US JO, EXPLANATION. A frontswingup backward is similar to a front- pullup backward. GRADE III. LESSON 1. Low BAH. Height of the shoulders or hips. FR ; OH. 1 Circle right forward inward into the FR and flankvault right into the RSS. 2 The same left. 3 Circle right forward outward into the FR and frontvault left into the RCS. 4 The same opposite. 5 Circle right forward inward, left forward inward and rearvault right into the LCS. 6 The same opposite. 7 Flanks wing left (half circle with both legs) forward into the RR ; flankswing right backward into the FR and squatvault forward into the RSS. EXPLANATION. The legs pass through between the hands, the knees bent and together. 8 The same opposite. 9 The above exercises can also be done from a FSS. 10 FSS ; OH ; squat forward into the RR, separate the legs, sit on the bar and change both hands to an inner close hold (the hands to- gether), then straddle sitting- wheel backward. JO forward. This can be done at first with one hand on the outside. 11 FSS ; OH ; straddlevault forward into the RSS. 12 As Exercise 11, but into the straddle seat, and wheel back- ward as in Exercise 10. 13 FR ; squat forward right into a crossstraddlerest (the right leg forward, the left backward), shears left sideways ; squat left backward into the FR and flankvault left into the RSS. EXPLANATION. Shears : one half circle right backward, inward and left forward, inward ; the legs crossing over the bar at the same time. 14 The same opposite. 15 As Exercise 12, after the wheel drop backward into an inner- kneehang right and kneeswing- up forward, with a half circle left forward dismount. 16 The same opposite. 17 FSS ; UH ; frontswingup back- ward ; raise the trunk and strad- dle the legs sideways ; hook the toes under the bar and toewheel forward (Fig. 118) ; JO back- ward. 18 FR ; squat forward into the RR ; squat backward into the FR ; hipwheel forward ; squatvault forward into the RSS. 10 FR ; OH. Turn over (handspring) forward. 162 UKltMAX-AMXni('A.\ CYMXASTH 9 EXPLANATION. Swing the legs for- ward under the bar, bending the hips and anus slightly ; then swing them backward upward and turn over forward, executing n complete turn, landing on the feet. Push off strongly with the hands, the back well arched. Exercise this at first with ln-nt anus, thru with extended arms. P. S. Learn the above exercises thoroughly before attempt- ing them on the high bar. Fig. 778. LESSON 2. HIGH BAH. HH. 1 The right hand UH; the left OH ; LS and inner kneeswingup right forward and with a half circle 7 left forward inward and a half 8 turn right come into the FR OH. fronthip wheel backward with a 9 JO backward into the FSS. 2 The same opposite. 3 OH ; LS ; sitting swingup forward : sittingwheel backward into the RR and swingoff backward into 10 the FSS. 4 As Exercise 3, with sittingwheel forward with UH ; and JO for- ward into the RSS. 5 As Exercise 3, with a straddle sitting swingup, forward wheel 11 backward and JO forward. HH, OH ; frontpullup forward into the FR, change right to UH and frontvault left into RCS. 7 The same left. As Exercise 6, with, squatvault forward into the RSS. HH ; OH ; shortswing jerkup for- ward into the FR ; drop back- ward into the HH, and again the shortswing jerkup US ; JO. HH ; OH ; frontpullup forward, a half turn left into the RH. Lower the body forw. with ex- tended hips and knees into the reardrophang; turn forward into the HH ; JO. HH ; OH ; LS a half turn left in the forward swing and a front- HORIZONTAL BAR 163 swingup backward into the FR ; US ; JO. 12 The same opposite. 13 LS and a rearswingup forward into the RR ; rearhipwheel back- ward ; JO forward. 14 As Exercise 13 with UH and a backwheel forward into the rear BAR ; a half turn left into a front BAR, push up forward and straighten the arms into the FR ; squatvault forward. 15 The same opposite. 16 HH ; OH ; LS and longswing jerk- up forward into the FR ; US JO. See Exercise 7, Lesson 4, Grade II. 17 As Exercise 16, and a freehip- wheel backward with JO back- ward. 18 As Exercise 17, with a rearvault right into the LCS. 19 As Exercises 16, 17, and 18 with UH ; for the longswing jerkup and OH for the rearvault. 20 LS and longswing jerkup forward ; f reehipwheel backward into the FR; change to UH and swing over forward into the HH; LS and JO at the end of the back- wardswing. 21 As Exercise 20, but at the end of the backwardswing, change to OH, and f rontswingup backward into the FR ; flankvault left into RSS. 22 The same opposite. LESSON 3. HIGH BAR. 1 HH OH ; turn backward into the reardrophang ; lower backward into a rear horizontal lever (head, trunk, and the legs in one line); lower into the RH ; JO. 2 As Exercise 1, but from the lever, rise to a reardrophang, squat for- ward into a frontdrophang ; lower into the HH, the legs forward ; lower the legs ; JO. 3 Raise the legs forward ; frontpull- up forward ; turn forward into frontdrophang ; squat backward into a rearlever, then sink to a RH ; release the hold right and four quarters turn around the left arm into the HH and JO. 4 The same opposite. 5 Frontpullup backward into the FR ; lower backward into the HH, the legs being held forward and re- peat; lower the legs and JO. 6 HH ; OH ; longswing jerkup for- ward; swing out backward and repeat ; US JO. 7 Longswing jerkup forward ; squat forward right ; shears left side- ways ; a half circle left back- ward outward and flankvault right. 8 The same opposite. 9 Longswing jerkup forward ; free- hipwheel backward and squat- vault forward. 10 As Exercise 9, but after the free- hipwheel, swingout backward and rearswingup forward into the RR ; JO forward with a half turn into the FSS. The same opposite. 11 Longswing jerkup forward ; US and repeat with a rearvault right. 12 The same left. 164 GERM A N-A M EliUJA N G YMNA 8 TICS 1:5 HH ; OH ; longswing pullup for- ward with a fronthipwheel back- ward, and JO backward (similar to a slow pullup). 14 As Exercise 13, with UH ; but change to OH for the fronthip- wheel. 15 UH LS and rearswingup forward into RR with a half turn left into the FR ; squat forward and JO. Fig. 11 9. LESSON 4. HIGH BAR. 1 UH longswing jerkup forward ; swingover forward and long- swing pullup forward into the FR ; change to OH and freehip- wheel backward ; rearvault right into the LCS. 2 The same opposite. 3 UH longswing pullup forward ; toewheel forward with a swing- over forward ; at the end of the backwardswing change to OH and rearswingup forward with JO forward. 4 OH, longswing jerkup forward with a circle right forward inward and flankvault right into the RSS. 5 The same left. 6 As Exercise 4, but circle right forward, outward and a rear- vault right into the LCS. 7 The same opposite. 8 Longswing jerkup forward and a flankvault left. 9 The same right. 10 As Exercise 8, with a rearvault left. 11 The same right. 12 As Exercise 8, with a rearvault right. 13 The same left. 14 As Exercise 8, with squatvault forward. 15 As Exercise 8, with a straddle- vault forward. 16 HH ; UH right hand, OH left hand ; the hands close together ; raise the legs forward, at the same time executing a half turn left; bend the arms and pullup right forward into the BAR right; ex- tend the hips, release the hold left, and a half turn left ; into the * rear BAR ; take UH left lower to a rearlever. JO. 17 The same opposite. 18 HH hold as in Exercise 16, the hands apart ; turn over back- ward to a rearlever ; move the hands close together ; one quar- ter turn right and change to a BAR right ; lowering the legs, release the hold left, change to OH left ; a quarter turn right HORIZONTAL BAR 165 and push upward into the FR ; lower backward into the HH, the (Fig. 119) legs forward ; JO. 26 19 The same opposite. 20 HH ; OH 1 longs wing jerkup for- ward into the FR, dropjerkup forward ; rearvault right into the LCS. 27 EXPLANATION. Dropjerkup : simi- lar to the longswing jerkup, drop the trunk backward, the feet against the bar, swing them from the bar about 4 to 6 inches, re- turn and forcibly straighten hips, jerkup up to FR. 21 HH ; OH ; longswing pullup, with a half circle right and left for- ward inward ; also forward out- ward ; also with front, rear, flank, squat, or straddle vaults forward. 22 HH ; OH ; LS ; and frontswing- over backward with longswing jerkup forward ; dropjerkup for- ward ; US ; JO. EXPLANATION. Frontswingover is similar to a frontswingup back- ward, without stopping and touching the bar ; the body again coming into the HH and LS. 28 23 HH ; OH left hand, UH right hand ; LS and with the backwardswing release the hold left a half turn left, taking OH left and raising feet to the bar with the turn and a longswing jerkup forward into the FR; freehip wheel backward 29 with JO. 24 The same opposite. 30 25 Shorts wing jerkup forward ; drop into the HH and repeat and flankvault left forward. HH ; OH ; longswing jerkup for- ward; underswing and long- swing pullup forward ; dropjerk- up forward and high frontvault left. The same opposite. The same as Exercise 26, but swing to a handstand (Fig. 120), squat forward. JO. Fig. 120. HH ; OH ; front pullup forward into the FR ; lower forward into a frontlever ; squat backward to a rearlever ; rise to a reardrop- hang and rearpullup forward into the RR ; change to UH and lower forward to a rearlever JO. The same as Exercise 27, with UH and giant swing forward. The same as Exercise 27, and giant swing backward. REMARKS. A great variety of exercises can be done on the horizontal bar combined with buck, parallel bars, or vaulting board. 1G6 GERMAN-AMERICAN < IV \ - 1 STICS PARALLEL BARS BY A. E. KINDERVATER THREE sets of graded exercises for parallel bars, each set containing six lessons, three of which begin from the cross- stand, or crossrest, i.e., the bars running at right angles to the width of the body ; and three from the sidestand or side rest, i.e., the length of the bars running parallel with the width of the body. ELEMENTARY GRADE. LESSON 1. Crossstand facing the bar, the hands grasping the ends. Fig. 121. 1 Hop up into the rest ; the head erect, the back hollow, the legs pressed together and straight, the Fig. 122. toes down. Resume the first posi- tion (or stand). Repeat this several times (Fig. 121). PARALLEL JtABS 167 2 Rest as in Exercise 1, and raise the legs forward or backward, right and left alternately, or both (straight or bent legs). 3 Rest as in Exercise 1, turn the body to the right and left alternately (around the longitudinal axis). 4 Rest as in Exercise 1, raise the straight legs forward and back- ward right and left alternately and both ; also left forward, and right backward, or vice versa. 5 Rest as in Exercise 1, lift the hands (for a moment) right and left al- ternately or both (hop in place). 6 Rest as in Exercise 1, travel, lifting the hand and grasping forward with the right hand, and return ; also left, and return. 7 Rest as in Exercise 1, travel for- ward, grasping three times with the right and three times with the left hand. 8 Rest as in Exercise 1, travel for- ward, grasping right and left alternately. 9 Rest as in Exercise 1, hop forward to the other end (short hops, both hands grasping forward si- multaneously). Fig. 123. Fig. 124. LESSON 2. Mounts and Dismounts. Crossstnnd facing the bars, the hands on the ends. 1 Mount to inner crossseat on the right thigh, in front of the right hand (Fig. 122). Dismount into the first position ; repeat several times. The same exercise left. 2 Mount into the ridingseat, in front of the right hand (Fig. 123). Dismount into the first position. The same exercise left. 3 Mount into the straddleseat in front of the hands on both bars (Fig. 124). Dismount into first position. 168 a Kit. MAX-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 4 Mount into the outer crossseat left in front of the right hand (Fig. Fig. 125. 125). Dismount into the first position. The same exercise left. 5 Turn and jump into the rest, back to the bars ; swing tho body bark- ward and place one foot on each bar front eroM-leaningrest (fa- cing the bars, the amis, legs, and body straight). Hwinj; through forward, jump off and alight on both feet, the back to the bar (Fig. 126). Rest facing the bars ; swing the body forward and place one foot on each bar, the outer edge of the feet resting on the bars (extend the legs and arch the back), rear cross-leaningrest, back to the bars (Fig. 127), swing through backward, jump off and alight on both feet facing the bars. Cross-leaningrest facing the bars as in Exercise 5, draw the feet toward the hands into the squat- ting position (knees outside of the arms, the head erect). Re- sume the first position and alight as in Exercise 5. Fig. 126. Rest in the centre of the bars; swing the body backward into the squatting position right (place the right foot on the right bar behind the hand, the knee Fig. 127. bent, the left leg extended downward between the bars, the head erect). Alight and .stand in the centre of the bars. PARALLEL BARS 109 9 Rest in the centre of the bars ; squatting position, right foot on the left bar (behind the hand, the left leg extended downward, on the outside of the left bar). Jump off sideways left. 10 As Exercise 8, with the left leg extended downward, on the out- side of the right bar; also chan- ging from the squatting position on one bar over into the other. Jump off sideways. LESSON 3. Upperarmhang and Kindred Exercises. 1 Upperarmhang in the centre of the bars (Fig. 128). Resume stand in the centre of the bars. 2 Armhang as in Exercise 1, raise the knees ; the heels ; swing the straight leg forward, backward, and sideways right and left alter- nately, or both. Resume stand in the centre. 3 Armhang as in Exercise 1, and swing the body forward and back- ward. Resume stand in the cen- tre. 4 Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing as in Exercise 3, and in the fore- swing straddle the legs, hollow the back, the arms and the thighs resting on the bars (lying on the bars the body horizontal, the face upward). Resume the hang and stand in the centre. 5 Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing the body as in Exercise 3, and in the backswing straddle the legs sideways over the bar (remain lying on the bars on arms and thighs, face downward). Resume the hang and stand in the centre. 6 Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing forward and lie on the bar as in Exercise 4, raise the body into the straddleseat in front of the hands. Dismount sideways right or left. 7 Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing backward and lie on the bar as in Exercise 5, raise the body into the straddleseat behind the hands. Dismount sideways right or left. Fig. 128. 8 Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing as in Exercise 3, and in the fore- swing raise the body into the straddleseat in front of the hands, swing the body backward through the bars into the cross-leaning rest facing the bars (as in Exer- cise 5, Lesson 2). Alight side- ways right or left. 9 Armhang as in Exercise 1, swing the body as in Exercise 3, and in the backswing raise the body into the straddleseat behind the hands, swing forward through the bars into the cross-leaningrest back to the bars (as in Exercise 6 of Lesson 2). Alight sideways right or left. 170 i ; /;/,' .W . I ,\ - . I M ERIC AN (. Y M \ A*TH > LESSON 4. Hangstand and Exercises in the same. Outer sidestand facing the bars, ordinary yraxp on the nearer bar. Front hangstand; place the feet forward below the bars (Fig. 129). Position. 2 As Exercise 1, raise the legs for- ward or sideways right or left alternately (straight or bent); change the hands to the reversed, combined, or twisted grasp; bend and straighten the arms. 3 As Exercise 1, placing one or both feet against the second bar, bend and straighten the legs (the arms remain straight). 4 As Exercise 1, placing one or both legs over the second bar into a kneehang on one or both legs; the hands remain on the first bar (Fig. 130). 5 As Exercise 1, placing the heels against the second bar (the arms and legs straight); while in this position, raise one or the other leg towards the first bar, or move sideways right and left; also bend and straighten the arms; change grasp, etc. 6 As in Exorcise 1, raising the body upward between both bars into the reversedhang (the feet up- ward, the head downward); while in this position, lower the body onto the second bar by bending the arms and pushing the body over. Jump off forward. 7 As Exercise 1 ; raise the knees, be- tween the hands; toes against the inside of the first bar; bend the body through into the nest, and return. 8 As Exercise 1, raising the knees and squat through between the hands; turn the body over back- ward, the feet on the floor (ex- tending the arms, legs, and back), into the rearhangstand (Fig. 131). Fig, 130. 9 As Exercise 8, bend the knees, squat through and straighten the body over into the reversedhang (feet upward, the head down- ward), on the outside of the first bar, and return. PARALLEL BARS 171 Fig. 131. Fig. 132. LESSON 5. Rests and Mounts. Sidestand, facing the bars. 1 Sidestand in front of the bar, the hands on the first bar, ordinary grasp ; hop into the siderest, on the first bar (Fig. 132) ; repeat several times ; the same adding exercises of the legs, as swing- ing the straight leg sideways right and left alternately or both (straddle), or placing the feet onto the nearer bar, the legs ex- tended, sideways right and left. 2 Siderest on the first bar; swing the right or left leg over the first bar and return (half circle right for- ward). 3 Rest as in Exercise 2 ; grasp over onto the second bar, moving the body forward into the side-lean- ingrest, facing the bars (Fig. 133). Jump backward into the sidestand, the hands on the first bar. 4 As in Exercise 3 ; in the leaning- rest exercise the legs and arms ; as kneeling, right knee on the first bar and extending the left leg backward, horizontally ; vice versa, or kneeling on both knees ; bend the arms, etc. Fig. 133. 5 As Exercise 3, raise the right knee, and place the right foot on the 11-2 GERMAN-AMERICAN OYMNA8TK - lir>l l>ar, tin- other leg extended aslant downward (the arms straight) ; also with both feet on the first bar in the squatting po- sition. As Exercise 3, swing the right leg over the first and between both bars, execute a quarter turn left (three quarter leg circle). Re- sume the first position ; the same left, and then alternately. 7 As Exercise 3, circle with the right leg, inward over the first bar; the same left, and also nately. 8 As Exercise 3 ; swing the right and the left leg over and sit on the first bar, the hands on tin- second (inner seat). 9 As Exercise 8, hook the toes undiT the second bar and bend the body backward until the hands touch the floor ; or lower the body out horizontally, with the arms crossed on the chest (Fig. 134). Fig. 134. LESSON 6. Mounts and Changes from the Cross and Siderest. 1 Crossstand facing the bars ; mount into the inner sideseat, the right leg on the left bar at the side of the left hand (Fig. 135). Re- sume the stand, the same left, and alternately. 2 As Exercise 1, then swing the left leg in a circle over the left bar, at the same time turning the body one half turn to the right (and grasping forward with the left hand over onto the right bar) into the side-leaningrest facing the bars. Jump backward into the sidestand, the hands on the first bar. 3 Stand as in Exercise 1, mounting into the outer crossseat onto the right bar (see Lesson 2, Exercise 4). One quarter turn left, the right hand grasping over onto the left bar, into the side-lean- ingrest, facing the bars. Half a turn left into the outer sideseat on the right bar, both hands on the right bar ; push off for- ward. 4 Stand as in Exercise 1, mounting into the side straddleseat on both bars in front of the hands ; one quarter turn to the left raising the body into the cross straddle- seat, left hand grasping reverse on the left bar (Fig. 136); alight by swinging the right leg forward over both bars, at the same time PARALLEL BARS 173 turning the body one quarter turn to the left, the left hand keeps its hold. Turn dismount forward right. 5 Stand as in Exercise 1, mounting into the innerseat right on the left bar (as in Exercise 1), turn right about into the side-leaning- rest (as in Exercise 3) ; swing the left leg forward over both bars, the right hand grasping over onto the left bar, into the straddleseat behind the hands ; alight by swinging the right leg backward over both bars, and turning right into the sidestand, both hands on the first bar. 6 Stand as in Exercise 1, mount as in Exercise 3, half a turn left cir- cling with the right leg through the centre again into the outer crossseat on the right bar (now in front of the left hand), facing the starting-point. Rearvatilt sideways right (over the other bar). Fig. 135. Fig. 136. 7 Stand as in Exercise 1, mount as in Exercise 1, turn right and cir- cle the left leg forward over the left bar, through the centre and then onto the former right bar, into a side straddleseat in front of the hands ; swing backwards through the bars into a cross- leaningrest, facing the bars ; jump down sideways right or left. 8 Stand as in Exercise 1, mount as in Exercise 4, grasp forward with the hands, swing through for- ward into the cross-leaningrest back to the bars, jump down side- ways right or left. Stand as in Exercise 1, mount as in Exercise 4, grasp forward- swing through forward, into the outer crossseat on the right bar, in front of the hand ; swing through backward and vault over the left bar behind the hand. Frontvault left. 174 < : Kit M . I A - - 1 .V KR1CAN G YMNA 8 TICS INTERMEDIATE GRADE. LESSON 1. Swinging in the Rest, with Exercises of the Arms and the Legs. Crossrest in the centre of the bars. Swing forward and backward sev- eral times, the feet at least as high as the head, the arms straight (Fig. 137) ; vault over the right bar behind the hand. Frontvault right Fig. 137a. 2 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in the backswing open and close the legs above the bars (sidestraddle). Vault over the left bar in front of the hand. Rearvault left. 3 Swing as in Exercise 1, and strad- dle the legs sideways in the fore- swing (above the bars). Front- vault left. 4 Swing as in Exercise 1, and strad- dle the legs sideways in both back and foreswing. Rearvault right. 5 Swing as in Exercise 1, and cross- straddle the legs (right forward, left backward, or vice versa). Frontvault with one quarter turn left, facing the bars. 6 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in the backswing bend and straighten the legs (heels touching the seat). Rearvault left with one quarter turn right,f acing the bars. 7 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in the foreswing bend and straight- en the legs (the knees touching the chest). Frontvault left with one quarter turn right, facing the bars. 8 Swing as in Exercise 1, bend and straighten the legs, as in the Ex- ercises 6 and 7 in the back and foreswing. Rearvault right with one quarter turn left, facing bars. 9 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in the backswing bend and straighten the arms. Rearvault left with one quarter turn left. 10 Swing as in Exercise 1, and in the foreswing bend and straighten the arms. Frontvault left with one half turn right. Fig. 137 b. 11 Swing as in Exercise 1, bend and straighten the arms as in Exer- cises and 10 in both back and foreswings. Frontvault right with one half turn left. PARALLEL BARS 175 LESSON 2. Swinging in the rest with lifting the hands alternately or simultane- ously (walking or hopping) on and from place. Shearsmount, circling and straddling off at the end. 1 Crossrest at the end, facing the bars ; swing and lift one hand moment- arily from the bars in either back or foreswing, or the right hand in the fore, ^the left hand in the backswing, also lifting both hands simultaneously in either* fore, back, or in both swings. 2 Swing as in Exercise 1, lift the hand and grasp forward (small steps), right and left alternately. a. Only in backswing ; b. Only in foreswing ; c. In both back and foreswing, to the end of the bars (travelling forward). 3 Swing as in Exercise 1, and lift both hands simultaneously (hop- Ping)- a. Only in the backswing ; 6. Only in the foreswing ; c. In both back and foreswing, to the end of the bars. 4 The same as in Exercises 2 and 3, but travelling or hopping back- ward. Begin the exercise with back to the bars. 5 Swing as in Exercise 1, travel for- ward, the hands grasping forward alternately in each backswing to the end of the bars, swing backward to the front-leaning- rest (facing the bars). Straddle- off forward over the right bar with one quarter turn to the left (the left hand remains on the left bar). 6 Swing as in Exercise 1, travel for- ward to the end of the bar, grasp- ing forward on the foreswing ; in the last backswing cross the legs and turn about into the straddle- seat in front of the hands (shears- mount backward). Place the outer edge of the feet on the bars, raise the body with arched back into the back-leaningrest (back to the bars). Straddleoff backward over the left bar, alight facing the bars. 7 Swing as in Exercise 1, travel, grasping forward right and left with each swing to the end of the bars ; swing back into the front-leaningrest (as in Exercise 5) ; bend and straighten the arms several times ; straddleoff for- ward over both bars, alight back to the bars. 8 Swing as in Exercise 1 ; hop for- ward with both hands in the backswing to the middle of the bars ; in the last foreswing cross the legs and turn about into the straddleseat behind the hands (shearsmount forward); grasp back to the ends of the bars and raise the body into the rear- leaningrest. Straddleoff back- ward over both bars, alight facing the bars. 9 Swing as in Exercise 1, and hop forward on both hands in each foreswing to the centre of the bars ; shearsmount backward into the straddleseat (twice) ; grasp forward to the ends of the bars, swing through forward, back- 176 GKltMA N-A M ERIC AN G TMNA8TICS ward and straddleoff forward over both bars. Alight back to the bars. 10 Swing as in Exercise 1, and hop forward on both hands in the fore and backswing to the centre of the bars ; shearsmount for- ward into tin- straddle-seat ; grasp backward and shearsmount back- ward into the same seat ; grasp forward to the ends of the bars, and turn ove forward with bent arms, alight back to the bars (handspring). LESSON 3. Armhang, half turnover, uprise, upstart, and vaults. 1 Cross upperarmhang in the centre of the bars (Fig. 128; swing fore and backward several times ; in the foreswing straddle the legs sideways above the bars, arch the back and lie on the bars (face up- Fig. 138. ward and body horizontal), rest- ing on the upper arms and thighs (see Exercise 4 of Lesson 3, First Grade); rise into the straddleseat in front of the hands ; swing through backward and frontvault right. 2 Swing as in Exercise 1, in the back- swing, straddle the legs sideways above the bars and lie on the bars as in Exercise 1, with face down- ward (see Exercise 5 of Lesson 3, First Grade) ; rise into the straddleseat behind the hands ; swing through forward and rear- vault left. 3 Swing as in Exercise 1, in the fore- swing raise the legs well over the body (the feet above the head half-turnover) (Fig. 138); from here drop quickly into the strad- dleseat in front of the hands. Upstart. Swing through back- ward and frontvault left. 4 Swing as in Exercise 1, half turn- over as in Exercise 3 ; swing down, then backward and uprise from the backswing into the front-leaningrest; swing through forward and rearvault right. 5 Swing as in Exercise 1, half turn- over as in Exercise 3 ; swing through backward and uprise in the next foreswing into the straddleseat in front of the hands, raise the feet and body into the rear-leaningrest ; swing through backward and front- vault right. 6 Swing as in Exercise 5 ; uprise in the backswing into the rest ; swing forward into the rear-lean- ingrest ; swing backward and frontvault left. 7 Swing as in Exercise 5 ; uprise in the foreswing into the rest ; swing backward into the frontleaning- rest ; swing forward and rear- vault right. PARALLEL BARS 177 8 Swing as in Exercise 5 ; uprise in the backswing into the rest ; swing forward and rearvault left with one quarter turn right, fa- cing the bars (the whole exer- cise without interruption). 9 Swing as in Exercise 5 ; uprise in the foreswing into the rest : swing backward and frontvault right with one quarter turn left, facing the bars. 10 Swing as in Exercise 3 ; half turn- over and upstart into the rest with straight arms; swing back- ward and forward and res.rvault right, with one half turn 'eft. LESSON 4. Sidestand facing the bars, mounts, leaningrest, dismounts, . combinations, and vaults. 1 Sidestand facing the bars ; take a short run and mount from the left into the ridingseat behind the right hand on the first bar, the left hand grasping the second bar ; raise and swing both legs through forward into the side- seat right in front of the left hand on the second bar (the left leg between the bars); circle the left leg forward over the second bar and dismount with a quarter turn right turn dismount for- ward left. 2 Mount into the ridingseat in front ' of the right hand on the first bar ; raise and swing the legs through backward into the side- seat left behind the left hand on the second bar (the right leg outside of the second bar) (Fig. 139) ; raise the legs, swing through forward and rearvault left. 3 Mount right into the straddleseat on both bars behind the hands ; swing through forward into the outer crossseat in front of the right hand ; one quarter turn left into the side-leaningrest facing the bars (or forward). The hands grasping the second bar ; push off backward. 4 Mount right into the cross-leaning- rest facing the bars ; swing through forward and backward and shears backward into the rid- ingseat on the first bar (in front of the right hand); dismount to the left, rearvault over the sec- ond bar. Fig. 139. 5 Mount right into the cross-leaning- rest facing the bars ; swing through forward then over the first bar and with a quarter turn right come into the front side- leaningrest ; reverse the grasp of 178 <; /;/;./. i \-. i M i:ni< '. \ v <. > ./ Y.I > / v > the left hand and frontvault right over both hars. t; .Mount right into the straddleseat in front of the hands on both bars ; raise the body into the rear cross-leaningrest ; swing through backward with shears backward into the straddleseat in from of the hands : change the left hand to the reversed grasp. Turn dis- mount forward with three quar- ter turns left, the right leg cir- cling forward over both LESSON 5. Side leaningrest and combinations. Sidestand facing the bars. All exercises begin with a short nm. 1 Jump into the front-leaningrest, the right hand on the first, the left on the second bar ; swing through and over the second bar into the outer sideseat on the second bar, both hands grasping the same bar; pushoff forward. Fig. 140. 2 As in Exercise 1, but from the outer sideseat, change to the rear side-leaningrest, both hands grasping the first bar. Reverse the grasp and change to the front- leaningrest by turning right or left about ; pushoff backward. 3 Jump into the side-leaningrest as in Exercise 1; lower the body for- ward ; the chest on the second bar, the hands grasping the first bar reversed (the body lies horizon- tally on both bars); raise the legs and the body upward, trpper- armstand (Fig. 140), return and jump off backward facing the bars. 4 As Exercise 3; from the upperarm- stand turn over forward onto the feet; while turning, change the hands over to the seco.nd bar. 5 Jump into the side-leaningrest as in Exercise 1, both hands grasp- ing the second bar; half turn right or left into the rear side- leaningrest; the hands reversed; bend the hips and lower the body, through between the bars, into the hammockhang on the heels and the hands, by drop- ping the feet, come to a stand. 6 As in Exercise 5; out of the rear- leaningrest, lower the body backward and lie on the bars, the body horizontal, the hands grasping the first bar; raise the body backward, the feet up- ward, and roll off backward, PARALLEL BARS 179 alight facing the bars. The hands give up their hold as soon as the feet are turned towards the floor. 7 Jump into the front-leaningrest, the hands grasping the second bar; the flankvault right or left over both bars. 8 Jump into the front leaningrest, the hands on the second bar ; frontvault right or left over both bars. The off hand changes to the reversed grasp before vault- ing. 9 Jump into the front-leaningrest; the hanJs on the second bar, rearvault over both bars. O^Jump into the front-leaningrest; the hands on the second bar; step with the right foot on the first bar, turn over forward, (pushoff with the foot and the hands). Alight back to the bars. (Handspring.) LESSON 6. Vault over the first bar into a seat or leaningrest and vault over the second bar. 1 Sidestand facing the bars, take a short run and frontvault right over the first bar, the right hand grasping the second bar; swing through forward into the strad- dleseat in front of the hands; swing through backward and frontvault right. 2 Stand as in Exercise 1, rearvault right over the first bar, the right hand grasping the second bar; swing through backward into the straddleseat behind the hands; swing through forward and rear- vault right. 3 Frontvault right, over the first bar, as in Exercise 1; swing through forward into the rear cross-lean- ingrest; swing through backward and frontvault right, with a quar- ter turn right or left. 4 Rearvault right over the first bar, as in Exercise 2; swing backward into the front cross-leaningrest; swing through forward and rear- vault right with a quarter turn left. 5 Frontvault right over the first bar, swing through forward to side- seat right on the left bar, see Exercise 1, Lesson 6, of the First Grade (the right thigh in front of the left hand, the left leg be- tween the bars). Turnmount left forward into the straddleseat on both bars behind the hands; swing through forward and rear- vault left with a quarter turn left. 6 Rearvault right over the first bar ; swing through backward and shears backward into the strad- dleseat on both bars in front of the han:ls; swing through back- ward and frontvault left, with one half turn right. 7 Frontvault right over the first bar, swing through forward and shears forward into the straddleseat on both bars behin 1 the hanls; swing through forward, and rear- vault left with one half turn right. GERM A X-A M /:/.' /' . ! .V GYMNASTICS Fig. 141 a. Fig. 141 b. ADVANCED GRADE. LESSON 1. Swing in the centre of the bars, -with bending and straightening the arms (dip). Mounts and vaults. 1 Crossstand, take a short run and jump into the crossrest in the centre of the bars; swing, bend and straighten the arms during the foreswing (foredip) several times (Fig. 141). Frontvault right. 2 As Exercise 1, but bend and straighten the arms during the backswing (backdip) several times. Rearvault right. 3 As Exercise 1, one foredip, two intermediate swings with straight arms, and one backdip. Rear- vault left. 4 As Exercise 1, fore and backdip without intermediate swings (the arms straight at the end of each swing). In the backswing front- vault left. 5 As Exercise 1, one foredip and mount into the sideseat left on the right bar in front of the hand; circle forward with the right leg over the right bar, at the same time turning the body left about, into the straddleseat on both -bars behind the hands. Turnmount forward right, fore- dip and rearvault right. 6 As Exercise 1, backdip and shears- mount backward into the strad- dleseat in front of the hands; backdip with frontvault right. 7 As Exercise 1, one or more fore- dips; after the last swing shears forward into the straddleseat be- hind the hands; swing through forward and rearvault left with half a turn left. 8 As Exercise 1, backdip and shears backward into the straddleseat in front of the hands; from here repeat the dip and shears backward into the straddleseat; swing through backward and frontvault left with one half turn right. 9 As Exercise 1, foredip with one half turn right or left into the npperannhang; uprise in the foreswing to the rest and then appropriate vaults. 10 As Exercise 9; with backdip and uprise in backswing and appro- priate vaults. PARALLEL BARS 181 LESSON 2. Dip with hopping, shoulderstand, upstart, and vaults. All exercises on this lesson begin from the crossrest. 1 Foredip with hopping forward (both hands grasping forward simultaneously) to the other end of the bar ; in the last swing straddleoff forward over both bars (push off strongly with the hands). Fig. 142. 2 Backdip, with hopping backward to the end of the bars ; in the last swing straddleoff backward over one or both bars (assistance needed). 3 In the centre of the bars ; alternate the foredip and hopping forward with the backdip and hopping backward ; in the last swing front or rearvault over the right bar. 4 Foredip with hopping forward to the centre of the bars ; in the last backswing lower the right shoulder onto the right bar and raise the body into a vertical po- sition shoulder standright (Fig. 142); turn over sideways and alight at the right side of the bars. 5 Backdip with hopping backward to the centre of the bars ; in the last swing raise the body into the shoulderstand left; straighten the arms partly and frontvault right. 6 Foredip with hopping forward to the centre of the bars; in the last backswing raise the body vertically into the upperarm- stand (Fig. 143); lower the legs, straighten the arms partly and swing forward with rearvault right. Fig. 143. Backdip with hopping backward to the centre of the bars ; in the last backswing raise the body into the upperarmstand ; bend the 182 GERMAN-AMEU1CAN GYM.\.\ > IK > hips and roll forward with strad- dling the legs sideways into the straddleseat ou both bars in front of the hands; swing backward and execute a high frontvault over the right bar. 8 Foredip with hopping forward to the centre of the bars ; in the last swing rise into a shoulderstand right; change to the upperarm- stand; bend the hips and upstart into the rest; swing through for- ward; pushoff and alight at the end of the bars with a quarter turn right or left. 9 Backdip with hopping backward to the centre of the bars ; in the last backswing rise to the upper- armstand ; bend the hips, roll forward slowly, and uprise into the rest with straight arms ; raise the legs forward ; leglever ; swing backward into the handstand (Fig. 144;; swing through for- ward with rearvault right and half turn left. Fig. 144. LESSON 3. Roll with bent and straight hips. Uprise, upstart, and vaults. All the exercises of this lesson begin from the upperarmhang in the centre of the bars. 1 Swing forward and backward; in the last foreswing roll over back- ward, straddling the legs into the straddleseat behind the hands; roll over forward (on the arms) through the bars (closing the legs) and uprise in the back- swing into the rest; swing for- ward and rearvault right. 2 Swing, and in the last backswing bend the hips, roll forward strad- dling the legs into the straddleseat in front of the hands; roll over backward into the arnihang, clos- ing the legs and straightening the hips; uprise in the foreswing into the rest with straight arms ; rear- vault right. 3 Swing and roll over backward (a complete turn) with straight body; bend the hips to a half turn over and upstart into the rest; swing forward and rearvault left. 4 Swing and roll over forward (a complete turn) with straight body ; uprise in the backswing, into the rest drop back onto the arms with the hips bent to the half turn over and upstart; swing back and frontvault right. PARALLEL BARS 183 5 Swing and roll backward as in Ex- ercise 3, and uprise in the fore- swing into the rest; swing back into the handstand; swing for- ward and rearvault right with a half turn right. 6 Swing and roll over forward as in Exercise 4 ; with the returnswing roll over backward as in Exercise 5 to a half turn over ; upstart into a handstand ; frontvault right with a half turn left. 7 Swing, and in the foreswing roll over backward (with straighten- ing the hips quickly) into the upperarmstand ; lower the legs slowly into the lever on the right elbow (Fig. 145); change to the left elbow lever and frontvault left with half a turn right. 8 Swing and roll over backward as in Exercise 7 into a handstand with bent arms ; straightening the arms and walk forward on the hands to the end of the bar; straddleoff forward. Fig. 145. 9 Swing and roll over backward as in Exercise 3; in the next back- swing uprise to a handstand; walk forward on the hands to the end of the bars and turn over (handspring) forward with straight arms. LESSON 4. Vaults over the first bar into the rest; intermediate exercises and vaults over the second bar. All exercises in this lesson begin from a sidestand, in front of the bars. Take a short run, vault over the first bar, each hand grasping one bar. ( These exercises should be practised on the low barfirst.~) 1 Frontvault right over the first bar; swing forward; backward and frontvault right. 2 Rearvault right over the first bar; swing backward; forward and rearvault right. 3 Frontvault right over the first bar; swing forward and rearvault right. 4 Rearvault right over the first bar; swing backward and frontvault right. 5 Frontvault right over the first bar; swing forward; backward, and during the backswing circle the left leg backward over the first bar (lift the left hand momenta- rily, the right leg in the mean- time swings backward between the bars); swing forward and rearvault right. 6 Rearvault right over the first bar; swing backward; forward, and in the foreswing circle the left leg forward over the first bar (the right leg meanwhile swinging between the bars); swing back- 184 GERMAN-AMERIC. 1 V /. ) M \ . I 8 11' > ward and frontvault right over the second bar. 7 Frontvault right over the first bar; swing forward and backward, and in the backswing straddle the legs over both bars ; swing forward and rearvault right. 8 Rearvault right over the first bar; swing backward and forward, and in the foreswing straddle the legs over both bars ; swing backward and frontvault right. 9 Frontvault right over the first bar; swing forward; backward and in the backswing circle backward with both legs over the first bar; swing forwardand rearvault rigfct. 10 Real-vault right over the first bar; swing backward and circle for- ward with both legs over the first bar; swing backward and front- vault right. 11 Frontvault right over the first bar; swing forward and circle back- ward with both legs over the first bar, and frontvault right. 12 Rearvault right over the first bar; swing backward; circle forward with both legs over the first and rearvault right. (Rearvault over both bars to be executed without intermission) double rearvault right. LESSON 5. Vaults over the first bar into the armhang, roll, uprise, upstart, and vaults over the second bar. All exercises begin as in Lesxon 4. 1 Frontvault right over the first bar into the armhang in the centre of the bars ; swing forward, back- ward and uprise in the backswing into the rest. Swing forward and rearvault right. 2 Rearvault right over the first bar into the armhang in the centre ; swing backward, forward and uprise in the foreswing into the rest ; swing backward into a handstand and frontvault right. 3 Frontvault right over the first bar into the armhang in the centre; swing forward to a half turn over; upstart into the rest; swing back to a handstand; swing forward and rearvault right with half a turn left. 4 Rearvault right over the first bar into the armhang in the centre; swing backward, forward, and roll backward with straight body ; uprise in the foreswing into the rest; swing backward into a handstand; turn over sideways with straight body, alighting in the crossstand. 5 Frontvault right over the first bar into the armhang in the centre; swing forward, backward and uprise in the backswing into the elbow lever right ; lower the legs, swinging through the bars (straightening the arms) and hold them in a balance over the bars; one quarter turn right (the left hand grasping over to the second bar), pushoff forward. 6 Rearvault right over the first bar into the armhang in the centre; swing backward, forward and PARALLEL BARS 185 roll backward with straightening the body quickly into a shoulder- stand right ; push up to a hand- stand ; step over with the left hand onto the second bar with a quarter turn right and a high frontvault over the second bar. 7 Frontvault right over the first bar into the armhang in the centre; roll backward (straight hips) and uprise in the next backswing to a handstand ; step over into a handstand on the second bar and squatoff forward. Rearvault right over the first bar into the armhang in the centre; roll forward (straight hips) and in the returnswing quickly roll over backward with straight hips into a handstand with bent arms; straighten the arms, step over to a handstand on the second bar; turn over or straddleoff forward. LESSON 6. Vaults over both Bars. These should be practised on the low bars first. Lessons 4 and 5. The exercises beyin as in 1 Squat forward over the first bar into a stand in the centre; flank- vault right, the hands grasping the second bar. 2 Straddle forward over the first bar into a stand in the centre ; squat forward, the hands grasping the second bar. 3 Squat forward over both bars, the hands grasping the second bar; also with the hands grasping the first bar. 4 Straddle forward over both bars, the hands grasping the second bar. 5 Flankvault right over both bars, the hands grasping both bars. 6 Frontvault right over both bars, the hands grasping both bars. 7 Rearvault left over both bars, the hands grasping both bars. 8 Exercises 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 with a quarter or a half turn right or left. 9 Turn over both bars (handspring), both hands grasping either the second or the first bar (assis- tance necessary). 186 i ; /:/; M . I A - . i M 1:1; WAJN M -V -\ - 1 .s 27C'S SIDE HORSE Bv VI 1. 1. 1 A.U A..STECHKU Every exercise begins, with a run. I 6 Rearvault left with a quarter turn 1 Flankvault right (Fig. 146). right. 2 Frontvault right (Fig. 147). 7 Rearvault left with a half turn :) Rearvault left (Fig. 148). right. 4 Frontvault right with a quarter 8 Squatvault forward (Fig. 149); turn left. also with a quarter or half turn 5 Frontvault right with a half turn left or right. left. Fig. 146. 9 Straddlevault forward (Fig. 150); also with a quarter or half turn left or right (help). II 1 Wolf's vault left (Fig. 151). 2 Wolf's vault in form of a f rontvault. 3 Wolfs vault in form of a rearvault (Fig. 152). 4 Thief's vault (Fig. 153). (Spring off Avith one foot, the board about three feet from the horse.) Also with a quarter or half turn left or right. 187 Fig. 147. Fig. 148. Fig. 149. Fig. 150. 188 GEHMAN-AMEltlCAN GYMNASTICS Fig. 757. Fig. 752. Fig. 153. SIDE HORSE 189 Fig. 154. 5 Freejump forward (as Exercise 4, but without the help of the hands); also with a quarter or a half turn left or right. (When springing off left, turn left.) 6 Pike's leap, resting the hands mo- mentarily on the pommels (Fig. 154), and then on the shoulders of the leader. 7 Pike's leap, resting the hands on the shoulders of the leader. Ill 1 Jump into the freerest several times (land on the balls of the of the feet, bending the knees well) (Fig. 155). 2 As Exercise 1, after landing on the board, mount right into the riding- seat on the croup (stridemount), (Fig. 156), dismount into the sidestand on the right side. For description of sidestand, etc., see explanations on page 20. Fig. 155. 3 As Exercise 2, from the ridingseat swing the legs backward three times (the knees and heels locked, 190 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTWS the legs straight), pushoff back- ward. As Exercise 2, from the riding- seat swing the legs backward and cross them (right under the left) with a turn left about (shears left backward); straddleoff forward. As Exercise 4, with two shears backward, but with a right about (left leg under); swing both legs backward and dismount to the right. IV 1 Stridemount left into the ridingseat on the neck; dismount onto the board. 2 As Exercise 1, then left shears backward; swing both legs for- ward three times and dismount to the right with a quarter turn left. 3 As Exercise 2, after the shears, swing the legs forward and cross them (left under right) with a Fig 156. turn left about (shears left for- ward), (Fig. 157 shows the exer- cise in the saddle); push off backward. 4 As Exercise 1, then shears left for- ward (the hands on the neck) and shears right forward, dis- mount left with a quarter turn right. 5 As Exercise 1, then shears left for- ward and backward; dismount left by swinging both legs (closed) backward. Jump into the frontrest, then 1 One half circle right inward and return (Fig. 158); several times. 2 As Exercise 1, then complete the circle by passing the leg back- ward under the left hand (keep the body well over the horse). 3 One half circle right outward (pass- ing under the left hand) and re- turn, several times. 4 As Exercise 3, then complete the SIDE HORSE 191 Fig. 157. Fig. 158. Fig. 159. 192 r;)M/_y.i>T/r,s circle by passing backward under the right hand. 5 As Exercise 1, jump down back- ward and squatvault forward. As Exercise 2, jump down back- ward and squatvault forward with a quarter turn left or right. 7 As Exercise 3, jump down back- ward and straddlevault forward. 8 As Exercise 4, jump down back- ward and straddlevault forward with a quarter turn left or right. VI 1 Mount left into the ridingseat on- to the croup (facing outward stridemount left by the opposite side) (Fig. 159); straddleoff for- ward. 2 As Exercise 1, then swing the legs backward into the front-leaning- rest (Fig. 160); straddleoff for- ward. 3 As Exercise 2, from the leaning- rest, shears left backward into Fig. 160. the ridingseat on the croup; push- off backward. 4 Mount as in Exercise 1 into the saddle, then shears left and right backward; dismount left back- ward onto the board and front- vault right. 5 As Exercise 4, with shears left and right forward; dismount back- ward onto the board and rear- vault left. VII . A feint left is as follows : From the rest, the left leg is moved over the neck and around the left arm (the body in the meantime executing a quarter turn right), until the leg is in a horizontal position on the off side of the horse. The return movement takes place immedi- ately (Fig. 161). SIDE HORSE 193 1 Feint left; jump down upon the board and repeat right several times. 2 Feint left and right as a continu- ous movement, without jumping down. 3 Feint left and one half circle right inward and return. 4 As Exercise 3, and a circle right inward. 5 One half circle right forward with both legs (into the backrest) (Fig. 162). Pushoff forward (raising the legs well upwards). 6 As Exercise 5 ; from the backrest one half circle left backward with both legs. Pushoff backward (raising the legs backward). 7 Feint left and one half circle right forward with both legs ; squat backward into the frontstand. Fig. 161. Fig. 162. 8 As Exercise 7, but the squat back- ward into the frontrest, then squat forward with one quarter turn left. VIII 1 One half circle right forward under the left hand into the crossstrad- dle position on the saddle, then turndismount left forward. NOTE. A turndismount is as fol- lows : The right leg being in front, the weight of the body is thrown over onto the right hand. The left leg then describes a half circle forward, the body at the same time executing a quarter turn right and the scholar lands in the crossstand on the off side of the horse in line with the pommel (Fig. 163). 2 As Exercise 1, then turnmount left forward into the ridingseat on the croup (facing the saddle); pushoff backward. 3 As Exercise 2, from the seat dis- 194 GERM A N-AMERICAN G YMNA S TICS mount onto the board ; squat left forward (one leg) and turndis- mount right forward. 4 Jump into the freerest, then squat right forward ; face left about ; turnmount right forward onto the croup. Dismount right with a quarter turn left. 5 One half circle left inward; turn- mount right forward ; dismount onto the board and wolf's vault right forward. Fig. 183. 6 Jump into the freerest, squat for- ward into the backrest, one half circle left inward and immedi- ately turnmount left forward onto the croup. Stride dismount right backward onto the board and straddlevault forward. IX 1 One half circle left forward with both legs (into the backrest), one half circle right inward and re- turn. (The right leg moves backward over the croup into the crossstraddle position in th<- sad- dle, and return.) Pushoff for- ward. 2 As Exercise 1, one half circle right inward, then complete the circle by passing right forward under the left hand. Pushoff forward with one half turn left. 3 Wolf's vault right forward into the backrest ; circle outward right (the right leg passing first under the left hand). Turnmount right forward onto the neck. Stride- mount right onto the croup (Fig. 164), pushoff backward with one half turn left. 4 Wolf's vault left forward into the backrest ; one half circle right inward ; one half turn right; turn- mount left forward onto the neck; stridemount left by the opposite side into the ridingseat in the saddle (facing the croup, the hands grasping the pommels, right forward, the left leg swings around backward and passes under the right hand, landing the body in the saddle). (Similar to Fig. 177, Long Horse.) Repeat this stridemount onto the croup; then dismount tothe left by swing- ing both legs forward and facing right about. 5 Squat forward into the backrest, one half turn left (hopping) squat forward and one half circle left backward with both legs ; one half circle right forward with both legs ; turnmount right for- ward onto the croup. Swing both legs backward and dis- mount to the right with one half turn left. SIDE HOUSE 195 Fig. 164. 1 Jump and swing the legs backward into the freerest; execute a quick sidestraddle and sink into the frontrest. Then circle right in- ward and left inward ; rearvault left. 2 As in Exercise 1, raising the heels backward (Fig. 165). From the frontrest one half circle right in- ward, swing the legs sideways left and right (keep the body well over the horse). Jump off for- ward, when the legs again swing to the left. 3 As in Exercise 1, raising the knees ; one half circle right inward ; then continue the circle with the right leg, at the same time executing a half circle left inward (the left leg crossing over the right); (shears left sideways); one half circle left outward and rearvault left. (When executing the shears, see that the legs are kept per- fectly straight, and that the weight of the body is momen- tarily carried over onto the hand keeping its hold.) As in Exercise 1, with crossstrad- dle ; one half circle right inward ; shears left and right sideways ; turnmount left forward onto the Fij. 165. croup ; feint right and rearvault right. (From the ridingseat on the croup the left hand grasps 196 <: 1.1: MAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS the farthest pommel, the right the second ; the body being raised, the right leg executes the feint, which is immediately followed by the vault over the neck.) Fig. 166. 5 As in Exercise 1, with crossing the legs ; one half circle right inward followed instantly by shears left and right sideways, squat right backward, feint right and rear- vault right with one half turn left. XI 1 Feint right with both legs (Fig. 166) ; then a circle right outward ; sidestraddle stand on the horse (croup and neck), high jump for- ward swinging the arms up. 2 As in Exercise 1, after the circle right jump onto the board, follow- ing immediately with a turn- mount onto the neck (Fig. 167); swing back into the leaningrest and shears left backward (lean forward as far as possible). As in Exercise 2, but the turn- mount takes place from the rest; shearsdismount left backward. As in Exercise 3, but after the mount shears left forward ; then shearsdismount left forward (Fig. 168) (sit back as far as possi- ble, the hands behind, and push- off backward the moment the legs cross). Feint right with both legs ; one half circle left forward with both legs ; hop left about into the frontrest ; feint right and turn- mount right backward (onto the croup); shears left forward and rearvault right over the neck, both hands grasping the farthest pommel. Fig. 167. XII Rearvault left with one half turn left into the crossstand alongside of the neck (lean far over to the left side). SIDE HORSE 197 Fig. 168. 2 Rearvault left with rearmount left into the ridingseat on the neck (help at the left side). Swing both legs backward and squat off forward. 3 Double rearvault left over the croup and neck (Fig. 169). (The body must be kept close to the left arm. After the body has passed over the neck, the right hand is placed on the neck, and the left dropped to the side. The body executes a quarter turn 'left.) (Help at the left side.) 4 Triple rearvault left (Fig. 170) (over the croup, the neck, and the sad- dle). The body exe- cutes a three quarter turn left and comes into a crossstand on the right side of the horse (help at the right side). Fig. 169. 5 As in Exercises 3 and 4, with a feint left. 6 As in Exercises 3 and 4, with a feint left with both legs. Fig. 170. V.ix <; /;/. .V. I .V.I .V Hi: H '. I .V r; y\i .v. 1 > T/f 'X LONG HORSE BY WILLIAM A. STECHEII All exercises begin with a run. 1 Flankvault right. 2 Frontvault right, o Real-vault left. 4 Stridevault right (Fig. 171). (The right leg swings in a circle inward over the horse, and the scholar comes into a crossstand at the left side of the horse. ) Fig. 171. 5 Frontvault with one quarter or one half turn left or right. 6 Rearvault with one quarter or one half turn left or right. 7 Stridevault with one quarter or one half turn left or right. II 1 Jump into the freerest, the hands on the croup (several times). 2 As in Exercise 1, with the hands in the saddle ; sidestraddle and sink in the ridingseat on the croup ; dismount left sideways. 3 Jump, the hands on the neck, into the ridingseat in the saddle (Fig. 172); swing the legs backward into the leaningrest; jump off left sideways with a quarter turn right. 4 Jump as in Exercise 2, hut directly into the leaningrest; jump off left sideways with a half turn right. 5 As is Exercise 3, then straddleoff forward from the ridingseat. 6 As in Exercise 4, then straddleoff from the leaningrest (lean for- ward as far as possible, the fin- gers over the end of the horse). 7 As in Exercise 3, then swing the legs backward into the freerest and straddleoff for- ward. Ill 1 Jump into the freerest, the hands in the saddle ; sink into the ridingseat in the saddle ; swing the legs backward into the free- rest several times, dismount left LONG HORSE 199 sideways with a quarter turn left. 2 As in Exercise 1, swing the legs backward; shears left backward several times; place the hands behind the body, and dismount left sideways with a quarter turn right. 3 As in Exercise 1, place the hands behind the body, and swing the legs forward several times, closing them over the horse ; dis- mount left sideways with a half turn right. 4 As in Exercise 3, then shears right forward sev- eral times; the hands in front, swing the legs back- ward, and with a quarter turn left come into the leaningrest sideways, jumpoff forward. 5 As in Exercise 3 ; then shears right forward and left backward; frontlean- ingrest, the hands on the neck, then shears left backward into the front stand. 6 As in Exercise 5; after the shears forward and backward swing the legs backward into the freer- est, the hands over the end of the horse and shears backward (shearsdismount backward). IV 1 Stridemount right forward into the ridingseat on the croup (facing the board); dismount left side- ways. 2 Stridemount right forward by the opposite side (the right leg passes by the left side, the scholar faces the saddle); dismount left side- ways. 3 As in Exercise 1, landing in the saddle ; Stridemount right forward onto the croup (similar to Fig. 164); pushoff backward. 4 As in Exercise 2 ; repeat onto the neck ; straddleoff forward. 5 As in Exercise 3 ; then flankvault right forward (from the riding- seat over the croup). Fig. 172. 6 As in Exercise 2; then rearvault right forward (over the saddle). 7 As in Exercise 2 ; then frontvault left forward (over the saddle). 8 As in Exercises 6 and 7, with the vaults with one quarter or one half turn left or right. Jump into the frontrest in the sad- dle, on the left side of the horse (Fig. 173); pushoff backward. As in Exercise 1 ; circle with the right leg inward ; jump down and 200 OEnMAN-AMl-:i:iCA.\ '. YM.\ASTK s Fig. 173. Fig. 174. directly up into the freerest; push off backward. 3 As in Exercise 1 ; circle with the right leg outward, jump down and flankvault left forward. 4 As in Exercise 2, after the circle jump down, and rearvault left. 5 As in Exercise 3, after the circle jump down, and rearvault right. 6 As in Exercise 4, with the squat- vault forward (help). 7 As in Exercise 4, with the wolf's vault left forward. 8 As in Exercise 4, with the straddle- vault forward (help). 9 As above, with the vaults with one quarter or one half turns left or right. VI 1 Jump into the freerest with raising the trunk upwards (the trunk and legs at right angles). 2 As in Exercise 1, the head touch- ing the horse, and roll over for- ward into the ridingseat roll forward (Fig. 174) (help at both sides); dismount left sideways. 3 Roll forward lying flat on the horse (help); rise up, dropping the legs on the left side, into the crossseat left ; the hands behind, pushoff forward. 4 Roll forward left obliquely into the crossstand at the left side (help at the left side). 5 Roll forward into the ridingseat; shears for ward; roll backward in- to the frontstand (the body sinks backward rapidly, the hands catching hold of the horse over the head. The legs are then quickly raised upward and back- ward, the hands at the same time pressing the body from the horse) (help at both sides). 6 Roll forward into the ridingseat and then immediately roll back- ward into the stand on the board (help). LONG HORSE VII 1 Long leap into the freerest on the neck ; pushoff left sideways. 2 As in Exercise 1, then straddleoff forward (Fig. 175). 3 As in Exercise 1, straddling off right sideways (before pushing off a quarter turn left is executed, the right leg in front, the left behind) (help). 4 As in Exercise 1, straddling back- ward (with a half turn) (help). 5 As in Exercise 1, with a rearvault left into the crossstand at the left side of the neck. (Lean far over to the left) (help). 6 As in Exercise 1, with squat for- ward (help). 7 As in Exercise 1, with a turnover (handspring) with bent arms (Fig. 176) (help). 8 As in Exercise 7, with straight arms (help). Fig. 175. VIII Jump, immediately swinging the legs forward, the hands behind the body and executing a shears 201 for- left forward (shearsraount ward); straddleoff forward. Shearsmount left forward onto the croup ; stridedisinount right back- ward. Fig. 176. 3 As in Exercise 2, feint right and stridemount right forward by the opposite side (Fig. 177) ; place the hands behind and dismount right sideways. 4 As in Exercise 2, feint right and rearvault right. 6 As in Exercise 2, feint right and rearvault right with a half turn left. 6 As in Exercise 2, feint right and rearvault right with a rearmount into the ridingseat in the saddle (keep the body as closely to the right arm as possible and lean to 202 G EHMAN-AMEBICAN <; YM \ . I > / i< s the right side) ; the hands behind, dismount right sideways. 7 As in Exercise 2; feint right and rearvault right over croup and neck (double rearvault right). IX 1 Jump, and with a half turn left straddlemount backward into the ridingseat on the croup (after the turn lean well forward, rest- ing the hands on the horse in front of the body); dismount left sideways. 2 Jump as above, but instead of sinking into the seat, circle the left leg backward over the horse, and land in the crossstand (stride- vault left backward) (Fig. 178) (help). .'5 As Exercise 2, resting on the left hand, swing the right leg forward at the same time springing off with the left and flankvault right forward (Fig. 179) (also called a fencer's vault). 4 As in Exercise 3, with a frontvault right. 5 As in Exercise 3, swinging the left leg forward and a rearvault left. 6 Lay the springboard at an obtuse angle to the horse, and execute the fencer's mounts and vaults. Help is needed, when vaulting over the saddle and neck. Jump into the siderest on the right side of the horse ; swing the left leg backward executing a three quarter turn left into the riding- seat in the saddle (turnmount backward); the hands behind, dismount right sideways. 2 Turnmount left backward into the Middle; shears left forward; dis- mount right sideways with a quarter turn left. 3 As in Exercise 2, then a quarter turn left (crossstraddle position) and turnmount right forward onto the croup; the hands behind, dismount right sideways with one half turn left. 4 As in Exercise 2, but onto the neck; shears left forward; the hands behind, the fingers over the end of the horse, shears left forward dismount at the same time (shearsdismount forward see Fig. 168) (help). XI 1 Frontvault right into the siderest on the left side of the horse (three quarter turn left); squat forward (help). 2 As Exercise 1 ; feint right and one half circle with both legs left for- ward into the backrest; pushoff forward with one half turn right. 3 As in Exercise 2, from the back- rest, one half circle with both legs right backward into the frontrest; straddle over forward (help). 4 As in Exercise 1, feint right, circle right leg outward and turnmount right backward; front leaningrest on the neck and squat forward (help). 5 As in Exercise 2, from the back- rest one half circle of both legs right backward, turnmount left backward; sink down backward and roll backward over the neck (help). As in Exercise 1, feint right with both legs, and flankvault left. LONG HORSE 203 Fig. 177. Fig. 178. Fig. 179. 204 GERMAN-AMERICA \ <; YM .\ . 1 .s TH '8 7 As in Exercise 0, with front or rear vault. 8 As in Exercise 6, with double rear- vault. XII 1 Free jump (spring off with one foot) into a stand on the horse; fall forward into the front lean- ingrest; straddleoff backward. 2 As in Exercise 1; after the straddle- on*, immediately execute a flank- vault right. 3 As in Exercise 2, with a high frontvault (Fig. 180); also a frontvault with one quarter or one half turn right. 4 As in Exercise 2, with a rearvauli ; also a rearvault with one quarter or one half turn right or left. From the stand on the horse as in Exercise 1, lean forward and turn over forward (handspring) with bent or straight arms (help). From the stand on the horse as in Exercise 1, handstand on the neck and pushoff left sideways into the crossstand (Fig. 181). 7 As in Exercise 6, squatting off from the handstand (help). 8 As in Exercise 6, straddling off (help). VERTICAL LADDER 205 VERTICAL LADDER Bv DR. HENRY HARTUNQ THESE exercises may be arranged into three parts or grades, according to the degree of difficulty, and should be practised accordingly. As it is not the intention to enu- merate, all the exercises possible in a certain set or order, it is left to the option of the teacher to arrange the move- ments belonging to certain related groups into such com- binations as may suit his own purposes. The vertical ladder must be fastened into such a frame or position as to allow free access to it from all sides, since exercises may be practised on all four sides of the appa- ratus. After ascending one side of the ladder it is not absolutely necessary for the pupil to descend on the same side ; but, as it should be the teacher's object to make his lesson as diver- sified and interesting as possible, he may allow the pupil to execute one quarter or one half turn around the ladder, and then descend on the opposite or outer side. There are four distinct holds or positions of the hands to be remembered. 1. Palms downward (the arms in position forward), or forward (the arms in position overhead), the dorsal surface upward or backward (upperhold, ordinary hold). 206 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS 2. Palms upward (the arms forward), or backward (tin- arms overhead), the forearms in supination (umli-r- hold, reversed hold). 3. The palms inward, the dorsal surfaces outward, the radius turned upward in the forward, and back- ward in the upward position of the arms (outer- hold). 4. Palms outward, the dorsal surfaces inward, the arms in state of extreme pronation, the ulna upward in forward position, or backward in upward position of the arms (innerhold). A great variety of holds or positions may be taken on the rounds or the rails of the ladder, or on both. They are : - 1. With both hands, the palms forward on the rounds. 2. With both hands, the palms backward on the rounds. 3. With both hands, the palms inward on the rails. 4. With both hands, the palms outward on the rails. These form the simple and most common holds. Combinations of these may be made in various ways, con- stituting the mixed holds. The movements of the hands in climbing or walking up- ward or downward are executed by having the one hand leading, the other following to the same round, or by having one hand leading, the other passing to the next round or next space on the rail. The movements of the feet are exe- cuted in the same way. 207 LESSON 1. 1 Walking up and down the ladder, the hands on the rails at the height of the shoulders, the right or left hand leading, the other hand following to the same height (Fig. 182), the feet advancing on the rounds in a similar man- ner. 2 Like Exercise 1, with the hands on the rounds. 3 Like Exercise 1, with the limbs of the same side moving simulta- neously. 4 Like Exercise 2, with the limbs of the same side moving simulta- neously. 5 Like Exercise 1, with one hand on the rail, the other on the round. 6 Like Exercise 3, with one hand on the rail, the other on the round . .7-12 Like Exercises 1-6, the advan- cing hand and foot passing to the next round or space instead of the same. Fig. 182. REMARK. These exercises may be practised by placing the hands on the rails, the palms outward or inward, or on the rounds, the palms upward or downward. LESSON 2. 1 Walking up and down the ladder, the hands on the rails, the feet on the rounds, the right hand and left foot leading, the other limbs following to the same rounds or space. 2 The same exercise reversed (the left hand and right foot lead- ing). 3 The Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 4 Like Exercise 1, with the hands on the rounds. 5 Like Exercise 2, with the hands on the rounds. 6 Like Exercise 1, with one hand on the rail, the other on the round. 7-12 Like Exercises 1-6, with the advancing hand and foot passing to the next round or space, in- stead of the same. 1 Walking up and down the ladder, the left hand on the rail, the right hand on the hip, the hand ad- vancing one space, the feet fol- lowing successively (first one, then the other, to the same round). LESSON 3. 2 The same exercise reversed. 3 Like Exercise 1, with the hand on the rounds instead of on the rail. 4 Like Exercise 1, one hand advan- cing alternately with the other (one returning to the hip, while 208 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS the other passes to the next round). 5 Like Exercise 1, the foot and the hand of the same side advancing simultaneously. 6 Like Exercise 5, with the opposite foot and hand. 7, 8 Like Exercises 5, 6, with the hand on the round instead of on the rail. 9 Like Exercise 5, but after simul- taneous movements of the limbs of one side, the other foot passes to the next round, the hand also passing to the next round or space. 10 Like Exercise 9, the limbs of tin- opposite side leading. 11 Any of the previous exercises, but in advancing, the hand changes from the palm outward (on the rails), or from the palm down- ward, to the palm upward (on the rounds). 12 Any of the previous exercises, but while advancing to next round or space, the hand changes from rail to round, or vice reraa. REMARKS. In the exercises of this lesson, or whenever there is only one hand employed, the other hand may be placed either on the hip, the shoulder, or on the back, or in any other position to be determined by the teacher. LESSON 4. Most of the exercises of this lesson may be executed in the same way as indicated in Lessons 1, 2, and 3, variations being brought about by taking more difficult positions of the body and limbs. 1 Walking up and down the ladder, the legs in the squatting position (the knees bent, the body erect). 2 "Walking up and down the ladder, omitting one round or space, the limbs of the same side leading, those of the opposite side follow- ing to the same round or space. 3 Like Exercise 2, the advancing limbs passing to the second higher round or space. 4 Like Exercise 2, the limbs of the opposite sides moving simulta- neously. 5 Like Exercise 3, the limbs of the opposite sides moving simul- taneously. 6 Walking up and down the ladder, taking hold with one hand and one forearm on the rails. 7 Like Exercise 6, taking hold on the rounds. 8 Walking up and down with cross- ing the feet. 9 Walking up and down on the knees, the hands in various positions and holds. 10 Walking up and down in the squatting position, taking hold with only one hand. VERTICAL LADDER 209 LESSON 5. 1 Hopping up and down the ladder on both feet, the hands advan- cing successively to the same round or space. 2 Like Exercise 1, the hands passing alternately to the next round. 3 Like Exercise 1, the hands passing simultaneously to the next round or space. 4 Like Exercise 1, but on one foot, the other leg being extended. 5 Like Exercise 2, with only one foot. 6 Hopping up and down the ladder on one foot, taking hold of the rail with the hand of the oppo- site side. 7 Like Exercise 6, with the hand on the round instead of on the rail. 8 Like Exercise 6, with the hand changing from rail to the round, and vice versa, while advancing. 9, 10, and 11. Like Exercises 6, 7, and 8, using the hand and foot of the same side. 12 Hopping up and down in the squatting position, with various holds of the hands. LESSON 6. Position in front of the ladder. Jump into the hanging position back turned towards the ladder, the hands on one round, the palms forward or backward. In this position : 1 a. Raise the right knee forward (bending the leg to a right angle, the toes pointed down- ward ) . b. Raise the left knee. c. Raise both knees, repeating each movement several times. 2 Like Exercise 1, raising the legs forward horizontally (Fig. 183), repeated several times. 3 Spread the legs to a straddle posi- tion sideways and close; repeat. 4 Cross the legs, one above the other; repeat. 5 Place one hand on the hip and re- turn to its former hold, the body being suspended by one arm. 6 Like Exercise 6, changing from one hand to the other. 7 Like Exercise 6, at the same time Fig. 183. changing the hold of the hands from the palms forward to the palms backward, and vice versa. 210 (,' /:/.' VAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS LESSON 7. 1 Walking up and down the ladder, the ladder between the legs, with any of the various holds and ad- vances (Fig. 184). 2 As Exercise 1, but hopping instead of walking. 3 Walking upward in any of the various ways described and slid- ing downward, the legs strad- dling the rails, the hands pass- ing from one to the next round (Fig. 185). 4 As Exercise 3, the hands sliding simultaneously to the next round or space. 6 As Exercise 3, with the legs ex- tended downward. 6 As Exercise 4, with the legs ex- tended downward on one side. 7 As Exercise 3, with the legs closed and bent backward in a right angle to the thigh (raising heels). 8 As Exercise 7, the hands sliding simultaneously. 9 Hopping upward in any of the various ways described, and slid- ing downward. Fig. 184. Fig. 185. Fig. 186. Fig. 187. LESSON 8. 1 Walking up and down the ladder 3 As Exercise 1, with the arms down backward, the arms overhead, and at the sides, the hands tak- and the hands on the rounds ing hold on the rounds (Fig. (Fig. 186). 187). 2 As Exercise 1, with the hands on 4 As Exercise 3, with the hands on the sides. the rails. 211 5 Walking up and down the ladder backward having one arm over- head, the other one downward, the hands on the rounds or rails. 6 Change from the rear standing position on one round to the front position, by twisting through under one arm. 7 Walking upward as in Exercise 1, then execute one half turn into the front position and slide down- ward. 8 Walking up and down by continu- ally circling around the ladder. i, LESSON 9. Fig. 188. Fig. 189. 1 Sit on one round facing the ladder and raise the arms upward, the hands in various holds on the rounds or rails, and change posi- tion onto the next round. Re- peat several times. 2 Sit on the seventh or eighth round, let go with the hands and lower the body gradually, until coming to a hanging position on the knees (Fig. 188). Return to sit- ting position. 3 As Exercise 2. After bending backward into the hanging posi- tion take hold of the round in reach and extend the legs upward on the opposite side of the ladder, supporting the body on the arms (Fig. 189). Return to the hang- ing and sitting position. 4 As Exercise 3, but after taking hold of the round in reach, remove the legs slowly from between the rounds, extend them upwards, and turn over, landing on the feet. 5 Sit on one round and hook the feet under one of the lower rounds. Lower the body backward gradu- ally until it assumes a horizontal position, the arms folded on the chest or raised upward (Fig. 190). Return. Fig. 190. As Exercise 5, but raise the arms upward and lower the body grad- ually backward through the hori- zontal position and downward, the arms and the body having the same direction. 212 ','/;/; VAN-AMERICAN '/ YM \.IST1C8 LESSON 10. 1 Jump into the hanging position, facing the ladder, the hands on the rounds, the legs in the strad- dle position extended over the sides of. the ladder. Climb up and down, one hand leading, the other following on the same round. 2 As Exercise 1, taking hold of the rails. 3 As Exercise 1, with one hand on one round, the other on the rail. 4, 5, and 6. As Exercises 1, 2, and 3, with the hands passing alter- nately to the next higher round or space (hand over hand). 7 Climb upward, but sliding down- ward, the legs placed around the rails, the hands sliding simul- taneously on the rounds. 8 As Exercise 7, but in sliding down- ward, take hold on the rails. 9 As Exercise 7, but in sliding keep the legs extended and closed, or in the straddle position. 10 As Exercise 9, the hands taking hold on the rails. LESSON 11. Position facing the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on the rails, hop up and down, the legs extended and rest- ing in the straddle position on the sides. 2 As Exercise 1, with the hands on the rounds. 3 As Exercise 1, hop downward with only one hand, the other hand placed on the hip. 4 As Exercise 2, hop downward with only one hand, the other arm raised sideways. 5 As Exercise 1, the hands changing from the rails to the rounds, and vice versa. Q As Exercise 3, with the right and left hand changing alternately from round to round in hopping downward. 7 As Exercise 3, but in hopping downward, the hand changes from the round to the rail, or vice versa. LESSON 12. 1 Walking up and down the ladder, skipping two rounds, the right foot beginning, the left following to the same round. The hands move on the rounds in a similar way. 2 As Exercise 1, with the hands on the rails. 3 As Exercise 1, the hands moving simultaneously. 4 As Exercise 2, the hands moving simultaneously. 5 Hopping up and down the ladder on both feet, skipping one round, the hands on the rounds or rails. 6 As Exercise 5, hopping on one foot only. 7 As Exercise 5, taking hold with one hand only. VERTICAL LADDER 213 8 As Exercise 6, changing from one foot to the other, alternately. 9 Hopping up and down the ladder on both knees, the hands moving simultaneously on the rounds or rails. 10 As Exercise 9, but with hold of only one hand. 11 As Exercise 9, but on one knee only, the other leg extended. 12 As Exercise 10, but on one knee only, the other leg extended. Fig. 191. Fig. 192. LESSON 13. 1 Jump into the rest, both hands on one round, the legs extended in the straddle position, resting on the rails (Fig. 191). Return to the standing position and repeat by advancing the hands to the next higher round. 2 Walk upward and jump into the rest, the hands on the eighth round, lower the body slowly into the hanging position, by bending the arms gradually, the legs slid- ing down on the rails. 3 As Exercise 2, but keep the arms extended, while sliding down- ward into the hanging position. 4 From the rest, lower the body slowly until the extended arms assume a horizontal position and return to the rest. 5 From the rest, bend and straighten the arms repeatedly. 6 From the rest, climb up and down, one hand following the other to the same round. 7 As Exercise 6, but hand over hand. 8 Climb up and down, hanging by one hand and supporting witn the other (Fig. 192). The hands move alternately. 214 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS LESSON 14. 1 Walking up and down the ladder backwards, taking hold with only one hand on a round or rail, the other hand on the hip. 2 Hopping up and down the ladder backwards, on both feet, the hands following overhead on the rounds or rails. 3 As Exercise 2, with the arras down- ward, at the sides, the hands tak- ing hold on the rails or rounds. 4 As Exercise 2, but on one foot only. 5 As Exercise 3, but on one foot only. 6 Climb up and down the ladder backwards, the hands on the rounds, the legs extended In the straddle position over the rails, or closed. 7 As Exercise 0, but raising the knees forward, while climbing. 8 As Exercise 6, raising the legs for- ward to a horizontal position. Fig. 193. Fig. 194. LESSON 15. Flag sideways, vertically (Fig. 193). (The body is suspended sideways, vertically, by one hand on one round, the leg of the same side bracing against another round. The other limbs are extended in the opposite directions. ) Dimin- ish the space between the hand and foot, by moving the hand or foot to the next round. 2 Flag sideways on the feet, the body in a horizontal position (Fig. 194). (One foot braces against one round below, the other foot is hooked under a round or fas- tened by means of a strap around the ankle.) The body must be lowered into a horizontal posi- tion (sideways). 3 Flag sideways, horizontally on the VERTICAL LADDER 215 hands, both arms being extended, one being in the hanging, the other in the supporting position on the rounds, the body is in a horizontal position (Fig. 195). 4 From the position facing the side of the ladder, climb upward and downward, the hands on the rounds, the legs extended down- ward, and closed or in the straddle position. 5 As Exercise 4, with the legs ex- tended in the straddle position and raised forward horizontally, the ladder between them. 6 As Exercise 5, with the legs closed and raised forward to a horizontal position on one side of the ladder. 7 As Exercise 4, with the back turned toward the ladder. 8 As Exercise 6, but hopping upward, the hands on the rounds or rails. Fig. 195. GERMAN-AMERICAN <;YUXA8TWS INCLINED LADDER THE ladder is inclined to an angle of from forty-five to seventy degrees. Most of the exercises already described for practice on the vertical ladder may also be executed on the slanting ladder, especially the climbing and walking movements. In order to save space and avoid repetition, the teacher is referred to the Lessons 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 12, 13, and 14 of the foregoing Part. It should not be forgotten, that whenever an exercise is described with only one kind of hold or position of the hands or feet, it should also be practised with all the other holds or positions which the exercise may permit. LESSON i. The exercises of this lesson are to be executed on the under side, from the position underneath and facing the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, 4 As Exercise 8, but spread the legs the hands on the rails, and re- to the crossstraddle position (one turn to the standing position. leg forward, the other backward) Repeat, and jump to the next and close. Repeat several times, higher space. 5 Jump into the hanging position as 2 As Exercise 1, but grasp a round. in Exercise 1, then raise In repeating grasp the next a. The right knee forward, higher round. b. The left knee forward. 3 As Exercise 1, with the back turned c. Both knees forward. towards the ladder. In the hang- 6 Jump into the hanging position as ing position spread the legs side- in Exercise 2, then raise ways to the straddle position and a. The right foot backward, bend- close. Repeat several times. ing the knee to an acute angle, INCLINED LADDER 217 the thigh remaining vertical and the knees locked. b. The left foot to same position. c. Both feet simultaneously to the same position (Fig. 196). 7 Jump into the hanging position as in Exercise 3, and raise a. The right leg sideways, the left remaining in a vertical posi- tion. b. The left leg sideways, the right remaining in a vertical posi- tion. c. The right leg sideways in front of the left leg. d. The left leg sideways in front of the right leg. 8 Jump into the hanging position as in Exercise 3, and raise o. The right leg forward to a hori- zontal position. b. The left leg forward to a hori- zontal position. c. Both legs forward simultane- ously to a horizontal position. 9 Jump into the hanging position, as in Exercise 1, bend the arms to a right angle, and straighten. Repeat several times. 10 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on the rails, or on one round, and reverse the hold with a. The right hand, and return. 6. The left hand, and return. c. The right an.l left hands alter- nately, and return. d. Both hands simultaneously, and return. 11 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on a round, and change the hold with a. The right hand to the rail, and return. b. The left hand to the rail, and return. Fig. 196. c. The right and the left hand alternately to the rail, and return. d. Both hands simultaneously, and return. 12 Jump into the hanging position and swing the legs forward and backward, the body remaining firm, and the legs closed and well extended (shortswing). LESSON 2. Position underneath and facing the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the arm sideways downward facing the ladder, the hands on the rails. Release the hold, a. With the right hand, and lower to the side, and return. Repeat several times. 6. With the left hand, and return. 218 GERM A N-A M ERIC AN G YMNA STICS 2 As in Exercise 1, \\ith tin- hands on one round, lowering a. The right arm forward, down- ward, and return. b. The left arm forward, downward, and return. Fig. 197. 3 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on the rails, and swing the body sideways, quickly rais- ing and returning the hand of the side towards which the body swings (Fig. 197). 4 As Exercise 3, with the hands on one round, and reverse the hold with the right hand, when swing- ing to the right, and the left hand, when swinging to tin- left. 5 As Exercise 3, but swing the body in a circle. 6 As Exercise 3, changing the hands from the rails to the rounds al- ternately while swinging. 7 From the hanging position, the hands on the rails, swing the body sideways, and climb up- ward and downward, the hands moving alternately to the next space. 8 As Exercise 7, with the hands grasping on the rounds instead of on the rails. 9 As Exercise 7, with one hand on the round, the other on one rail, the hands moving alternately to the next higher round or space. 10, 11, and 12. As Exercises 7, 8, and 9, but from the hanging position back turned towards the ladder. LESSON 3. Position underneath and facing the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on the rails, place both feet on one round so as i,o have the body and legs extended and in the same direction, the arms also straightened. Bend and straighten the arms alternately (Fig. 198). Repeat several times. 2 Take the position as in Exercise 1, with both hands on one round. Place a. The right on the hip, and return. 6. The left hand on the hip, and re- turn. Fig. 198. INCLINED LADDER 219 Eepeat each movement several times. 3 Take the position as in Exercise 1, the hands on the rails, the palms inward. Reverse the position of the hands simultaneously and re- turn, bending the arms slightly while executing the movement. Repeat several times. 4 As Exercise 3, with both hands on one round. Repeat several times. 5 Take the position as in Exercise 1. The hands remaining firmly on the rails or the rounds, step upward, bending the body, the feet passing on the rounds toward the hands as high as possible, and return. 6 As Exercise 5, the feet remaining in position, while the hands pass downward on the rounds or rails. 7 As Exercise 5, with both feet ad- vancing simultaneously (hop- 10 8 As Exercise 6, with both hands sliding downward simultane- ously. 9 As Exercise 7, but on one foot only, the other leg extended and raised forward at the side of the ladder. As Exercise 8, with only one foot remaining in position on the round, the other leg extended and raised forward in posi- tion. 11 From the position as in Exercise 1, advance the feet upward into the squatting position, then al- ternately straighten and bend the knees, the hands remaining in position. LESSON 4. Position underneath and facing the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on the rails or on one round. Climb up and down, the hands passing alternately to the same round or space, the body and legs remaining extended in the hanging position. 2 As Exercise 1, but the hands pass alternately to the next higher round or space (hand over hand). 3 As Exercise 1, with one hand on one rail, the other on one round. Reverse the position of the hands in climbing downward. 4 As Exercise 1, changing the holds of the hands alternately from the rails to the rounds, and vice versa. 5 As Exercise 1, but while climbing reverse the position of the hands Fig. 199. 220 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS (from palms forward to palms backward, and vice versa} on the rounds, and (from palms in- ward to palms outward, and vice versa} on the rails. As Exercise 1, keeping the arms bent to a right angle while climb- ing (Fig. 199). 7-12. As Exercises 1-6, in the hang- ing position, back turned towards the ladder. LESSON 5. The exercises of this lesson are to be executed on the upper side of the ladder from the position in front of and facing the ladder. 1 Walking upward on the rounds, the hands on the hips (Fig. 200). On the top of the ladder take a sitting position, facing the ladder, the legs around the sides, and slide down backward, the hands passing down alternately on the rounds or rails. Fig. 200. Walking upward as in Exercise 1, raising the arms forward in posi- tion. On the top, face left or right about,- take a sitting posi- tion, the legs around the sides, and slide down forward, the hands passing behind the body on the rounds or rails. 3 Walking upward as in Exercise 1, raising the arms sideways in posi- tion. On the top take a lying position forward, the legs ex- tended in the straddle position over the sides, and slide down- ward, the hands passing alter- nately on the rounds or rails. 4 As Exercise 2, raising the arms overhead in position. On the top face right or left about, take a lying position on the back, the legs extended in a straddle posi- tion over the sides, the arms overhead on the rails or rounds, and slide slowly downward. 5 As Exercise 1, folding the arms on the chest while walking upward. Take a straddleseat and " slide downward. In the sitting posi- tion, take hold with only one hand on one rail or round, the other hand is placed on the hip or shoulder. 6 As Exercise 2, folding the arms on the back in walking upward. In sliding downward, place the hands in front of the body on the rails or rounds, the hand:, INCLINED LADDER passing alternately to the same rail or round. 7 As Exercise 6, in sliding down- ward the hands passing alter- nately to the next round or space. 8 As Exercise 6, in sliding down- ward the hands sliding simulta- neously to the next round or space. 9 As Exercise 6, in sliding downward fold the arms on the chest. 10 As Exercise 1, on the top change to the hanging position on the under side of the ladder and walk downward, the feet pass- ing on the rounds, the hands on the rails. 11 As Exercise 10, slide downward on the under side of the ladder, the legs are placed around the rails, the hands pass alternately on the rounds. 12 As Exercise 10, climb downward on the under side of the ladder, the body in the hanging posi- tion, the hands passing down alternately on the rails. LESSON 6. Position underneath and facing the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on one round or on the rails. Place the feet on one round so as to keep the body and legs extended. Walking up and downward, the hands and the feet moving alternately to the same round or space. 2 As Exercise 1, the hands and the feet passing alternately to the next round or space. 3 As Exercise 1, the limbs of the same side moving simultaneously, those of one side leading, the other following to the same round or space. 4 As Exercise 1, the limbs of the op- posite sides moving simultane- ously, passing to the next higher round or space. 5 Walking upward on the under side of the ladder in any of the pre- viously described ways. In mov- ing downward place both legs around the sides of the ladder, the hands move alternately on the rails or rounds. 6 As Exercise 5, the hands also mov- ing simultaneously on the rounds or rails. 7 Jump into the hanging position and place one leg around the side of the ladder, the other on one round. Climb upward by mov- ing the hands and feet alter- nately. In passing downward reverse the position of the legs. 8 Jump into the hanging position and place both legs around the sides of the ladder. Climb up- ward by moving the hands and the legs alternately. 9 As Exercise 8, the hands sliding simultaneously upward. On the top of the ladder quit the hold with the legs and assume the hanging position. Jump to the floor. 10 Climb upward in any of the various ways mentioned. On 090 '/ /:/; MA N-AMER1CAN G YMNAST1CS the top change the position from underneath to ahove the ladder, by climbing around one of the sides. Take the sitting posi- tion, back turned towards the ladder, then bend forward, catch- ing hold of the rounds, sup- porting the body on the hands extend the legs upward in strad- dle position over the sides, and walk downwards (in the front leaningrest), the hands moving to the same round or space (Fig. 201). 11 As Exercise 10, but, in walking downward on the hands, move the hands alternately to the next round or space. 12 As Exercise 10, but in walking downward on tin- hands, hop with both hands sininllanrniisly to the next round or space. Fig. 2C1. LESSON 7. Position underneath the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position facing the ladder, the hands on one round, the palms turned backward. Bend the arms to a right angle and climb up and downward (hand over hand). 2 As Exercise 1, with the back turned towards the ladder, and the hands on the rails. 3 From the position sideways under- neath the ladder, jump into the hanging position on one of the rails, and climb sideways upward and downward, the higher hand leading, the other following. 4 As Exercise 3, crossing the hands in advancing. 5 As Exercise 1, with the hands omitting one round or space in advancing. 6 As Exercise 2, raising the .legs for- ward to a horizontal position while climbing. 7 As Exercise 4, with the hands on two rounds instead of one side, and raise the knees forward in position, the legs being bent to right angles. 8 As Exercise 3, with one hand on one rail, the other on one round, and the feet raised backward, the knees bent to a right angle. The hands move alternately. 9 As Exercise 1, swing the body slightly forward and backward. The hands advance at the end of each backward movement. 10 As Exercise fl, but the back turned toward the ladder. The hands advance at the end of each for- ward movement. 1 1 As Exercise 1 , swinging the body sideways. 12 As Exercise 2, swinging the body sideways. INCLINED LADDER 223 LESSON 8. Position underneath and facing the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on the rails. Hop up and downward, the body and legs re- maining quiet. 2 As Exercise 1, with the hands mov- ing on the rounds. 3 As Exercise 1, with one hand on one round, the other on one rail. Keverse the hold of the hands in passing downward. 4 As Exercise 1, but while advancing to the next round reverse the hold of the hands. 5 As Exercise 2, but while advancing to the next round, reverse the hold of the hands simultaneously. 6 As Exercise 3, but while advancing change the hold of the hands simultaneously, one hand from the round to the rail, the other from the rail to the round, i Jump into the hanging position sideways, both hands on one of the rails, hop sideways up and downward. 8 As Exercise 7, with the hands on two rounds, one arm bent, the other extended. 9 As Exercise 7, with one hand on one round, the other on one rail. On the top, change the position to the opposite side of the ladder, and change the posi- tion of the hands. 10, 11, 12. As Exercises 1, 2, and 3, with the back turned toward the ladder. LESSON 9. Exercises on the upper side of the ladder. Position in front of and facing the ladder. 1 Take the lying position on the lad- der, face downward, the hands overhead on one round, the legs extended in the straddle position over the sides. Climb upward, and downward, the hands pass- ing alternately to the same or to the next round. 2 As Exercise 1, the hands passing simultaneously to the next round. 3 As Exercise 1, but in advancing, the hands change alternately from the rounds to the rails, and vice versa. 4 As Exercise 2, the hands changing simultaneously from the rounds to the rails, and vice versa. 5-8. As Exercises 1-4, but in the lying position backward, face upward. 9 From the position forward, facing the ladder, support the body on both hands on one. round (front leaningrest), the feet resting on the sides. Climb up- ward and downward, the hands passing alternately to the same or to the next round (Fig. 202). 10. As Exercise 9, both hands advan- cing simultaneously to the next round or space. 11 As Exercise 9, but in the position of support, the back turned toward the ladder, the body and 224 QBRMAN-AMEHWAN GFJf.Y.I > / /' x legs well extended (rear leaning- rest), the head rather backward than forward (Fig. HO:'.)) tne hands advancing alternately on the rails or rounds. 12 As Exercise 11, both hands pass- ing simultaneously to the next round or space. Fig. 202. Fig. 203. LESSON 10. Exercises on the upper side of the ladder. Position back turned towards the ladder. 1 Walking upward and backward, the feet and the hands on the rounds, (rear leaningrest), skipping one round in advancing. The limbs of the same side begin, those of the opposite side follow to the same round. 2 As Exercise 1, the limbs of the op- posite sides beginning ( right hand and left foot), the other limbs passing to the second higher rounds. 3 As Exercise 1, both hands moving simultaneously. 4 As Exercise 1, taking hold with only one hand, the other is placed on the hips. 5 Hop upward and backward on one or both legs, omitting one round. The hands pass simultaneously to the next round or space. 6 As Exercise 5, on one or both legs, taking hold with only one hand, the other is placed on the hip. 7 Walking forward upward, and backward downward, without taking hold with the iiands (which are placed on the hips or in any of the various positions mentioned previously), the feet passing from round to round. 8 As Exercise 7, but backward up- ward and forward downward. INCLINED LADDER 225 As Exercise 8, but on the top face right or left about, and walk down backward. 10 As Exercise 7, omitting one or two rounds with every step. 11 As Exercise 8, omitting one or two rounds with every step. LESSON 11. Exercises on the upper side of the ladder. Position in front of and facing the ladder. 1 Take the lying position, facing the ladder, the hands over the head on one round, and the legs extended in the straddle position over the sides. Raise the body upward into the position of sup- port, holding the arms well ex- tended and bracing firmly against the round. Return into the lying position, reversing the pre- vious movement. 2 As Exercise 1, travelling up and down the ladder. 3 As Exercise 1, using only one arm for support, the other hand grasp- ing the wrist of the bracing arm. 4 As Exercise 1, with only one arm, the other hand resting on the hip. Travel up and down the ladder by using the arms alter- nately. 5 Take the position of support on only one arm, the other hand on the hip, the feet resting on the sides. Hop upward in this posi- tion, changing to the opposite hand in hopping downward. 6 Take the lying position facing the ladder, the head downward, the legs extended in the straddle position upward. Support the body on the hands, the arms extended. (See Fig. 201.) Walk up and downward, the hands moving alternately to the same round. 7 As Exercise 6, the hands moving alternately to the next round. 8 As Exercise 6, hopping up and downward (both hands moving simultaneously to the next round). 9 As Exercise 8, the hands on the sides, in moving upward, and hopping on only one hand, in coming downward. 10 Take the sitting position, facing the ladder, the legs extended and spread sideways in the strad- dle position, the hands on one round. Support the body on the hands, and walk up and downward, the hands passing alternately to the same round. 11 As Exercise 10, the hands passing alternately to the next round. LESSON 12. Exercises on the under side of the ladder. Position underneath and back turned towards the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the back turned towards the lad- der, and place the feet on one round so as to have the body and the legs well extended ( Fig. 204). Walk upward and down- 22G O Eli MAN- AM ERIC Afi G YMNA .sv/r.s ward, the hands and feet moving alternately to the same round. 2 As Exercise 1, the limbs of the same sides moving simultane- ously. Fig. 204. 3 As Exercise 1, the limbs of the opposite sides moving simultane- ously. 4 As Exercise 1, the hands or the feet advancing simultaneously. 5 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on one round or the rails. Hop upward and down- ward, omitting one round or space. 6 As Exercise 5, at the same time changing the position of the hands from the rounds to the rails, and vice versa. 7 Jump into the hanging position on one hand, on round or rail, the other hand on the hip. Hop upward and downward. 8 As Exercise 7, changing the hand from the round to the rail in ad- vancing. 9 As Exercise 7, hopping sidc\v;iys upwards, the hand on one rail. On the top, change to the oppo- site side, and hop downward on the other hand. 10 Jump into the hanging position facing the ladder, the hands on the rails or on the rounds. Turn the body over backward, the legs passing between the arms, and extend the legs upward (Fig. . 205). Holding the body in this position, climb upward and downward. 11 As Exercise 1, in the hanging position, back turned toward the ladder, turn the body over completely, legs extended down- ward. Climb upward and downward, the hands moving alternately. Fig. 205. 12 As Exercise 11, the hands moving simultaneously in coming down- ward. HORIZONTAL LADDER 227 HORIZONTAL LADDER BY DR. HENRY HARTUNG MOST of the exercises on the under side of the inclined ladder can be practised on the horizontal ladder. The teacher, therefore, is referred to the respective exercises in the pre- vious part. The ladder must be raised to such a height, that when the body is in the hanging position, with the arms fully stretched, the extended feet will not touch the floor. It should also be remembered, that whenever an exercise permits, it should be executed with all the different holds and positions of the hands. LESSON i. Position underneath and at one end of the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, both hands on one round or on the rails. Raise the knees for- ward and turn the body over 2 As Exercise 1, then push the feet through the space between two rounds and hang on the knees, Fig. 206. backward, halfways, placing both feet against one round, and re- turn (Fig. 206). Repeat several times. Fig. 207. 228 GERM A N-A MEHICA N G YMNA S TICS letting go with both hands (Fig. 207). The body assumes a verti- cal position. Return. Fig. 208. 3 As Exercise 1, but from the hang- ing position sideways, facing in- ward, both hands on one of the rails. 4 As Exercise 2, but from the hang- ing position sideways facing out- ward, hanging on one rail. 5 As Exercise 3, while in the hanging position on the knees, swing the body fore and backward, the arms either overhead or folded on the chest. 6 As Exercise 2, at the end of the ladder swing the body fore and backward. At the end of the backward swing quickly remove the legs from the ladder, and jump to the standing position (kneedrop). 7 As Exercise 1, retaining the hold, then straighten the legs upward, bringing the body into a vertical position (Fig. 208). Ben.l and straighten the arms several times. Return. 8 As Exercise 1, then straighten the legs upward, the body and the legs in a vertical position, turn the trunk right and left. Re- turn. 9 As Exercise 1, but hold with the toes of both feet on to a round back of the hands, press the body backward as far as possi- ble (nest) (Fig. 209). Re- turn. 10 As Exercise 9. taking hold with only one foot, the other leg ex- tended backward in a horizontal position. 11 As Exercise 1, then turn the body over completely backward into the hanging position backward, the legs extended downward. Let go with both hands, and jump to the floor. Fig. 209. 12 As Exercise 11, but without touch- ing the rounds with the feet in turning over backward, then return to the hanging position forward, and repeat. HORIZONTAL LADDER 229 LESSON 2. Position sideways facing inward at one end of the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position on one of the rails. Move the right hand sideways repeatedly until the hands are apart at full reach (Fig. 210). Return the hand to the starting position. Repeat the same with the other hand. 2 As Exercise 1, moving the hands simultaneously. 3 As Exercise 1, moving the hands alternately. 4 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, cross one hand over the other, and return. The same with the other hand, and simultaneously with both hands. 5 As Exercise 1, but instead of re- turning the hand to the starting position, advance the other hand to the hand first moved, and con- tinue these movements, thus trav- elling sideways from one end of the ladder to the other. 6 As Exercise 5, the hands moving sideways on the rounds, instead of the rails. 7 As Exercise 5, moving the hands alternately on the rail in the same direction to the end of the ladder, and return to the start- ing-point. 8 As Exercise 7, with the hands on the rounds, and as far apart as possible. 10 As Exercise 7, with one hand always crossing over the other in travelling sideways. As Exercise 7, the hands moving simultaneously sideways on one side. Fig. 210. 11 As Exercise 10, both hands mov- ing simultaneously sideways on the rounds. 12. As Exercise 10, with one hand on one round, the other on the rail, both moving simultaneously to the next round or space. LESSON 3. Position underneath and in the middle of the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on the rails, the palms forward. Quit the hold with one hand and turn the body forward one quarter turn around the other arm, taking hold of the 230 t; i:i: MAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS rail with both hands. Return to the first position, and repeat with the other arm. 2 As Exercise 1, turning one quarter turn backward around one arm, and return. 3 As Exercise 1, with a half turn at the same time swinging the ex- tended arm downward and for- ward upward (describing a half circle), taking hold on the rail as far away from the stationary hand as possible. Return and repeat with the other arm. 4 As Exercise 3, turning backward, circling the arm downward and then backward upward. 5 As Exercise 1, hanging with both hands on one round, the palms forward. Turn one quarter turn forward, the hand changing to another round, and return. 6 As Exercise 5, turning backward around one arm, and return. 7 As Exercise 5, circling one arm downward and forward to a round in farthest reach. Return, and repeat with the other arm. 8 As Exercise 7, turning and cir- i-liiig the arm backward. 9 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, but the palms turned backward. Turn one quarter turn back- ward around one arm, circling the other arm, and taking hold on the same rail which the sta- tionary hand holds. Return, and repeat with the other arm. 10 From the hanging position on one side, facing the ladder, palms backward, turn three quarters turn around one arm backward, the other arm circles backward upward, taking hold of the op- posite rail. Return. 11 Hanging position on one round, the palms forward. Turn one half turn forward around one arm, circling the other arm for- ward upward, taking hold on the same round. Return. 12 As Exercise 11, but the palms backward and turn backward around one arm. LESSON 4. Position sideways facing outward at one end of the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, both hands on one rail, the palms forward. Turn one half turn forward to the right around the right arm, and advance left hand on the same rail, beyond the right, the palm forward. Then turn one half turn forward around the left arm, changing hold with the right hand; con- tinue this travelling from one end of the ladder to the other. 2 As Exercise 1, beginning from position palms backward, and turn one half turn backward instead of forward, being care- ful to always take the position, the palms backward, when re- treating. 3 As Exercise 1, the hands on two rounds, the palms inward. Exe- cute one half turn backward con- tinually, and alternately around the right and left arm, always HORIZONTAL LADDER 231 placing the moving hand in posi- tion, the palms inward. 4 As Exercise 3, but the palms out- ward and turn forward, always placing the advancing hand in position, the palms outward. 5 First movement like that of Exer- cise 1, taking hold with the advancing hand, the palm back- ward. Then execute one half turn backward around the first arm moved, and take a hold with the advancing hand, the palm forward, thus describing a whole circle in the same direction. Continue this travelling from one end of the ladder to the other. 6 As Exercise 5, beginning with the position palms backward, and reverse the movements and posi- tions of the hands, continually describing circles backward. 7 As Exercise 5, with the hands on two rounds, the palms inward. 1st movement : turn one half turn backward around one arm, change the hold palm outward. 2d movement: turn one half turn forward around the other arm, change the hold, the palms in- ward. Travel in this manner from one end of the ladder to the other. 8 As Exercise 7, beginning with the position, the palms outward, and turn first backward, then for- ward. 9-16 As Exercises 1-8, swinging the advancing arm in a circle down- ward and upward, to the farthest reach on the rails or rounds, thus skipping several rounds or spaces. LESSON 5. Position sideways facing inward at one end of the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position on one of the rails and swing the body sideways, raising right and left hand quickly when swing- ing to the corresponding sides. 2 As Exercise 1, raising both hands simultaneously and return quickly, at each sideways move- ment of the body. 3 As Exercise 1, travel sideways from one end of the ladder to the other, both hands advancing al- ternately in the same direction. 4 As Exercise 1, reversing the hold of the hands alternately when swinging sideways. 5 As Exercise 1, alternately crossing one arm over the other and re- turn. 6 As Exercise 4, at the same time travelling from one end of the ladder to the other. 7 As Exercise 5, and travel from one end of the ladder to the other. 8 As Exercise 2, and advance both hands simultaneously, travelling from one end of the ladder to the other. 9 As Exercise 3, with the hands on the rounds, both hands advan- cing alternately in the same direction. 10 As Exercise 6, with the hands on the rounds, and change from palms inward to palms outward, when advancing. 11 As Exercise 7, with both hands on the rounds. 12 As Exercise 8, both hands moving simultaneously on the rounds. GERMAN-AMERK '. 1 V G YMNASTICS LESSON 6. Position underneath and at one end, facing the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on the sides, the palms inward. o. 1st movement: Advance the right hand one space, and raise the right knee forward to a right angle (Fig. 211). Fig. 211. 2d movement : Advance the left hand to the same space, and straighten the leg downward. 6. The same movement, but with the left leg and left hand. Continue alternately to the end of the ladder. 2 Hanging position, the hands on one round, the palms forward, a. 1st movement: Advance the right hand to the next round, and raise the right leg forward horizontally. 2d movement: Advance the left hand to the same round, an.l lower the leg. b. As a, but with the left leg and left hand. Continue. 3 As Exercise 1, with the palms out- ward. Raise the feet back war.!, bending the leg to a right angle. Continue. 4 As Exercise 2, with the palms back- ward. Raise the legs sideways, and return alternately. Con- tinue. 5 1st movement: As in Exercise 1. 2d movement: pass the left hand to the next round, straighten the right leg, at the same time rais- ing the left knee. Continue. 6 1st movement : As in Exercise 2. 2d movement: pass the left hand to the next round, and lower the right leg, at the saiue time raise the left leg forward. Continue. 7 1st movement : As in Exercise 3. 2d movement: pass the left hand to the next space, lower the right foot, at the same time raise the left one backward. Con- tinue. 8 1st movement: As in Exercise 4. 2d movement: pass the left hand to the next round and lower the right leg, at the same time raise the left leg sideways. 9-16 As Exercises 1-8, beginning from the hanging position at one end of the ladder, the back turned towards the ladder. All move- ments of the legs, however, re- main as in the previous exer- cises. HORIZONTAL LADDER 233 LESSON 7. Position underneath and at one end of the ladder, facing it. 1 Jump into the hanging position on the rails, the palms inward. Hop forward and backward on both hands (the hands move simul- taneously forward to the next space), and raise both knees forward to right angles on the first movement of the hands, straighten the legs on the second. Continue. 2 As Exercise 1, with the hands on one round, the palms forward, and raise both legs forward to a hori- zontal position on the first move- ment, lower the legs on the second. Continue. 3 As Exercise 1, with the hands on the rails, the palms outward, on the first movement raise both feet backward, bending the knees to right angles. 2d movement: Straighten the legs downward. Continue. 4 As Exercise 2, with the palms back- ward. On the first movement bend both feet upward (the legs remain extended). On the second movement straighten the feet. Continue. 5 As Exercise 1, with one hand on one rail, the palm inward, the other on one round, the palm forward, hop fore and backward in this position. On the first movement spread the legs sideways to a straddle posi- tion. On the second movement close the legs. 6 As Exercise 5, with one hand on one rail, the palm outward, the other on one round, the palm backward. Hop fore and back- ward. On the first movement spread the legs to a cross straddle position, one leg forward, the other back- ward. On the second position close the legs. 7-12 As Exercises 1-6, the holds and positions of the hands as well as the hopping movement fore and backward are executed the same as in the previous exercises, but the legs are to be raised and kept in one of the positions indicated in the first movement of the first six exercises. LESSON 8. Position sideways, facing inward. 1 Jump into the hanging position, 2d movement: Straighten the arms both hands on one rail, the palms forward. 1st movement: Bend the arms slowly to right angles, and raise the legs forward to a horizontal position. and lower the legs. Repeat. 2 As Exercise 1, but in the first move- ment straighten the right arm sideways, the hand on the rail, and raise the right leg side- ways. 234 CEKMAN-AMERIC. 1 .V '. Y 2d movement: Back to position, and the same with the opposite limbs. Repeat. 3 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, cross the limbs of one side over those of the opposite sides, and return to position. Repeat. Fig. 212. 4 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, then bend the arms and reverse the hold with both hands simul- taneously. At the same time raise the knees forward to right angles. Return to the starting position. 5 Hanging position as in Exercise 1. Bend the arms to right angles, and a. Raise the right elbow over the right rail, and raise the right foot backward ; 6. As a, but with the left arm and left foot ; c. As a, but exercising both arms and feet simultaneously (Fig. 212). (Underarm hang.) Hanging position as in Exercise 1, bend the arms, and . Straighten the right arm over the upper side of the ladder, raising the right leg forward horizontally, and return to position; b. As a, but with the left arm and the left leg ; c. As a, but with botli arms and legs simultaneously. 7 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, bend the arms and swing the body fore and backward. At the end of the backswing move both arms to the elbows over the rail of the ladder, and return to the previous position at the next backward movement. 8 As Exercise 7, moving the entire arms over the upper side of the ladder. (Upperarm hang.) 9 As Exercise 7, but at the end of the backswing slide both hands sideways outward to the farthest reach, return at the next back- ward movement. 10 As Exercise 9, crossing the arms simultaneously. 11 As Exercise 7, but at the end of the backswing, hop with both hands toward one side ; con- tinue from one end of the ladder to the other. 12 As Exercise 11, with one hand on one rail, the other on one round. LESSON 9. Position underneath and in the middle of the ladder. Jump into the hanging position, . Raise the right hand quickly the hands on the sides, the palms and return ; inward. Turn the body over b. Raise the left hand quickly and backward into the hanging posi- ' return ; tion backward, and HORIZONTAL LADDER 235 c. Raise both hands quickly and return. 2 As Exercise 1, but in the hanging position backward : a. Spread the legs to the side-strad- dle position and return ; 6. Spread the legs to the cross- straddle position (one leg for- ward, the other backward), and return ; c. Raise and straighten the knees. d. Raise the feet backward, bend- ing the knees, and return. 3 Jump into the hanging position sideways at one end and facing outward, both hands on one rail, the palms backward. Turn the body over backward half- ways into the reversed hanging position. Straighten the legs up- ward and travel sideways to the opposite end of the ladder, the hands move alternately. Fig. 213. 4 As Exercise 3, facing inward turn the body over completely into the hanging position backward (Fig. 213). 5 As Exercise 4, but after taking the reversed hanging position, bend the arms and raise the body up- ward onto the upper side of the ladder (Fig. 214). Jump down forward. Fh, 214. Q As Exercise 5, then change the holds of both hands to palms backward on one side, and slowly roll over backward into the hanging position backward; then turn the body over forward into the hanging position for- ward. 7 Jump into 'the hanging position, the hands on both rails, the palms inward. Turn the body over backward halfways, straighten the legs through the space between the two rounds, bend the arms, and wind the body through the space, coming into the front leaningrest. Re- turn, reversing the movements. 8 As Exercise 7, winding through one space to the upper side of the ladder, coming into the rear leaningrest. Walk in the direc- 230 GERMAN-. 1 M l-:ii WAX GYMNA8TK S tion of the head or feet in this position, and at the end of the ladder jump down sideways. 9 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, turn the body over backward, placing both feet on one round behind the body, straighten the body and extremities. Return. 10 Position as in Exercise 9, and lower a. The right foot and return ; b. The left foot and return ; c. Bend and straighten both arms. 1 1 Position as in Exercise 9, and travel in the direction of the head, feet and anus moving alternately, one hand and foot leading. 12 As Exercise 11, travelling in the direction of the feet, both hands moving simultaneously. LESSON 10. Position underneath the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on the rails, the palms inward. Raise the body and the legs to a horizontal position for- ward (f rontlever) and try to hold it for some time (Fig. 215). Fig. 215. 2 As Exercise 1, with both hands on one of the rails. 3 As Exercise 1, with both hands on one round. 4, 5, and 6 As Exercises 1, 2, and 3, but turn the body over backward, and straighten it into a horizontal position backward; the head, body, and the legs in the same plane (rearlever). Hold the posi- tion for some time, then bend the knees and turn the body forward into the hanging position. 7 Turn the body over backward into the rearlever, then lower the body slowly downward without bend- ing the legs. Return in the re- verse order. 8 Frontlever, then turn the body over into the rearlever, and re- turn. Repeat. 9 Hanging position, both hands on one round. Turn the body over backward halfways, spreading the legs to a sidestraddle posi- tion, and travel forward and backward, the hands moving alternately. 19 Frontlever, the hands on the rails or on one round, travel in the direction of the head or the feet, the hands moving alternately. 11 As Exercise 10, but in the rear- lever. 12 From the position sideways, facing outward, frontlever, the hands on one of the rails, the palms backward. Hold the body and the legs extended, and slowly turn into the reversed hanging position, the head downward. Then bend the arms and turn the body over backward into the front leaningrest on top. Front- vault. HORIZONTAL LADDER 237 LESSON 11. Position underneath the ladder. 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on one round, the palms forward. Quickly turn (hop) left or right about. 2 As Exercise 1, with both hands on the rails instead of on one round. 3 As Exercise 1, but while turning jump to the next round. 4 As Exercise 2, but while turning move the hands to the next space. 5 As Exercise 1, with the body swing- ing forward and backward, the turning at the end of the fore- swing. 6 As Exercise 5, with the hands on both rails, and the turning at the end of the backswing. 7 Hanging position as in Exercise 1, catch hold of one wrist, bend and straighten the arm re- peatedly. 8 As Exercise 7, hopping from one round to another, forward and backward. 9 As Exercise 7, placing one hand on the hip. 10 As Exercise 9, and raise both legs to a horizontal position. 12 As Exercise 11, and turn around on one hand as far as possible, and return. Change the hands, and repeat with the other arm. LESSON 12. Position underneath the ladder 1 Jump into the hanging position, the hands on both rails or one round. Swing the body forward and backward, and at the end of each forward movement raise both knees and hop forward. 2 As Exercise 1, hopping forward at the end of the backswing, at the same time bending and straight- ening the knees. 3 As Exercise 1, hopping forward in the fore and backswing, bending and straightening the knees with every advance. 4, 5, and 6 As Exercises 1, 2, and 3, omitting one round or space when advancing. 7 As Exercise 1, but at the end of the forward movement turn the body over backward into the rear hanging position, and con- tinue swinging. Eeturn and repeat. 8 As Exercise 7, but after turning over backward, return at once into the front hanging position and continue swinging. Repeat. 9 As Exercise 7, but from the rear hanging position let go with one hand and execute a whole turn around one arm, taking hold again with the hand. Re- peat the same, but turn around the other arm. 10 As Exercise 7, beginning from the hanging position, both hands on one rail, the palms backward, facing the ladder. After turn- ing the body over halfway, immediately pull the body up- 238 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS ward over the upper side of the ladder into a sitting position, then roll over backward and jump down backward, quickly letting go. 11 As Exercise 10, but from a sitting position on the ladder change to the rear leaningrest. Bend the arms and slowly lower the body backward into a rearlever underneath the ladder. Jump to the floor. 12 As Exercise 11, but from the rear leaningrest, bend the arms, transfer the weight of the body onto one hand, letting go uith the other, and turn around tin- supporting arm. Take hold again with the other hand, which now carries the weight of the body and around which the body executes one half turn backward, the free hand swing- ing backward, taking the same hold as in the original position. Continue the turning forward and backward from one end of the ladder to the other. Itear- vault. SIMULTANEOUS EXERCISES ON INCLINED LADDERS 239 SIMULTANEOUS EXERCISES ON FOUR INCLINED LADDERS ( ' ' Gem ei n uebun gren * ' ) BY DR. KARL ZAPP THESE exercises are to be performed by a class of girls from thirteen to sixteen years of age. On each of the ladders three girls perform simultaneously. In going up the ladder, the first girl starts, the second follows after four counts, and the third ditto ; all of them reaching the starting position in sixteen counts. GROUP I. Exercises in the leaning position. 1 Mount on the upper side, and assume the leaning posi- tion (Fig. 216). Raise the left and right leg alternate- ly, 16 counts ; turn over on the under side of the ladder into position in 4 counts ; then Nos. 2 and 3 jump down ; No. 1 moves downward 4 counts and alights ; all return to their places while the next set marches up. 2 Raise the left and right arm alter- nately. 3 Raise one arm and one leg alter- nately. 4 Raise one arm and one leg (oppo- site) simultaneously. Fig. 210. 240 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS GROUP II. Exercises in the hanging position. Mount on the lower side (using the hands and the feet), then let go the feet, and assume a hanging position on the sides or rounds. 1 Raise the right and left knee alter- 3 Raise the leg forward, move back- nately, then both, 16 counts, and ward left and right. 16 counts, repeat. 4 Raise both knees, then straighten 2 Raise the leg sideways and move the left leg forward and the right crosswise, left and right. leg backward, etc. 16 counts. 16 counts. N. B. After each of these exercises, the girls return to the class and the next twelve take their places. GROUP III. Standing on the ladders. Mount on the ladder ad libitum, and stand in the sidestand, one foot two rounds higher than the other. 1 Hands on shoulders ; straighten 3 Raise the arms outward, move them arms outward, and reverse. upward, forming an arch over the 16 counts. head. 16 counts. Then turn over on the lower side, 4 Raise the arms to the left, move and jump down as in Group I. them upward, then sideways 2 Hands on shoulders ; move them right, then down. 16 counts. upward, forming an arch over the head, etc. 16 counts. These exercises may also be executed in the crossstand (back or face toward the ladder). GROUP IV. Hanging position. Mount on the upper side and turn over ; or mount on the lower side. SIMULTANEOUS EXERCISES ON INCLINED LADDERS 241 1 Hang on the rounds in the side or crosshang, twist the body left and right. 16 counts. This can also be combined with leg exercises. 2 Hang by one hand and place the left or the right hand on the shoulder or hip, or raise the arm outward. 16 counts. 3 Hang by one hand, and raise the arm sideways, place the hand on the shoulder, then sideways, and return. 16 counts. 4 Hang by one hand, and turn the body; resume the hold. 16 counts. GROUP V. Hangstaud on the lower side. Mount as stated before, but let the feet remain on the rounds. 1 Draw the body (chest) up towards the ladder four times. 2 With arms bent, change grip, or let go and straighten one arm side- ways. 3 With arms bent, straighten one arm and move one leg outward sim- ultaneously. 4 Let go with one hand and turn the body (hangstand sideways). GROUP VI. Miscellaneous exercises. 1 Sitting on one rail (hands behind), swing the legs over to the other rail. 2 Rear leaning position, move the left leg and right arm outward simultaneously ; move the arm overhead and cross the leg in front of the right (knee bent), and reverse. 3 Hang by the knees, lower the body with extension of arms ; raise the body, and take hold again. 4 In hangstand; change position of the hands (grip) simultane- ously a. On the rounds ; b. On the rails ; c. From the rounds to the rails, and reverse. 242 GERMAN-AMERICAX G YMNASTICS RINGS BY DR. CARL ZIEGLEB Springing. The rings must be within easy reach. Grasp the rings, walk backward as far as possible, then run for- ward and swing backward sev- eral times. Jump off with the backswing. Fig. 217. 2 The same as Exercise 1, but run backward and swing forward. 3 Combine Exercises 1 and 2, i.e., run both forward and backward. 4 As Exercise 1, and with the fore- swing face about. Turn back into the original position at the finish of the swing. 5 The same as Exercise 4, executing a whole turn. This should hot be attempted until the foregoing exercises have been successfully performed. 6 Run backward, and turn at the end of the backswing. 7 As Exercise 1, with bending the arms at the finish of the fore- swing (Fig. 217), at the finish of the backswing straighten the arms (sinking down slowly). 8 As Exercise 2, and bend the arms at the end of the backswing ; straighten the arms at the end of the foreswing. 9 As Exercise 7 or 8, swinging back and forth several times in the bent arm position. 10 Combine Exercises 7 and 8. At the finish of the foreswing bend and straighten the arms quickly, then take several steps and bend and straighten the arms again, etc. RINGS 243 NOTE. After having mastered the foregoing exercises thor- oughly, try them with the rings raised out of reach, i.e., so that you must jump for them and have some one swing you or give you " a start." II Without Swinging. The rings must be as high as the shoulders. 1 Grasp the rings, then allow the body to drop backward slowly into the fronthangstand (Fig. 218). NOTE. The arms should be parallel, the body straight and inclined backward from the feet, which should be planted firmly upon the floor, the chest should be well forward, the head in a line with the body. 2 As Exercise 1, then raise the left leg forward and upward (the leg perfectly straight). 3 As Exercise 1, then raise the left knee. (The thigh and the body form a right angle, the thigh and leg also.) 4 Step forward and sink into the front- hangstand, then execute a half turn over backward, both legs bent, into the inverted squathang (Fig. 219). NOTE. To turn over backward, jump off lightly with both feet and throw them quickly upward; at the same time bend both knees, drawing them up closely to the body. 5 As Exercise 4, then straighten the boJy upward into the inverted hang. (See Fig. 109.) Let the feet touch the ropes at first ; later have the legs and the feet together. 6 As Exercise 4, then place the feet within the rings and turn the body over backward and down- ward (retaining the hold with the hands and the feet) into the nest. Fig. 218. 7 As Exercise 6, then straighten the left leg backward (remove the foot from the rings and replace after a short pause). 8 As Exercise 6, then straighten the left arm forward. (Let go of the rings and straighten the 244 GERM A N-AMElilCAN G YMNASTICS 10 ami, then grasp the ring again after a short pause. ) Combine Exercises 7 and 8 (straighten the left ann and right leg, or the right arm and left leg) (Fig. 220). As Exercise 4, then pass the feet through the rings into the knee- hang ; the hands remain, i.e., do not give up their hold. 11 As Exercise 10, then let go with the hands, straighten the back and fold the anus kneehang (See Fig. 117). 12 As Exercise 4, then continue the turn backward and straighten the legs downward into the hangstand backward (See Fig. 131). NOTE. After executing an exercise, always return to the original or starting position in the reverse order. Fig. 219. Fig. 220. Ill "Without Swinging. The rings must be as high as the shoulders. 1 Stand directly between and under the rings, grasping them. Al- low the body to sink backward slowly into the fronthang- stand (Fig. 218). Bend and straighten the arms rapidly. 2 As Exercise 1, sinking forward slowly into the rearhangstand (the arms above the head) (Fig. 221). 3 As Exercise 1, but sinking side- ways left (Fig. 222). RINGS 245 4 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately, chan- ging from one to the other through the upright position. 5 As Exercise 4, sideways left and right alternately. 6 As Exercise 2, then change to po- sition forward by describing a half circle to the left passing through the position sideways. Reverse into the first position. 7 As Exercise 2, then change to po- sition sideways left, then forward and sideways right again to the first position. Circle from left to right, or from right to left. Fig. 221. Fig. 222. IV Swinging the legs and the body. The rings must be stationary. 1 Jump into the ordinary hang. Swing the legs forward and back- ward shortswing (Fig. 223, a and 6). NOTE. When swinging the legs for- ward the thighs are flexed upon the body, but the legs remain ex' tended. The legs can thus grad- ually be raised until the feet touch the ropes. This exercise (the shortswing) can be used as a pre- liminary movement to the exer- cises of the second group and other kindred exercises, when the rings are above reaching distance. When swinging the legs back- ward keep them straight, throw 24G (;KI;.MA\-A M ERIC AN GYMNASTICS Fig. 223 a. the chest forward, with head erect. 2 As Exercise 1, swinging sideways left and right. 3 Swing the legs in a circle from left to right, or from right to left (Fig. 224). Fig. 223 b. NOTE. The upper part of the body moves very little, while the hips and the legs describe the circle. The ropes must not *wist. Begin and stop gradual?. Fig. 224. B The rings must be within easy reach. 4 Pass the arms through the rings into the elbowhang, then repeat Exercises 1, 2, and 3. Fig. 225. The rings must be as high as the head. 5 Pass the arms through the rings into the shoulderhang, then re- peat Exercises 1, 2, and 3 (Fig. 225). RINGS 247 NOTE. In the last exercises the rings should be under the shoulders ; the arms may be either straight or down at the sides, or the hands may hold on to the rings, or the pupil may grasp hands backward, the latter being the most difficult. V Swinging. The rings must be within easy reach. 1 Grasp the rings with the ordinary hold. Step backward, run for- ward, and at the end of the fore- swing turn over backwards into the inverted squathang, as in the Second Group (Fig. 219). Exercise in the same manner the movements of the Second Lesson. NOTE. By gradually raising the rings, these exercises become more difficult. VI "Without swinging. The rings must be at jumping distance. 1 Jump into the hang with the ordi- nary hold. Raise both legs for- ward. NOTE. In this and all of the fol- lowing exercises, the legs should be raised perfectly straight, the knees and the feet together. 2 As Exercise 1, continuing the rais- ing until the feet are as high as the rings. 3 As Exercise 2, then straighten up- ward into the inverted hanging position ; lower the body forward slowly without flexing the thigh. 4 As Exercise 3, lowering the body backward into the rearhang ; then flex the thighs and turn over forward. 5 As Exercise 4, stopping when the body has reached the horizontal position backward rearlever (Fig. 226). Then sink lower into the hang, and jump off. 6 As Exercise 5, turning over forward again from the rearhang as in the Fourth Exercise. 7 As Exercise 6, in the rearhang twisting the shoulders and so regain the original position. NOTE. This exercise, called the shouldertwist, is rather difficult to describe. The body gives a slight jerk upward, the arms are spread sideways, and the head of the humerus of each arm turns completely around in its socket. GERMAN-AMEUU:A.\ <. VMNASTICS 8 As Exercise 5, from the rear lever raise the straight body into the inverted hang, then lower slowly forward. 9 As Exercise 2, then straighten the body backward into the rear lever. Jump off. 10 As Exercise 9, then bend the knees and turn over forward into the inverted squathang, then straighten the left leg upward, and lower the body forward into the frontlever. Sink into the hang, and jump off. 1 1 As Exercise 3, then lower the body forward into the frontlever. 12 As Exercise 9, then from the rear- lever raise into the inverted hang and lower into the front- lever. Fig. 226. Fig. 227. VII Without swinging. The rings must be within jumping distance. 1 Grasp with the ordinary hold. Turn over backward into the inverted hang with bent hips ; then move the left leg outward, and cross and bend it over the left wrist (Fig. 227). NOTE. The left leg lies upon the left wrist, the right leg and the body are in a horizontal position. 2 As Exercise 1, placing the right leg upon the left wrist. 3 As Exercise 1 , as the left leg touches the arm, the left hand releases its hold and allows the leg to pass between it and the ring, then resumes its hold left hand cutoff. 4 As Exercise 2, releasing the hold as in Exercise 3. 5 As Exercise 1, straddling and re- leasing both the rings, and jump- ing into the stand under the rings double cutoff. (Throw the body well forward the mo- ment you let go.) NOTE. The foregoing exercises may also be executed while swinging. RINGS 249 VIII Without swinging. The rings must be within easy reach or jumping reach Grasp with the ordinary hold. Raise the legs forward and up- ward, at the same time bending the arms, and turn over back- ward into the resting position in the rings (Fig. 228). 2 As Exercise 1, then bend the arms to the bent arm rest. 3 As Exercise 2, then sink backward into the hanging position. 4 Bend the arms until the shoulders are on a level with the hands, then turn the hands forward and straighten the arms, pushing the body upwards into the resting position pushup. 5 As Exercise 4, then roll over for- ward into the hang. 6 As Exercise 1, then turn over for- ward into the bent arm handstand in the rings, the feet around the ropes. 7 As Exercise 4, then turn forward into the handstand in the rings, the feet against the ropes (Fig. 229). Fig. 228. Fig. 223. As Exercise 7, the handstand without the feet touching the ropes. NOTE. Although very difficult, the foregoing exercises may he performed with swinging. 250 VERMAN-AMEliKJAN G YMNAST1CS VERTICAL POLES BY WM. KOPP Climbing. ON one pole, with the help of the hands and the feet. Position of attention, facing the pole. with the right ; lift the left foot from the ground, anil place it against the right side of the pole, the knee on the left side ; lift the right foot, and place it in front of the pole, the ankles- crossing, the outside edge of the feet together, the pole between them (Fig. 230) climbing position. Raise the right hand to the reach, and grasp the pole, the left fol- lowing ; draw up the legs with- out moving them from the pole, and without bending the arms, tighten the hold of the feet when elevated (Fig. 231), then straight- en the legs and the trunk. Re- peat, thereby gradually climbing upward. Then descend in the re- versed order. The teacher should not permit any sliding down. As Exercise 1, beginning with the right hand, and the position of the feet reversed. 230. Fig. 231. 1 Raise and the left hand to the reach grasp the pole, following II Hand over hand climbing. 1 As in the First Exercise of Les- son I. 2 Raise the right hand to the reach, and grasp the pole, raise the legs VERTICAL POLES 251 to the climbing position without bending the right arm, straighten the legs and the trunk. Repeat, raising the left hand to the reach. Descend in the reversed order. 3 As Exercise 2, grasping upward with both hands at the same time. With the hands only (HANDCLIMBING). 4 a. Raise the right hand to the reach, and grasp the pole, the left following, bending the arms, thereby lifting both feet from the ground, the legs to- gether and straight, the toes pointing downward (Fig. 232). b. Raise the right hand to the reach and grasp the pole, the left hand following. Repeat. Descend in the reversed order. 5 As Exercise 4, the left hand lead- ing. 6 As Exercise 4, hand over hand. 7 As Exercise 4, with the body to the right of the pole, the left side slightly touching it, the legs together, straight and slanting to the front, the toes pointed in the same direction (Fig. 233). 8 As Exercises 4, 5, and 6, with leg movements, such as side or cross- straddle, raising the knees and heels, crossing the legs. Fig. 232. Fig. 233. As Exercise 8, changing the posi- tion of the legs after a certain number of steps. Ill Climbing on two stationary poles with help of the hands and feet. Stand between the poles. 1 a. Raise the right hand to the reach, and grasp the right pole, the left following on the left pole, bend the arms and raise the legs to the ordi- nary climbing position on the right pole (Fig. 234). b. Raise the right hand to the reach, follow with the left, and raise the body. Repeat. 2 As Exercise 1, the left hand lead- ing, and the feet in the climbing position on the left pole. 3 Exercises 1 and 2 alternately. 252 GERM . I V AM /;/; K'. I .V M - M .V . 1 > 7 7 f > 4 As Exercise 1, pressing thf l--s against tlie poles from the inside (the feet on the outside) (Fig. 235). 6 As Exercise 1, pressing the legs against the poles from the out- side (the feet on the inside). 6 As Exercises 4 and 5, with both hands simultaneously, but one leg after the other. 7 As Exercises 4 and 5, with one hand after the other, but both legs simultaneously. 8 As Exercises 4 and 5, with both hands and both legs simultane- ously. Fig. 235. Fig. 234. IV Climbing on two stationary poles without the help of the feet. 1 a. Raise the right hand to the reach, and grasp the right pole, the left following on the left pole ; bend the arms, the body in a line with the poles. Repeat. In descend- ing, reverse the order. 2 As Exercise 1, the left hand lead- ing. 3 Climb up and downward, the hands grasping alternately. 4 As Exercises 1, 2, and 3, with the following leg movements : a. Cross or sidestraddle. b. One or both knees raised. c. One or both heels raised. -.- d. One or both legs raised forward. e. Raising and then straightening the knees. /. Raising the heels and then straightening the legs, etc. Travel from one pole to the next, gradually climbing upward at the same time. Hop down on one, or two poles. 1 Repeat the above climbing exer- cises while swinging. 2 Repeat the above climbing exer- cises on two poles while swinging. 3 a. Climb from one pole to the next. b. Climb obliquely upward and downward along the line of poles. Swinging vertical poles. The climbing from one pole to the next is done in the following manner : From the climbing position on one pole, one hand grasps the next pole, then the legs go over and lastly the other hand follows. VERTICAL POLES 253 VI Slanting poles. Most of the exercises on the vertical poles can be practised on the slanting poles, but the climbing exercises on the upper side are a little more difficult. The climbing can also be varied by changing from the lower to the upper side, or by circling around a pole. Many exercises of the inclined ladders may also be practised here. 254 GEltMAN-AMERU:. I .V <. YM \ . 1 .S77CS SIMULTANEOUS EXERCISES ON SWINGING POLES For boys or girls 11 to 13 years ol age BY DR. KARL ZAPP HAVE as many children exercise simultaneously as there are spaces between the poles. GEOUP I. Hangstand. Leg exercises. In the hangstand the feet are flat on the floor, the body straight, the head erect, the chest active. The smaller boys or Fig. 238. girls may stand alternately with the larger ones, and take hold below the hands of the latter (Fig. 236). SIMULTANEOUS EXEHCISES ON SWINGING POLES 255 1 Move the left and the right leg alternately outward and cross- wise. 8 counts. 2 Raise the left and the right leg up- ward. 8 counts. 3 Raise the left knee, 1; extend the leg, 2; reverse, 3, 4. The same right. 8 counts. 4 Raise the left leg, 1 ; bend the knee, 2; extend, 3; lower, 4. The same right. 8 counts. GROUP II. Hangstand. Arm, leg, and trunk exercises. 1 Lower the grasp of one hand, also give up the grasp of one hand. 8 counts. 2 Move the head in different direc- tions (8 counts), also roll the head. 8 counts. 3 Turn the body sideways. (If all turn in the same direction, they effect a swaying movement.) 8 counts. 4 Change from the front hangstand to the rear hangstand, four times. (Face toward the floor, the body well extended. ) 8 counts. GROUP III. Swinging on two poles. Each pupil takes hold of two poles, goes back about three steps, and then, upon command, runs forward, the hands glid- ing upward; with the first step he jumps up, and grasp- ing the poles firmly, he swings himself backward and forward two or three times, jumping down upon command. 1 Run and swing. 6 counts. 2 Run and swing and flex the knees upward. 6 counts. 3 Run and swing and flex the legs upward. 6 counts. 4 Run and swing with bent arms (Fig. 237). 6 counts. 5 Run and swing with bent arms continually swinging the legs forward and backward (short- Fig. 237. 25G QEKMAN-AMERK . I A <; YMNASTIC8 GROUP IV. Exercises on one pole. 1 Hang in the climbing position. 8 counts. extend right or left arms, side- ways. 8 counts. 2 Hang in the climbing position, and 5 Hang in the climbing position, and change the position of the legs. 8 counts. extend arm and leg sideways al- ternately. 8 counts. 3 Hang in the climbing position, and 6 Climbing. extend left or right leg sideways. 8 counts. 7 Wander-climbing (from pole to pole). 4 Hang in the climbing position, and 8 Climbing on the swinging pole. B UCK 257 BUCK BY WM. A. STECHER ALL exercises begin with a run. The word lengthwise, or crosswise, before a lesson, means that the buck is to stand with its length either in line with the run, or at right angles thereto. Lengthwise. 1 Jump into the freerest (see Fig. 155), then: a. Sidestraddle. 6. Crossstradle. c. Raise the heels (Fig. 238). d. Raise the knees; e. Cross the legs. (See that the legs are closed, and the body in good position before landing on the board. ) 2 Jump into the ridingseat; dismount left backward with a quarter turn left, and immediately jump into the ridingseat again; dismount right backward. 3 Jump into the ridingseat; swing the legs backward several times; straddleoff forward. 4 As in Exercise 3, swing the legs backward into the leaningrest (see Fig. 160) ; straddleoff for- ward. 5 Straddlevault forward. 6 Straddlevault forward as a farjump, gradually moving the board away from the buck. Straddlevault forward as a high- jump, gradually raising the buck higher. Fig. 238. 258 GERMAN-AMERICA y G YMNA > TH > II Crosswise. 1 Jump into the freerest; repeat as soon as landing on the board. 2 As in Exercise 1, with the leg move- ments as in the first lesson. 3 As in exercise 1, then kneel on the buck. Straighten up, then knee- jump: a. Backward. b. Sideways. c. Forward. (Swing the arms in the direction of the jump. ) 4 As Exercise 3; with one quarter or one half turn right or left. Fig. 239, III Lengthwise. 1 Jump, raising the knees well up- ward, into a squatting position on the buck (help); straighten the legs backward, and jump down. 2 As Exercise 1, then straighten the body upward (standing on the buck); jump off sideways or for- ward. 3 As in Exercise 2, swinging one leg well sideways or forward when jumping off. 4 As in Exercise 3, with one quarter or one half turn. BUCK 259 5 Straddlevault forward over a rope and a buck. The rope on the jumping-stand lies between the board and the buck; high strad- dlevault (Fig. 239). After each jump the rope is raised. 6 As in Exercise 5, the rope being stretched beyond the buck. As in Exercise 6, as a farjump, gradually moving the rope away. As in Exercise 5; gradually mov- ing the board, or board and rope, farther from the buck f arstrad- dlejump. The board may also be moved and the rope raised, thereby increasing the difficulty still more. IV Crosswise. 1 Stridemount right (see Fig. 156); swing the legs backward, and pushoff backward. 2 As in Exercise 1 ; shears left back- ward ; dismount left sideways. 3 Flankvault right (see Fig. 146). 4 Wolf's vault left (see Fig. 151). 5 Squattingvault (help). 6 Frontvault right, also with one quarter or one half turn left. 7 Rearvault left, also with one quarter or one half turn right. Cross-wise. 1 Jump with a quarter turn left into the seat on the buck (the right leg forward, the left backward), raise the body up, resting on the hands (Fig. 240), and swing the legs left and right sideways sev- eral times; when swinging to the right, pushoff sideways. 2 Straddlevault right sideways (the right leg in front). 3 .Straddlevault left backward (with a turn left about). 4 Straddlevault sideways or backward with one quarter or one half turn before landing. 5 As in Exercise 5, gradually moving the board from the buck. 6 As in Exercise 5, gradually raising the buck higher. As in Exercise 5, moving the board and raising the buck. Fig. 240. 260 < ; K i; .MAN-AMERICA N G YMNA S TICS VI Lengthwise. Let the different movements of this lesson follow each other rapidly. 1 Stridevault right with one quarter turn right and straddlevault for- ward. 2 As in Exercise 1, with squatting- vault (help). 3 As in Exercise 1, frontvault right with a quarter turn left. 4 As in Exercise 3, and then let a rearvault left follow the front- vault. 5 From the frontrest (Fig. 241), straddlevault forward; also side- ways; also backward. 6 As in Exercise 5, then squatting- vault forward; also with one quarter or one half turn right or left. Fig. 241. ROUND SWING 261 ROUND SWING (GIANT STRIDE) BY HANS BALLIN THE class is formed in a column composed of ranks of three or four, the number being determined by the apparatus, which has either four, six, or eight ropes and ladders. Fig. 242. A circle whose centre is just below the centre of the swing is divided into as many parts as there are ropes. This aids the pupils in finding their correct distances and positions. The pupils just through exercising remain in their places until the next ones take the ladders out of their hands. 262 (i ERMA N-A M ERIC A N G YMNA S TICS Most of the exercises of the following themes may also be executed on two ladders. In using two ladders, the pupils generally face the centre ; and then the ladder to the right is for the right arm, and to the left for the left arm Fig. 243. Fig. 244. THEME FIRST. Moving in a circle by walking, running, skipping, hopping, hopping on one foot, galloping, etc. A Moving Walking forward with quick steps in a circle right or left. The pupils grasp a round, and stand as far from the centre as pos- sible (Fig. 243). The right arm is straight, the right side of the body turned toward the centre, the left hand is on the hip, or grasps the lower end of the ladder, a. Walk around the circle ; upon command turn right about ; then walk in a circle left. Repeat several times. forward. 2 The same on tiptoes. 3 The same running (Fig. 244). 4 The same, changing from running to walking, or vice versa. 5 Skipping. 6 Changing from skipping to walk- ing or running. 7 Changing from walking to hopping on one foot. 8 Changing from one movement to another upon command, or at a given number of counts (Fig. 245). ROUND SWING 263 9- As 8, but with each change a turn in the opposite direction is ex- ecuted. 10 As above, the pupils performing different exercises ; for in- stance, while some run, the others skip. B Moving sideways. 11 Quick walking, executing a closing step sideways (Fig. 246). 12 Gallop sideways left or right. 13 Gallop left or right and change, as in 4. 14 Changes of gallop and walking sideways with closing step, a given number of counts for each movement. 15 The same as in 14, in opposite directions. 16 Running sideways. o. with closing step. b. with crossing the left foot over the right, when run- ning right. Fig. 245. Fig. 246. THEME SECOND. Moving in a circle forward and sideways, performing exercises in walking and hopping. 1 Gallop forward in a circle, the 3 The same alternating. outer foot in advance. a. after having completed the 2 The same with the inner foot in circle once. advance. b. after a given number of steps. c. upon command. 264 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNAsTK > 4 Moving forward in a circle upon command. 5 As above, the pupils performing different movements ; for in- stance, while four of them gallop forward in a circle, four are skip- ping. Polka forward in a circle. 7 The same, alternating with walk- ing, running, skipping, Imppin.i:. or with double gallop (two gal- lops forward, with one foot and then two forward with the other foot), in the manner indicated in Exercises 3, 4, and 5. B Moving sideways. 8 Running sideways, the left foot crossing over the right. a. In front. b. In rear. c. Alternating in front and rear. 9 Double gallop sideways left, with closing step right at each third count. 10 The same as 9, executing a cross step instead of closing steps. THEME THIRD. A Moving backward. 1 Walking backward in a circle, the left or right hand grasping a round. a. Fast walking. b. Running. c. Skipping. d. Hopping on one foot. e. Galloping. /. Polka. 2' Upon command, change from one to another of the exercises un- der 1. 3 Upon command, change the direc- tion of the exercises as enume- rated under 1. B Turning. 4 Upon command, execute a quarter turn in a stated direction. (When turned toward the centre, both hands grasp the same round.) a. Executing the exercises named under 1. &. Executing two exercises al- ternately after each turn. c. A different exercise after each turn. 5 Sideways and backward, alternately executing movements as under 4. A succession of forward, sideways, backward, and sideways, moving along in the same line, executing movements as under 4. 7 Forward and backward (after a half turn), executing movements as under 4. The turn is best executed toward the centre (in- ward). 8 A whole turn inward (or outward) during an exercise forward, side- ways, or backward. The turn is either executed by a quick mo- tion during the flight, or by sev- eral steps on the floor. ROUND SWING 265 C Rocking-step and Rocking-hop. 9 Three gallop-hops forward in a circle ; at the close of third hop execute a rocking-step. 10 Facing the centre ; six gallop-hops sideways in one direction, and then a rocking-step ; then the same in the opposite direction. 11 Sideways as in 10, executing two gallop-hops and one side step with closing step, and then two rocking-hops in both directions. The rocking-hop (three-quarter time) is the same exercise as the rocking-step ; the last count, however, is hopped. 12 Sideways as in 10, executing four gallop-hops, one closing step in one direction, and one rocking- hop in the opposite direction. 13 Sideways as in Exercise 10, execut- ing six gallop-hops in one direc- tion, and one rocking-hop in the opposite direction. 14 Sideways as in Exercise 10, ex- ecuting a rocking-hop, and clos- ing step at each third count. 15 Rocking-hop forward. 16 Rocking-running forward. (A rocking-running forward is executed in two-fourths time. The rocking-step is shown as a run.) THEME FOURTH. A Giant Stride. 1 Running in a circle, executing three running steps and one giant stride alternately. The running is begun with the inner foot. 2 The same sideways, running with cross-steps. 3 The same backward. 4 Run forward in a circle, executing long strides, gradually reducing the number required to finish the circle to 8, 7, 6, 5, etc. (Fig. 247). 5 Giant strides in a circle sideways, as in 4 (executing cross-steps). 6 The same backward. Fig. 247. B Flying in a circle. Run around the circle forward one or more times, and upon com- mand fly through the air, rais- ing the heels backward. 8 As in 7, skipping, galloping, hop- ping on one foot, or striding to get a start. 9 As in 7, letting half of the schol- 266 GERM A N-A M ERIC A N GYMNAS TICS ars that are exercising fly, while the rest run. (All begin the exercise with a run.) 10 Run, gallop, or hop sideways to get a start, and fly with raising the knees, or straight legs for- ward (Fig. 248). 14 Fig. 248. a start of three or five steps, the pupil jumps outward upward. The grasp as before ; i.e., hanging on one round, the arm straight, in the under-arui hang, or in Fig. 250. Flying in a circle with swinging of the legs forward in a half circle. (The closed feet touch the floor, the legs are swung out- ward vigorously, and perform a half-circle before the feet touch the floor again.) (Fig. 250.) 17 The same sideways. 11 As above, the pupil standing be- tween two ropes, and grasping one round of each ladder. 12 Running backward alternately with a giant stride. 13 Running forward and high flying in a circle (circle jumping). After 18 19 20 Fig. 249. the upper-arm hang (Fig. 249). 14 The same exercise ; the pupils fly and run upon command. 15 The same exercise, hanging by one hand (for strong pupils only). Fig. 251. The same backward. The Exercises 19 and 20, in con- nection with whole turns left or right during the flight. As 16, 17, 18, the legs describing one and one-half circle before the feet touch again (Fig. 251). ROUND SWING 267 THEME FIFTH. Moving in a circle over obstacles. Giant stride forward with stepping on elevations. Some apparatus of the gymnasium must serve for the exercise ; for instance, spring- boards can be used. The pupils step on the elevations, and execute as many steps be- tween the elevated points as are necessary. Fig. 252. some other apparatus, which the teacher holds out to them. 5 Running in a circle, two pupils change places with each other. The one ahead stops upon com- mand, and quickly exchanges ropes with the pupil overtaking him. Then both continue in the same direction. 2 Giant stride over obstacles. Jump- ing-ropes or balancing-boards are placed in the line of the swing, at distances as far apart and as suits the ability of the pupils. 3 Running start and high flying over a rope (Fig. 252.) 4 Running in a circle; the pupils en- endeavor to grasp some rings or Fig. 253. 6 Running in a circle. Upon com- mand, the next squad changes with those exercising. They also may run a certain distance on the inner side of those exercis- ing, and change places with them upon command. 7 Running in ranks of two. The pupil next the centre holds 268 <; /;/,' MAN-AMERICAN <; YM V . 1 STJCS Fig. 254. the ladder with the right hand, the left arm is placed around the waist of the other pupil. The latter places his right hand on the right shoulder of his neigh- bor, and with his left hand takes hold of the lower end of the lad- der (Fig. 253). 8 Running backward in a circle, as in 7. 9 Exercise 7, the pupils taking a different grasp. 10 The same as 9, moving backward. 11 As in Exercise 7, the pupils stand- ing so that when one moves forward, the other must move backward ; also sideways (Fig. 254). WHIPPLE-L A D DEK 269 WHIPPLE-LADDER (SEE-SAW) BY HANS BALLIN THEME FIRST. Exercises in hanging. Ordinary grasp. Arms straight. Leg and trunk exercises. Fig. 255. 1 Swinging. The whole body is straight, and the arms are not bent during the flight. Pupils alight on tiptoes, bending the knees deeply, and turning them outward. The body must not swing forward or backward. The ladder must be within easy reach for both pupils. 2 Swinging and raising right leg forward. Leg straight and toes pointing downward. 3 Swinging and raising right (or left) leg sideways. 4 Swinging and raising left leg backward. 5 Swinging and raising (or swing- ing) both legs forward. 270 GKHMAX-AMXItlt A\ (, Y M \ AST1CS 6 Swinging and raising (or swing- ing) legs sideways left (or right). 7 Swinging and raising legs as in 2, :!, 4, .">, ('>, \\iini going downward. 8 Swinging and alternately exercis- ing two of the foregoing exer- cises when going upward and downward. 9 Swinging and crossing right leg quickly in front of left when going upward. 10 Swinging and crossing legs as often as possible when going upward. 1 1 The same when going downward. 12 The same when going upward and downward. 13 Swinging and raising left knee when going upward. 14 The same when going downward. 15 The same, and raising both knees. 16 Swinging and turning trunk left when going upward. 17 The same when going downward. 18 The same alternately. 19 The same, turning left going up, turning right going down. 20 The same, executing two of the foregoing exercises alternately when going upward and down- ward. THEME SECOND. Exercises in hanging, changing grasp. Leg and trunk exercises. 1 Swinging, lifting, and re-grasping left hand when going upward. 2 The same going downward. 3 The same alternately. 4 The same, lifting and re-grasping left and right hand going up- ward. 5 The same going downward. 6 The same alternately. 7 The same exercises as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, lifting hand oftener than once. 8 The same exercises of Theme First, and 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 of Theme Second. 9 Swinging and lifting left hand, and re-grasping a short distance forward on the beam when go- ing upward ; grasping the former place when going downward. 10 Swinging, and the same as 9, lift- ing left and right hand. 11 The same as 9 and 10, travelling smaller distances, and more than once. 12 Swinging and lifting left hand, grasping a round when going upward, and grasping the beam again when going downward. 13 Swinging and with the left hand grasp a round, and then the next time also grasp that round with the right hand, re-grasping the former places the next two times going upward. 14 The same, alternating in various ways. 15 Swinging and grasping a round with both hands when going up- ward. (For older pupils and more experienced ones only.) Re-grasping the next time when going upward. 16 The same, alternating with the various foregoing exercises. 17 The same, Exercises 8-16 alternat- ing with Exercises 1-8. 18 The same, Exercises 8-16 with exercises of Theme First, or al- ternating with same. WHIPPLE-LADDER 271 19 The same, exercises of grasping 20 The same, touching different parts and re-grasping with different of the body with one hand, and grasps. then re-grasping. THEME THIRD. Exercises in hanging, arms bent. The exercises of Themes First and Second and exercises with arms bent. The arms are either bent going upward, or going downward, or both ways. THEME FOURTH. Exercises in the upper-arm hang. The ladder is lowered to the height of pupils' shoulders, and exercises of Theme First are executed. Exercises which are of a more difficult nature than those named in the above themes do not properly belong to this apparatus, which is most eminently an apparatus for girls. 272 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS BALANCING BOARD BY RICHARD PERTUCH EXERCISES in standing, walking, or hopping on a narrow raised board, necessitating a balancing of the body, are called balancing movements. The apparatus is a board fourteen to sixteen feet long, two inches wide, and six inches high, placed on three or four iron footings six inches high, thus giving a base twelve inches from the floor, and two inches wide, to exercise on. For classwork there should be from four to eight boards in a gymnasium, so that a large number of pupils can exercise together. The boards are generally placed side by side par- allel with each other, the distance being regulated by the exercise. The exercises on the boards may be started from a standing position, either sidewise or crosswise to the board. All exercises must be executed with the weight of the body resting mainly on the ball of the foot, with the body and the head erect. The most suitable connections for the scholars are : - A Hand in hand with neighbors (the arms bent, the hands in height of shoulders (Fig. 256), or the arms raised upward) (Fig. 258). B Arm in arm with neighbors. C The hands on the shoulders of neighbors (or only one hand, either the right or left). BALANCING BOARD 273 D The arms over the shoulders of neighbors (or only one arm, right or left). E 3 and 4 combined. F Cross arms with neighbors, and grasp hands forward. (Fig. 257.) G Cross arms with neighbors, and grasp hands backward. If the scholars stand or exercise in couples facing each other, the following connections may be used : Fig. 256. H Grasp opposite hands. I Grasp opposite hands, the arms crossed. J Grasp right hands (in Exercises 7, 8, and 9, the arms can be held in position as in Exercise 1). K Grasp opposite forearms. L Place hands on the opposite shoulders. The class must be arranged so that the divisions can go to and from the apparatus without delay, and that every scholar can see the exercises. 274 i; I:I;MA \-. I .v /;/,/' . i \ <; YM \.\ 8 TI< > The l>rst pliiii is to arrange the class around the boards in form of a square. All exercises must be executed left and right, and started, executed, and finished simultaneously by those exercising. GKADE I. Exercises in Stepping. Standing facing the boards. 3 Step up and down forward by a followstep. 4 Step up and jump down forward. 5 Step up and down forward. 6 Step over by a followstep. 1 Step up forward and down back- ward by a followstep. 2 Step up forward and jump down backward. Fig. 257. Standing crosswise to the boards. 7 Step up sideways into the step po- sition forward or backward (Fig. 257), and step or jump down on the same side. 8 As Exercise 7, stepping or jumping down on the other side. The above exercises may be executed successively on all boards ; variations may be made by counting off the scholars BALANCING BOARD 275 in ones and twos ; then No. 1 can exercise while No. 2 assists, and vice versa ; or all can exercise at the same time. The different connections suitable for the exercises may be added. Fig. 258. Exercises in standing. 9 Standing sidewise or crosswise for a length of time, as for two, four, or eight counts. 10 Standing sidewise, exercising step positions sidewise. 11 As Exercise 10, with crossstep po- sition in front or rear. 12 Standing crosswise, exercising step positions forward or backward. 13 Standing sidewise, executing the layout step on the floor forward or backward (one foot touches the floor, while the other leg is bent). 14 Standing crosswise, executing the layout step on the floor sidewise. (Fig. 258). 15 Standing sidewise or crosswise, rise on the toes. 16 As Exercise 15, bending the knees. 17 As Exercise 15, raising one leg for- ward, backward, or sidewise. 18 As Exercise 15, bending the trunk forward, backward, or sidewise. 19 As Exercise 15, turning the trunk right or left. 20 As Exercise 15, raising the arms forward, sidewise, or upward, with connections. In the above exercises assistance should be given by some of the scholars, as explained before. GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS Exercises in walking. Standing sidewise on the end of the board. 21 Walking sidewise in couples fa- cing each other, one on the board, the other on the floor as assistant. 22 As Exercise 21, both on the boards with different connections. 23 As Exercise 22, walking and stand- ing alternately. 24 Walking forward in one line, with different connections from one board to the other, by followstep. 25 As Exercise 24, by the common step. Standing crosswise on the end of the board. 27 As Exercise 26, by common step. 28 As Exercises 26 or 27, alternately. 26 Walking forward in one line, with the different connections by fol- lowstep left, right, or alter- nately. In Exercises 24 and 25, assistance may be given by part of the class walking on the floor stepping over the boards, and in 26, 27, and 28 by walking between the boards. GRADE II. Exercises in stepping with turning. Standing facing the board. 1 Step up with one quarter turn into step position backward or for- ward, and step down in the op- posite direction. 2 As Exercise 1, jumping down with one quarter turn. 3 As Exercise 1, one half turn to the sidestanding position on the boards. 4 As Exercise 3, jumping down back- ward without a turn. 5 Step up from one side and down on the other, by one half turns. Standing crosswise to the board. 6 Step up with one quarter turn to 8 Step up with one quarter or one the sidestanding position, and down in the reverse direction. 7 Step up from one side, and down on the other, by one half turn. half turn, and execute the exer- cises of the Grade I., Exercises 9-20, without assistance, using the different connections. BALANCING BOARD 277 13 Exercises in -walking. Stand crosswise on one end of the board. Walking forward. 9 Touchstep forward, and follow- step. Three-quarter time. (Step position forward left (1), step (2), and follow with the right (3)-) 10 As Exercise 9, touching the floor during the first course. 11 Raise the leg forward, and fol- lowstep. Three-quarter time. (Raise the left leg forward (1), step (2), and follow right (3).) 12 Raise the knees, and followstep. Three-quarter time. As Exercises 9-12, left, right, or alternately. As Exercises 9-12, in common- step. Two-quarter time. 14 Followstep and rise on the toes. Three-quarter or four-quarter time. 15 As Exercise 14, with bending the knees. 16 Followstep and trunk exercises ; bending forward, backward, sidewise, or turning. Four- quarter time. 17 Followstep and arm exercises; bending or raising forward or upward. 18 Walking on the toes. 19 Changestep. Two-quarter time. 20 Change and followstep, three- quarter time. Standing sidewise on one end of the board, walking sidewise. 21 Touchstep sidewise, or cross and followstep. Three-quarter time. (Step-position sidewise (or cross in front or rear with the left foot), step and follow with the right. ) 22 As Exercise 21, touching the floor. 23 Raise the leg sidewise and follow- step. Three-quarter time. 24 Raise the knees forward and fol- lowstep. Three-quarter time. 25 Crossstep, stepping over in front. Two-quarter time. 26 As Exercise 25, crossing in the rear. 27 Followstep and crossstep alter- nately. Four-quarter time. 28 Changestep and followstep. Three-quarter time. 29 Changestep and crossstep. Three- quarter time. 30 As Exercises 14-18, sidewise. Standing crosswise on one end of the board. Walk backward. The scholars are divided into ones and twos. 31 No. 1 walk backward by follow- 33 step on the board, while No. 2 34 walk forward between the boards, assisting No. 1. As Exercise 31, with common 35 step. 36 32 As Exercise 31, with changestep. As Exercise 31, No. 2 walk for- ward on the boards by follow- step. As Exercise 34, with common step. As Exercise 34, with changestep. 278 GERMAN-AM /;/;/' .1 A (, YM .V.I > IK < For connections, a long wand carried by the scholars in different positions may be added (Fig. 259). The exercises of the First Grade may be executed here without assistance. e "it." BEETLE-GOES-ROUND. The players form a circle, standing with their hands grasped backward. One then goes around on the outside of the circle with the beetle (generally a knotted handkerchief) in his hand, and cries out: "Look before you, don't look 'round, or with. the beetle I'll you pound." The players must look straight before them, any one looking around receiving a slap with the beetle. As soon as the player who is "it" sees fit he places the beetle in the hands of another player, and continues on his round just as before. After a few moments the player who got the beetle drives his right-hand neighbor around the circle, beating him with the beetle until he has again reached his place. The one who was " it " first takes the place of the player to whom he gave the beetle, while the latter must be "it." CAT AND MOUSE. The players form a circle, grasping each other's hands, and standing about arm's length apart, One of the players on the outside of the circle, called " the cat," cries out, " Mousey, mousey, do come out ; " while another, on the inside of the circle, called " the mouse," answers, " No, Miss Cat, I won't come out." " Then I'll break into your house, and I'll catch you, Mrs. Mouse," cries the cat, and makes for the mouse. During the chase the players do all in their power to prevent the cat from catching the mouse, by blocking her way in all possible manners, while, on the other hand, they facilitate the escaping of the mouse. As soon as the cat has caught the mouse, two other players take their places. RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 313 GARDEN SCAMP. This game is similar to the one described above as Cat and Mouse. While in Cat and Mouse the players blockade the cat's way, in this game they do not do this ; and both the gardener and the scamp are inside the ring. The gardener says, "What are you doing in my patch? " "Eating berries," replies the scamp. "Who let you in?" continues the gar- dener. " No one," answers the scamp, skipping away, with the gardener after him. Lest he succeed too quickly in catching the scamp, the gardener is compelled to pass through the same " holes " through which the scamp went ; he may also be compelled to imitate the actions of the scamp, such as crawling, hopping on one leg, etc., and not until he succeeds in capturing the scamp is the game ended, and two new players take the place of the gardener and the scamp. SKIP AWAY. The players form a circle, standing with hands grasped backwards. One of the players remains outside of the circle, and is " it." He must tap any one of the players on the back, and then he and the player whom he tagged must run around the circle in opposite directions. The one to reach the open place in the circle last is "it." The runners must, if so agreed upon, make a low bow, or shake hands, or perform some antic, as they meet in their run around the circle. JACOB, WHERE ART THOU? The players form a circle as above, with two of their num- ber inside the circle, both of whom are blindfolded. The blind- 314 <;i-:iiMAN-AUi-:i;i< .\.\ folded players are called Jacob and Ruth respectively. Ruth calls for Jacob, saying, "Jacob, where art thou ? " and In- must answer, "Here I am," trying his best, being governed by the sound of Ruth's voice, to evade her. Ruth, on tin- other hand, seeks, from the sound of Jacob's voice, to locate and catch him. As soon as she has succeeded in doing this, two other players take the place of Jacob and Ruth. It need hardly be said that both Jacob and Ruth may be boys or girls, or one of them a girl and the other a boy. PASSING THE BEAN-BAG. The players form a circle, standing from four to eight feet apart. A bean-bag is passed from one to the other, either to the left or right ; and when one bag has been passed around the circle two or three times, a second bag is added, then a third, and so on, until as many bags are circulating as can be handled by the players. The game may be varied by passing the sacks sideways forward, backward, overhead, etc., positions to be taken accordingly. LAST COUPLE OUT (PIG. 279). An uneven number of players pair off, and the couples form a column, one couple standing behind the other. The player who was left when the couples formed is " it," and takes his stand in front of the first couple. He (or she) claps hands three times, whereupon the last couple runs forward on either side of the column, and endeavors to grasp hands before the player who is "it" succeeds in tagging one of them. If the couples are made up of boys and girls, the player at the head of the column, if a boy, must tag the girl, and vice RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 315 versa ; and the partner of the boy or girl tagged must then be " it." If the couple succeed in evading the player in front of the column, and grasp hands before he tags them, they take their place at the head of the column, and the game continues. The player in front must not turn around to see which way the players are coming. If successful in catching one of them, places are exchanged with the child caught by joining hands Fig. 279. with its former mate at the head of the group, as the first pair. The player caught now stands at the head of the group and gives the signal, the game proceeding until all have had their turn at running to the front. BANDY. Two groups of players form rows opposite each other with a distance of ten to twenty feet between the rows, and far enough apart for each player to wield a stick or wand with which to strike the rubber ball. 316 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS Players stand behind each other, the rows facing in oppo- site directions. The duty of each player is to guard the open- ing in front of him, so that the ball does not pass through. The ball is hit alternately by both sides, the player missing the ball and allowing it to pass him being assigned to the opposite rank. The game continues until one side loses too many men, when new sides are chosen. SCULPTOR. One of the players, called "the sculptor," arranges the other players in different postures and attitudes as statues. No player dares move or speak, for as soon as he does the sculptor punishes him by beating him with a knotted hand- kerchief (the sack-beetle). After having arranged the players to suit his fancy, the sculptor leaves the playground, saying, "The sculptor is not at home." No sooner is he gone than the " statues " come to life, sing, dance, jump, and play havoc in general. On the return of the sculptor he counts, " one, two, three ! " and any player who is not in his former posture at three receives a beating with the knotted handkerchief from the sculptor. Should the sculptor punish the wrong statue, all the players rush at him with knotted handkerchiefs, and drive him to a goal previously decided upon, and the game is resumed with some other player as sculptor. COCK AND HENS. Two opposite goals are chosen. Between these stands the cock, while all the other players (the hens) are in one of the goals. RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 317 The cock calls : - "The cock crows once, the cock crows twice, A sack full of wheat, a basket of rice! All you hens, flee ! flee ! The one I catch, I'll take home with me." At this the hens make for the other goal. The one caught by the cock is obliged to carry him on his back to the opposite side of the playground, and then to take his place as cock. BATTERING RAM. The players join hands and form a circle, with one player on the inside and one on the outside of the circle. The latter, called the "ram," tries to get out of the circle, in any way he can ; and the outside player must do all in his power to assist him. If he succeeds in getting out, the players to the right and left of the place where he made his escape take the place of the ram and his assistant. HARE. The players grasp hands and form a circle around the hare, crying, "Hare, oh, hare, how did you get into the patch?" The hare replies, "I jumped in." They then cry, " Then see if you can get out," whereupon the hare tries by all possible means to escape. Should he succeed, the players pursue him, and the one catching him is hare. BLACK MAN. The players select two opposite goals, one of which the black man takes, while all the other players go to the oppo- site goal. The black man, on leaving his base, calls out, 318 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS "Are you afraid of the black man?" whereupon the other players cry, "No, not of one like you," and start for the opposite goal. The black man must try to tag as many of the players while on their way to the opposite goal as he can ; and every player tagged joins the black man and helps him tag other players, until all the players shall have been caught. In the new game the one first tagged by the black man, is "it." LAME GOOSE. A goal is selected to which one of the players, called the "lame goose," repairs. The other players call out to him, "Lame goose, lame goose, can't catch anybody," and run up and down in front of his goal, tantalizing him in all manners conceivable. "Can't I, though," replies the lame goose, and starts after the players. He must not, however, run after them, but must take three steps only, and then hop on one leg, and as soon as he "breaks," all the players rush at him and drive him to his goal, pommelling him on the back with their fists, until he has reached it. If, how- ever, the lame goose succeeds in tagging one of the players, he joins the other players in driving the one tagged to the goal, as described above, and the player tagged is "it." PRISONER'S BASE. Two sides of equal numbers occupy two opposite goals. At a certain distance, not too far from their goal, each side has another base, generally designated by a post or a circle drawn on the ground, called "Prisoner's Base," where any player caught in the manner hereafter described is kept prisoner. One of the sides starts the game, by giving "a RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 319 dare," i.e., one of the players leaves his goal, and ventures as near to that of the enemy as he dares. The opposite side sends out a player to tag the darer, while the darer's side immediately sends out a second man who " covers " the darer, and tries to tag the player who came out after the darer. The first side follows suit, and so on, until one or more players are caught, or all the players shall have returned to their goals. During all this time the player who left his goal last has the right to tag any player of the opposite side who left his goal before he did, and any player may at any time return to his goal, whereupon the one who started out after him will, of course, do the same. If any players are caught, they are conducted to the prisoner's base above mentioned, and can be freed only if one of their side succeeds in tagging one of them before the other side can send out a player to prevent this. Any side succeeding in making prisoners of all the players but one of the other side wins the game ; for one player alone cannot continue the game, as the goals must at all times be guarded ; if it is left unguarded at any time, and one of the enemy succeeds in entering it, the game is lost. The sending out of players to "cover" another player may be done at the direction of a " captain," who also appoints one of the players as "goal-guard;" or each player may use his own judgment in the matter. GUESS "WHO? For obvious reasons this is a game for boys only. One of the players either volunteers or is chosen to " be down " or " it." He must place his head in the lap of another player, 320 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS who is seated, and who so holds the head of the one k -\\n " that he cannot see. The other players, one or more, thru slap the one who is down with their flat hand on a prominent part of his body, whereupon he jumps up and guesses who slapped him. If he guesses correctly, down goes the one who hit him ; if he guesses the wrong one, down he goes himself again, and the fun continues. THREE-HIGH, OR, TAG THE THIRD MAN. The players form a double circle, standing one in front of the other. Two players, a tagger and a runner, are "it." The tagger must try to tag the runner, who runs around the circle, and soon steps in front of any pair of players. The tagger must then try to tag the last or third man. If the tagger succeeds in tagging his man, he steps in front of any pair, and the party tagged makes for the "third man." TENDER-GREEN. This game is very like Black Man, and in some places called so too. It differs from Black Man in that the one who is ' it " must fold his hands, and must tag one or more of the other players in this position only. After he has caught one or more players, they must join hands, and the end players only are allowed to tag the other players, the players having a right to break through the line if they can. When all the players are caught, the first one tagged must be "it." THE KING'S RUN. Two sides, divided as equally as possible in regard to num- bers and strength, stand at a convenient distance opposite each other, the players grasping each other's hands firmly. Each RUNNING AND OTHER GAMES 321 side has a captain, or king as he is sometimes called, who stands at the left end of the line. At his command one of his players runs with all his might, and tries to break through the enemy's line. If he succeeds, all the players cut off from the captain's end of the line must cross over and join the other side. If he fails, he must join the enemy's side. The other side then sends out one of their men, and so on, until but one man, the king, is left. He is allowed three trials to break through the enemy's line, and redeem his fallen fortunes ; but, if in three times he does not succeed, his side has lost the game. To make the game shorter, the players cut off from their line, and the runners who fail to break through the enemy's line, are out of the game until it is ended. NIGHT AND DAY, OR, BLACK AND "WHITE. Two sides are chosen, and take their places at some distance from each other. An umpire, standing somewhere on the play- ground, where he may be plainly seen by the players of both sides, holds in his hand a disk or board, black on one, and white on the other side. Each side has chosen its color, and waits for the umpire to display his disk. If he displays the black side, the " Nights " or " Blacks " must run, with the " Days " or " Whites " after them, and vice versa. All the " Nights " who are tagged by the " Days " before reaching a goal agreed upon are prisoners, and are out of the game until a new one begins. The side losing all its players loses the game. 31-2 GERMAN-AM ERIC AX GYMNASTIC* ROUNDEL BY WM. A. STECHER A ROUNDEL is a gymnastic composition, and is generally accompanied by music. A Roundel should not be practised or drilled for its own sake ; but it should be the result of class-work in tactics, fancy steps, free exercises, wand and club exercises, and so on. The move- ments that have been learned by a class during a term must be arranged in such a manner that the different parts harmonize. The examples given below are intended to show how such compositions may be arranged. MARCH ROUNDELS I The class is formed in a circle opened half distance facing inward, and divided into ranks of twos and fours (Fig. 280). Whenever possible, the neighbors grasp hands, and hold them shoulder high, with arms bent. When not otherwise em- ployed, all mark time. ^ _,_ ^ COtTKTS /I, 3 X 1 All march backward four steps / \ ' \ and then four steps in place. 8 ^ ^ ** \ 2 All march forward four steps / , and then four steps in place. 8 3 The ones march backward four steps and then forward four i steps. 8 ^ / 4 The twos march backward four X , ^ y steps and then forward four ^ * \ ^ y steps. 8 ^ ^ * { Z ^ ^ -u _i_ * 32 fig. 280. ROUNDEL 323 B COUNTS 1 All march backward four steps and then the ones forward four steps. 8 2 The ones backward four steps and return, the twos forward four steps and four steps in place. 8 3 All backward four steps and then the twos forward four steps. 8 4 The twos backward four steps and return, the ones forward four steps and four steps in place. 8 1 The ones circle left around the twos (Fig. 281). 2 The twos circle right around the ones COUNTS 3 Both circle left grasping left hands. 8 4 Both circle right grasping right hands. __8 32 1 The ones four steps forward and backward, the twos four steps backward and forward. 8 2 Both circle left grasping left hands, which are raised up- ward. 8 3 The twos four steps forward and backward, the ones four steps backward and forward. 8 4 Both circle right grasping right hands, which are raised up- ward. _8 32 Fig. 281. II Fig. 282. The scholars are formed in a front column composed of ranks of fours; the arms are crossed with the neighbors' (Fig. 282). 324 CKliMAN-AMERK'AX <. YM VA.STlt - A COUNTS The ranks a quarter wheel left and forward four steps. 8 The ranks backward four steps and a quarter wheel right backward. 8 The ranks a quarter wheel right and forward four steps. 8 The ranks backward four steps and a quarter wheel left back- ward. __8 32 B 1 The odd ranks a quarter wheel left and four steps in place, and the even ranks a quarter wheel right and four steps in place. 8 2 All four steps forward and backward. 8 3 All odd ranks a quarter wheel right backward and four steps in place, and all even ranks a quarter wheel left backward. 8 4 All four steps forward and backward. _8 32 C oomm 1 The ranks a complete wheel left. 2 The ranks a complete wheel right. 1 The odd ranks a complete wheel left, and the even ranks a complete wheel right. 2 The odd ranks a complete wheel right, and the even ranks a complete v/heel left. E 1 The odd ranks one half wheel left and right, and the even ranks one half wheel right and left. 2 The odd ranks one half wheel right and left, and the even ranks one half wheel left and right. 1 The ranks a quarter wheel and then four steps forward; re- peat three times, the odd ranks wheeling to the left, the even to the right. 16 16 32 16 32 16 32 32 III Sixteen scholars are formed in a front column in connected ranks of four (see Fig. 282). A COUNTS The first rank wheels in a circle left, the others marching for- ward and following, until all are formed in a cross left (Fig. 283). 32 h \ \- Fig. 283. ROUNDEL 325 B couxxs 1 The ranks a quarter wheel right and four steps in place. 8 2 The ranks a quarter wheel left backward and four steps in place. 8 3 The ranks a quarter wheel left and four steps in place. 8 4 The ranks a quarter wheel right backward and four steps in place. COUNTS and 8 _8 32 The ranks a quarter wheel left and four steps in place ; re- peat three times. D The odd ranks a quarter wheel left and four steps in place, and the even ranks a quarter wheel right and four steps in place. 32 2 All four steps forward backward. 3 The odd ranks a quarter wheel right backward and four steps in place, and the even ranks a quarter wheel left back- ward and four steps in place. 4 All four steps forward and backward. E 1 The ranks a half wheel right. 2 The ranks a complete wheel left. 3 The ranks a half wheel right. The ranks four steps forward and a quarter wheel left; re- peat three times. _8 32 16 32 32 IV Any even number of ranks of four can take part in this Roundel. They stand formed in a front column (see Fig. 282). COUNTS The first rank marches in a circle left, the others march forward and follow to a star left (Fig. 284). 32 B On the first count all face to the right, and then the leader of each rank marches to a large circle left (Fig. 285). 32 H X h K * *< ^ h v. I- Fig. 284, 326 GERMAN-A MERICAN G YMXA8 TICS -I f- xi sr. 285. C COUNTS 1 On the first count the leader of each rank marches in a small circle left (each rank has a circle for itself) (Fig. 286). 16 2 On the seventeenth count the leader of each rank marches to the common centre (to re- form the star). 8 3 Then the leaders countermarch left, and all face to the left, and stand as in Part A. _8 32 1- t : *w-h Fig. 286. 1 On the first count the odd ranks face right, march forward, circling left around the even ranks, and back into place (Fig. 287). 2 On the seventeenth count the even ranks face right, march forward, circling right around the odd ranks, and back into place. E On the first count the odd ranks face right, march forward four steps, countermarch left, march to the centre, again countermarch left, and form into place. The even ranks then repeat the above. 16 J16 32 Fig. 287. 16 32 ROUNDEL 327 F COUNTS ,. ~***"**--L On the first count all the ranks ^.X ^ y face right, the odd ranks .' ^ , x then march into a large cir- / .-" / > cle left, the even ranks in a / / ^ ** somewhat smaller circle right / ' ^. *- (in two concentric circles) -,- -- (Fig. 288). 16 1 \ >. ^ The even ranks then march \ \ >> ^. to the centre, countermarch \ \. y' ^ right, and face left (in their N % * " x, former place). *\ . ^ The odd ranks follow in the ***-. --"' same manner when arriving ^ 2 88. opposite to their places. 32 328 GERMAN-AMERICAS QYMNA8TH - RING ROUNDEL BY DR. KARL ZAPP To be executed by twenty-four girls. ARRANGEMENT OF CLASS. Two front lines of twelve (Fig. 289), each line subdivided into ranks of sixes, fours, threes, and couples. The arms are chained, each girl holding with one hand the ring of her second neighbor (cross arms and grasp hands). Fig. 289. PART I. Introduction (fancy steps ad libitum). 1 Forward on the toes with swinging 7 The same, with bending the trunk of the legs forward. 1 16 counts. backward and forward. 2 The same, with swinging the legs 16 counts. crosswise and bending the head 8 The same step, touching the feet sideways. 16 counts. sideways, and crosswise, and 3 Forward, with cross step backward. bending the trunk sideways. 16 counts. 16 counts. 4 The same, combined with turning 9 Gallop step (4 left and 4 right). the trunk and bending the knees. 8 counts. 16 counts. 10 All march forward to the centre 5 Forward, with cross step left and (8), divide into fours, forming a right, or polka step. 16 counts. star (see Fig. 284) (8), and turn 6 Double schottische (like heel and face to face (8). 24 counts. toe polka), touching the toe for- ward and backward. 16 counts. 1 NOTE. Line one advances, executing the designed steps, then the line separates into two lines of six, which wheel backward (thus clearing the way for line two), then face towards the rear and march to their starting-places, while line two has begun with the movements that line one has just finished. RING ROUNDEL 329 PART II. POSITION FACE TO FACE. A Ring Exercises. GROUP I. Arm and leg exercises. Bend the arms, Extend the arms outward, Reverse, Repeat, Raise the heels and bend the arms, Bend the knees and extend the arms outward, Reverse, 1 Brought forward, 12 2 Repeat, 5-8 3-4 3 Bend the arms, 1 5-8 Bend the right knee, and raise or swing the left leg for- 1 ward, 2 Reverse, 3-4 2 Repeat right 5-8 3-4 Repeat left and right 9-16 12 32 GROUP II. Arm and step exercises. 1 Raise the arms outward, Raise the arms upward, Reverse, Repeat, 2 Raise the arms outward, Place the left foot obliquely forward, Reverse, Repeat right, 3 Raise the arms outward, and COUNTS 1 2 3-4 5-8 1 2 3-4 5-8 raise the left leg obliquely forward, Raise the arms upward, swing the left leg backward, and rise on the toes of the right foot, Reverse, Repeat right, Repeat 3 left and right, 2 3-4 5-8 9-16 32 GROUP III. Ann, step, lunge, and rocking exercises. Raise the left arm forward, right arm backward, with a step left obliquely forward, Return to position, Repeat with the opposite arm and leg, 3-4 1 Repeat left and right, 5-8 2 2 The same, lunging obliquely forward, 1-8 830 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNASTICS 3 Lunge obliquely forward left and raise the arms, Rock the knees and bend the arms, Rock the knees and extend the arms, Position, The same, lunging right, Repeat left and right, 3 4 6-8 32 GROUP IV. Bending the trunk backward. 1 Bend the trunk backward, and raise the arms upward, 1 Lower, 2 Repeat, 3-8 2 Step position left obliquely forward, bend the trunk backward, the arms upward, 1-2 Reverse, 3-4 Repeat with the right foot, 5-8 COUNTS 3 Lunge left obliquely forward, the arms outward, 1 Bend the trunk backward, the arms upward, 2 Reverse, 3-4 Repeat right, 6-8 Repeat left and right, 9-16 GROUP V. Turning of the trunk. COUNTS 1 Turning the trunk to the front, raise the arms towards the front upwards, and place the feet towards the front in a sidestep posi- tion, 1 Recover, 2 Repeat in the opposite direc- tion, 3-4 Repeat both, 5-8 2 The same, lunging instead of step positions, 1-8 COUNTS 3 Lunge sideways towards the front, and raise the arms towards the front upward, 1 Face in opposite direction, and change the position of the arms and knees, Reverse, Opposite, Repeat, 2 3-4 5-8 9-16 32 160 counts in all. B Tactics. COUNTS 1 Form a star of six ranks of fours (Fig. 290), 8 2 Ranks one, three, and five gal- lop sideways four steps and Ranks two, four, and wheel in the star at same time, Repeat three times, return, 8 COUNTS oix the 8 24 48 RING ROUNDEL 331 3 Form the wheel star (Fig. 291), Ranks two and five forming in the centre. 4 Ranks one, three, four, and six wheel around in the star once with polka step, Ranks two and five form a circle in the centre with 32 hands joined overhead, and circle around with side- steps, 5 Form a star and fours again; and turn back to back by couples (position for Part III.), 40 16 96 v vl x< I *> X, I- ^x. \ V X Fig. 290. Fig. 291. PART III. POSITION BACK TO BACK. A Ring Exercises. GKOUP I. Arm, step, lunging, and trunk exercises. COUNTS 1 Raise arms outward with step forward, 1 Raise the arms overhead with step backward, Reverse, Repeat with opposite step, 2 The same, lunging sideways toward the front, Raise the arms overhead, and bend the opposite knee, Reverse, Toward the rear, 3 Lunge sideways toward the front, the arms outward, Bend the trunk sideways to the rear, the arms upward, Reverse, Lunge toward the rear, 4 Repeat Exercise 3, COCNTS 3-4 5-8 2 3-4 5-8 9-16 32 332 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS GROUP II. Lunging, kneeling, and bending backward. COUNTS 1 Lunge left and right forward, raising the arms outward, 1-8 2 Lunge forward left, 1 Kneel on the right knee, 2 Reverse, 3-4 Same right, 6-8 3 Lunge forward left, 1 Bend the trunk obliquely backward, turning the head toward the partner, the arms upward, 2 Reverse, 3-4 Same in the opposite direc- tion, 5-8 4 Repeat, 9-16 32 GROUP III. Lunging, rocking of the knees, and twisting of the trunk. COUNTS 1 Lunge left and right side- ways, the arms upward, 1-8 2 Lunge sideways left, the arms upward, 1 Bend the right knee, the arms downward, 2 Reverse, 3-4 Repeat, 5-8 cororn 3 Lunge sideways left, the arms upward, 1 Twist the tnmk inward (face to face), 2 Reverse, 3-4 Repeat, 5-8 4 Repeat Exercise 3, 9-16 32 96 counts in all. B Tactics. 1 Form the star of ranks of four, 2 Form the star wheel (Fig. 292), (Ranks one, three, four, and six form a ring around ranks two and five, which form a star of couples), 3 Ranks one, three, four, and six form the ring around the little star with schot- tische step, turning of the trunk, and alternate raising and curving of the arms. The little star in the centre ootrrra moves in the opposite di- rection with double schot- tische step, 16 4 Pause and face about at 5, 8 5 Repeat the movements of Exercise 3 in the opposite direction, 16 6 Pause and face about at 5, 8 7 Form the star of ranks of four, 8 8 Form three lines of eights, 9 Form three columns of twos, 8 10 Take position for Part IV., _8 96 KING ROUNDEL 333 PART IV. POSITION A BODY COMPOSED OF FOUR FRONT COLUMNS OF COUPLES (Fio. 293). A Ring Exercises. GROUP I. Step and lunging. COUNTS 1 Step position forward with the inner leg, and raising of the inner arm forward, 1 Position, 2 Step position sideways with the outer leg, and raise the outer arms sideways, 3 Position, 4 Repeat, 5-8 2 Lunge forward with the inner leg, and raise the inner arms upward, 1 Position, 2 Lunge sideways outward with COUNTS the outer leg, and raise the outer arms obliquely up- ward, grasping the ring of the next neighbor, 3 Position, 4 Repeat, 5-8 3 Lunge forward with the inner leg as in Exercise 2, 1 Rock backward, and swing the arms down, Return, Position, The same outward, 4 Repeat, 2 3 4 5-8 9-16 32 Fig. 292. Fig. 293. GROUP II. Rising on the toes and bending of the knees. 1 Step position forward left, the arms forward, Rise on the toes, the arms upward, Return, Repeat with the other foot, 2 Step position left backward, Bend both knees, the arms the same as in Exercise 1, Return, 1 Right, 3 No. 1 execute the Exercise 1 2 left and right. 3-4 No. 2 execute the Exercise 2 5-8 . left and right, 1 4 Repeat, exchanging the exer- cises, 3-4 5-8 J6 32 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS GROUP III. Bending of the trunk side-ways. COUNTS 1 Bend the trunk sideways out- ward and inward, alter- nately raising the inner and outer arms upward (see Fig. 308), 1-8 2 The same, with a cross step position simultaneously with the outer and inner leg, 1-8 2 Lunge outward, the arms out- ward, 1 "I NTS Bend the trunk outward, let go one hand and grasp the ring with both hands over- head, Return, Lunge outward as before, Bend the trunk inward, 4 Repeat Exercise 3, 2 3-4 5 6-7-8 1-8 16 32 counts in all. Fig. 294. B Tactics. COUNTS 1 Form six ranks of fours (Fig. 294), 8 2 Form two lines of twelves (see Fig. 289), 8 3 The .two lines of twelves change into a cross of sixes (Fig. 295), 8 4 The cross of sixes changes into a cross of threes, sur- rounded by a square of threes, by the outer three of each six wheeling about their own centre (Fig. 296), 8 5 a. The star of threes in the centre, execute 4 | 4 . wheel. 6. The four lines forming the square march backward and forward, 8 COUNTS c. And execute the twirling step outward (in three directions, one sideways right, the centre back- ward, the third sideways left), 8 ^ r r v Fig. 295. DOUBLE WAXD EXERCISES 335 ^ULJ-^xo i;. The same as Exercise 1, lunging forward with the left foot at the second 3-4 DOUBLE WAND EXERCISES 337 COUNTS count, and the right foot at the sixth count, 9-16 a. Left foot forward, and raise Fig. 300. the upper wand upward, Move the left foot back- ward, and lower the up- per wand backward, at the same time raising the lower wand upward, Reverse, The same with the right foot, 6. The same as Exercise 2, lunging forward at the 2 and 6 (Fig. 300), 3 a. Inner foot forward into the step position, and raise both hands forward, Lunge forward with the inner foot, and raise the wands in triangle or slant- ing position, Reverse, 6. The same, using the outer foot and raising the wands in the opposite triangular position, c. Repeat a and 6, PART II. Bending of knees and trunk. COUNTS 1 o. Rise on the toes, and raise both wands forward, 1 Bend arms, and move arms and wands outward (Fig. 301), Reverse, 6. The same, but moving the arms inward, 5-8 c. Repeat a and 6, 9-10 2 a. Rise on the toes, and raise both wands upward, 1 9-16 5-4 5-8 0-16 Fig. 301. 338 GEKMAN-AMEUICAN G YMNASTICS 2 3-4 COUNTS Bend the knees (deep), with the wands across the shoulder-blades, Reverse, b. The same, lowering the wands down backward, 5-8 c. Repeat a and 6, 9-16 8 a. Outer foot into step posi- tion forward, and wands upward, Turn inward on toes, the wands downward and crossed (Fig. 302), Reverse, b. The same with the inner foot, facing outward (back to back), (wands stay upward), c. Repeat a and 6, 4 a. Step position outward with the outer foot, and wands upward, Bend the trunk sideways outward, and cross the outer feet inward, cross- ing the wands, Reverse, ;i-4 The same, with step am! trunk movement inward, ">-S Repeat a and b, !-] Pause from, 1-4 Turn face to face wands crossed), Pause from, (the 5 '.-* 72 Fig. 302. PART III. Bending of trunk. (Position Face to face, the wands crossed.) COUNTS a. Step position forward left, the arms outward (wands horizontal), 1 Bend the trunk backward, raising the wands up- ward, and placing the hands together, 2 Reverse, 3-4 The same with the right foot forward, 5-8 b. Repeat, 9-16 COtJXTS 2 a. Step position forward left, the wands upward, the hands together, 1 Bend the trunk forward with hollow back and spread the arms outward, moving the left foot back- ward into the step posi- tion, 2 Reverse, 3-4 Repeat with the right foot, 5-8 339 COUNTS b. Repeat left and right, 9-16 3 a. Step position forward left, the wands upward as in Exercise 2, 1 Bend the trunk downward (chest upon the knee), D u a 3Q-C3 O U a /7ff. 303. COUNTS move the left leg back- ward, at the same time bending the right knee and moving the wands downward, 2 Reverse, 3-4 The same with the right foot, b. Repeat left and right, 5 a. Pause from, Change position at 5, Pause, 5-8 9-16 1-4 5 6-8 72 N. B. In changing position, No. 1 changes grip of hands, moves the upper wand with the right arm overhead, and faces about ; at the same time each set of ten couples change position as indicated by the diagram (Fig. 303). PART IV. Dissimilar Exercises. Executed in double time (two beats of music for one motion"). COUNTS Rising on toes and bending the knees. a. No. 1 step -position forward left, the arms outward, 1 Rise on the toes, the wands upward, 2 Reverse, 3-4 Repeat, 5-8 No. 2, rise on the toes, the arms outward, 1 Bend the knees (deep), hands on the shoulders, 2 Reverse, 3-4 Repeat, 6-8 b. The same as a, Nos. 1 and 2 exchanging exercises, 9-16 Lunging and bending the trunk downward, a. No. 1 step position forward left, the wands upward, 1 COUNTS Step position backward, bending the trunk down- ward, moving the wands downward (the ends touching the floor), 2 Reverse, 3-4 The same using the right foot, 5-8 No. 2, step position, etc., as in No. 1, 1 Lunge forward and extend the arms forward (over the back of No. 1), 2 Reverse, 3-4 The same with the right foot, 5-8 b. The same as a, Nos. 1 and 2 exchanging exercises, 9-16 3 Bending the trunk backward and kneeling. 340 GERMAN-AMERICAN Q YMNASTICS a. No. 1 step position back- ward left, the amis out- ward, i Bend the trunk backward; move the left foot into the step position forward, and raise the arms up- ward (Fig. 304), 2 Reverse, 3-4 Repeat with the right foot, 5-8 No. 2 step position back- ward right, and wands upward, i Kneel on the right knee, the arms outward, 2 Reverse, 3-4 Repeat with the other foot, 5-8 b. The same, Nos. 1 and 2 ex- changing exercises, 9-16 Bending trunk forward, lun- ging, kneeling. a. No. 1, bend the trunk for ward (hollow back) with a step position backward, the arms raised outward, Bend the trunk backward with step position for- ward, the arms raised upward, Reverse 3.4 ' I N I S Repeat with tin- right foot, 5-8 No. 2, lunge forward left, . Fig. 304. the arms raised outwards, 2 Kneel, the arms outward, 2 Reverse, . 3.4 Repeat with the right foot, 5-8 6. Repeat, Nos. 1 and 2 ex- changing exercises, 9-16 5 Pause, g "72 6 Close with a grouping. EXERCISES WITH HOOPS 341 EXERCISES WITH HOOPS BY DH. KARL ZAPP THE hoop may be used in a very graceful and artistic man- ner without necessarily losing sight of what is essential in all exercises, the proper adaptation to development and exertion. The hoop as a hand apparatus for light gymnastics is used in about the same manner as the wand. Hoops of larger size may also be used as a substitute for the small jumping-rope. As a rule, the hoops are made of light wood, and their dimensions vary from eighteen to thirty-six inches. HOOP ROUNDEL. Arranged for a class of girls from thirteen to eighteen years of age. The number of the class must be divisible by six (24, 30, 36). The class is divided into lines of six or twelve, with subdivisions into threes (Fig. 305). F.lg. 305. Each column of threes may be considered a unit, also each column of sixes. The Roundel consists of three parts, each part containing three subdivisions : a set of exercises ; tactics, executed with the waltz step or hop ; and grouping. I;I-:HMA.\ AMERICAN DIVISION OF CONTENTS. PART I. COUNTS Exercises, 80 Waltzing, COUNTS 32 Grouping, Exercises, Exercises, 64 112 256 PART II. Waltzing, 32 PART III. Waltzing, 32 96 Total, 400 counts. Grouping, Grouping, i ill S I - 16 16 16 48 In Part I. the exercises are executed left and right and simultaneously. In Part II. the exercises are executed simultaneously in dissimilar directions first, then the exercises are divided and the different files execute different exercises. In Part III. the exercises are dissimilar from the beginning. Music : A Waltz (" Auf Wiedersehen "). This Roundel was executed by sixty young ladies of the (Cleveland High School at the commencement exercises of 1892. The young ladies were dressed in short, white Gre- cian costumes, with flowing sleeves, and the hoops we- re- covered with white and twined with smilax. PART I. Step position and lunging. A Exercises. All exercises are executed left and right. STARTING POSITION. Hoop in front of the body, held with both hands at the lower third, hands in a line with the hips. EXERCISES WITH UOOPS 343 ARRANGEMENT OF CLASS. (See Fig. 305.) COUNTS 1 Raise the hoops sideways left with step position sideways right, 1 Position, 2 The same in opposite direc- tion, 3-4 Repeat, 5-8 2 The same, but lunging side- ways instead of step posi- tion, 9-16 3 Raise the hoops obliquely up- ward left (slightly tilted), with crossstep forward left, 1 Position, 2 Opposite, 3-4 Repeat, 5-8 4 The same, lunging obliquely forward left and right, 9-16 5 Turn the trunk (1 | 8) to the left, raising the arms with the hoop to the height of the shoulders, and crossstep backward left, 1 Position, 2 COUNTS The same opposite, 3-4 Repeat, 5-8 6 The same, lunging crosswise backward, 9-16 7 Raise the hoops sideways left, with sidestep right, 1 Raise the hoops vertically overhead, and close the heels, 2 Lower the hoop to the oppo- site side with a side step left, 3 Position, 4 The same in the opposite di- rection, 5-8 Repeat, 9-16 8 Nos. 1 and 3 in the same direc- tion, lunging instead of the step position. No. 2 executes the exercises in the opposite direction, 1-16 (Thus Nos. 1 and 2, and 3 and 2, apparently form one file twice during this exercise. ) B "Waltzing. COUNTS 1 Nos. 1 and 3 waltz forward (double hop, swinging the legs crosswise, the arms with hoop in an oblique position, alternately left and right), while No. 2 waltzes back- ward, 1-4 2 Nos. 1 and 3 cross over (or change places). No. 2 executes a complete turn (4 | 4) to the right, holding the hoop over the head, 5-8 COUNTS 3 Nos. 1 and 3 waltz backward with crosshop and a swing- ing of the hoop. No. 2 waltz forward with crosshop and swinging of the hoop, 9-12 4 No. 1 and 3 cross back to places. No. 2 turn in place, the hoop vertically overhead, 13-16 5 Repeat, 17-32 344 Raise the hoop obliquely up- 2 3 4 5-8 COUNTS ward inward, with a side- step inward, 1 Bend the trunk sideways in- ward, and swing the hoop in a semicircle to an oblique position outward, crossing the inner foot in front (Fig. 308), 2 Fig. 308. Return to position 1, Position, The same opposite, 7 Nos. 1 and 3, Exercise 5 ; No. 2, Exercise 6, 9 Nos. 1 and 3, Exercise 6; No. 2, Exercise 5, 3 4 5-8 1-8 9-16 64 B Waltzing. COUNTS COUNTS Nos. 1 and 6 (see Fig. 309), in Part I. Nos. 2 and 5 circle around Nos. 2 and 5 standing in a posing posi- with the same step and tion (crossstep, the hoop in swinging of the hoops as an oblique position, trunk 340 GERMAN-AMERICAN G YMNAST1CS slightly bent sideways in- ward), Nos. 3 and 4 with the hoops in the left hand, cross these, and both circle round a com- mon centre (Fig. 309). Nos. 2 and 5 execute the cir- cling around 1 and 6. Nos. 3 and 4 face about, join right hands, and circling round a common centre, 1-8 hold the hoop nicely in an elevated position in the left hand, 3 Repeat, 9-16 17-32 Fig. 309. C Grouping. 1 Pause, 2 Nos. 1 and 3 surrounding No. 2, lunge inward obliquely in the direction of No. 2 (forming a star), the hoops in a slanting position. No. 2 crossstep position, slightly bent sideways, the hoop en- circling the face, 4 3 Nos. 1 and 3 bend the oppo- site knee and the body out- ward, and swing the hoop outward. No. 2 kneel and raise the hoop over the head, 9-12 4 Pause, 4 counts, 13-16 5-8 PART III. Step position, lunging, balancing, etc. A Exercises. The files begin with, dissimilar exercises in dissimilar directions. 1 a. Nos. 1 and 3 step position sideways inward, the hoop sideways in the same direction, Swing the hoop in a semi- circle overhead to the other side, with a cross- step in front, Return, Position, In the opposite direction, No. 2 face inward (1 | 4 turn) with a step position backward and the hoop overhead, Face about 1 ] 2 turn and bend downward, bending the arms slightly, Resume position 1, Position, In the opposite direction, 2 3 4 5-8 b. Repeat the entire exercise, 9-16 EXERCISES WITH HOOPS 347 CODOTfl 2 Nos. 1 and 3 take the exer- cise of No. 2 ; No. 2 take the exercise of Nos. 1 and 3, 1-16 3 a. Nos. 1 and 3 lunge inward towards No. 2, forming a star with the hoop raised in an oblique direction to the opposite side, 1 Rock the knees, and swing the hoop in a semicircle to the opposite side, 2 Resume the former posi- tion, 3 Position, 4 The same in the opposite direction, 5-8 No. 2 step position back- ward and bend the knee, the hoop encircling the face, 1 Rise and raise the hoop overhead, 2 Resume the former posi- tion, 3-4 Repeat with the opposite foot, 5-8 6. Repeat the whole exercise, 9-16 4 a. Nos. 1 and 3 march back- ward with followstep and rising on the toes, at the same time raising the hoop overhead (the hoop is elevated at 1, and low- ered at 2), 1-8 Repeat the marching, but forward to places, 9-16 No. 2, balancing exercises. COUNTS Raise the hoop forward, and raise the left leg backward, 1 Move the hoop vertically upward and the leg for- ward, 2 Resume the former posi- tion, 3-4 Repeat with the right leg, 5-9 Repeat left and right, 9-16 b. Nos. 1 and 3 execute the balancing exercises of No. 2, while No. 2 takes the exercises of Nos. 1 and 3, marching forward and backward, 1-16 5 a. Nos. 1 and 3, step position forward with the inner foot, the hoop overhead, and the trunk bent back- ward, 1-4 Straighten the trunk grad- ually and lower the hoops, 5-8 Step position backward with the inner foot; bend the trunk gradually downward, and lower the hoop to the floor, 9-12 Straighten the trunk gradu- ally and raise the hoop, 13-16 Nos. 1 and 3 turning half toward each other 1 | 8 turn, during the first 8 counts, and then turning outward, 1-16 B "Waltzing. COUNTS Nos. 1 and 3 surrounding No. 2, waltz around No. 2, holding the hoops in the COUNTS hands, and toward the cen- tre of the star ; No. 2 pos- ing, 1-8 348 GERMAN-AMERICAN GYMNASTICS COUNTS < 1 1 m 2 No. 2 kneeling, the hoop en- their hands above No. 2 and circling the face, Nos. 1 and holding the hoops nicely ele- 3 face about, circling in the vated outward, 9-10 opposite direction, crossing Repeat, 1-16 C Grouping. COUNTS The groups are arranged in accordance with the exercises and the waltzing, 1-16 University of California SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed. JUN REC! JUNl liocn 91 fcDV. OK BE R( OE FornrL UCLA-ED/PSYCH Library GV511S81 L 005 602 488 8 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY A 000831 160 7